JP7381093B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pop-up pachinko game machine.

A pachinko game machine is equipped with a main control board that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control board that controls the effect of the game by controlling the liquid crystal display on the game board and the accessories. Some pachinko gaming machines perform effects using images, sounds, lamps, and accessories while special symbols are changing or during special games. Patent Document 1 is a document that discloses a technology related to the performance of this type of gaming machine.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-195798

By the way, there is room for improvement in the performance of this type of gaming machine in terms of the interest of the performance while the special symbols are changing.

The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and aims to further enhance the interest of playing games on gaming machines.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention includes a presentation means including an image display means, a movable accessory, a lamp, and an audio output means, a symbol display means, a special game execution means, and a means for executing each lottery including a jackpot lottery. Based on the lottery result, it is possible to cause the symbol display means to execute a symbol variation display, cause the special game execution means to execute a special game, and generate a plurality of types of commands including commands according to the progress of the game. The main control means includes a main control means, and a performance control means that receives a command generated by the main control means and performs a performance by the performance means according to a symbol variation display and a special game based on the received command, As a specific performance within a performance that matches the display, when the movable accessory is operating in a predetermined cut-in performance mode and the audio output means is outputting a performance sound effect of the cut-in performance; , when the effect control means receives a predetermined command, the movable accessory ends the operation mode of the cut-in effect, and the audio output means continues to output the effect sound of the cut-in effect. shall be.

According to the present invention, it is possible to further enhance the interest of playing games on a gaming machine.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a first operation mode of a movable accessory 33c in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the 2nd operation|movement aspect of movable accessory 33c, 33d in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the 3rd operation|movement aspect of the movable accessory 33a, 33c, and 33d in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the 4th operation mode of the movable accessory 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of performance in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. It is a diagram showing the relationship between the types of jackpots in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 and the combinations of the left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, right symbol 36R, and fourth symbol 36Z. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing each production mode of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, and production images, light emission modes, and production sound effects in each production mode. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of production in a live mode and a special training mode of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a special training mode performance in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a normal variation performance in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of normal reach performance in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a performance image, a light emission mode, and a performance sound effect of a normal reach performance in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of SP reach effect in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an effect image, a light emitting mode, and an effect sound of an SP reach effect in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a step-up effect in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a performance image, a light emission mode, and a performance sound effect of a step-up performance in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a character appearance effect in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a presentation image, a light emitting mode, and a presentation sound effect of a character appearance presentation in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a roulette effect in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a performance image, a light emission mode, and a performance sound effect of a roulette performance in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a SP development promotion performance in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a performance image, a light emission mode, and a performance sound effect of the SP development promotion performance in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a performance of SP development confirmation performance in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a performance image, a light emission mode, and a performance sound effect of the SP development confirmed performance in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a cut-in effect in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an effect image, a light emitting mode, and an effect sound of a cut-in effect in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of a production of a confirmed role object operation production in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a performance image, a light emission mode, and a performance sound effect of a fixed role object operation performance in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a rank-up effect in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an effect image, a light emitting mode, and an effect sound of a look-ahead display change effect in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a data structure order of an anime pattern in the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 10 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of the main control board 10 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing input control processing of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a first starting port detection switch input process of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. It is a diagram showing a special symbol retention storage area of the main control board 10 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 and a performance information storage area of the performance control board 120. 2 is a diagram showing a preliminary determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control process of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing special symbol storage determination processing of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing jackpot determination processing of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a normal symbol lottery determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a symbol determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a special game control table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a big prize opening/closing control table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing jackpot game processing of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing jackpot game ending processing of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a special game end setting table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a general-purpose map and electric power control process of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. It is a flowchart showing the main processing of the performance control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of the performance control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a variable performance pattern determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. It is a flowchart showing the prefetch pending display change effect selection process of the effect control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. 2 is a diagram showing a pre-read pending display change performance execution determination table and a final stage pending display mode determination table of the performance control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. It is a diagram showing a holding display change performance scenario determination table of the performance control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. It is a diagram showing a holding display change performance scenario determination table of the performance control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing a stage change determination process of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a stage change execution determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a new stage determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing special game effect selection processing of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the round performance control process of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a timer update process of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a performance input control process of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an operation information storage area of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 and an example of its update. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the overall control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a drawing end interrupt process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing V blank interrupt processing of the overall control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of the overall control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the lamp/drive control section 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a drawing end interrupt process of the lamp/drive control section 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing V blank interrupt processing of the lamp/drive control section 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of the lamp/drive control section 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an animation pattern setting process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an animation pattern setting process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an animation pattern setting process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an animation pattern setting process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an animation pattern setting process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an animation pattern setting process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an animation pattern setting process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an animation pattern setting process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an animation pattern setting process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an animation pattern setting process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an animation pattern setting process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an animation pattern setting process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a normal variation effect image control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a step-up effect image control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a normal reach effect image control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a premium character appearance effect image control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a character appearance effect image control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a roulette effect image control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a SP development promotion effect image control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an SP development confirmed performance image control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a SP reach effect image control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a premium cut-in effect image control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect image control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a confirmed accessory action first performance image control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a confirmed accessory action second effect image control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an image control timer update process of the overall control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an image control timer update process of the overall control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an image control timer update process of the overall control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an image control timer update process of the overall control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an image control timer update process of the overall control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an image control timer update process of the overall control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an image control timer update process of the overall control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an image control timer update process of the overall control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a sound pattern setting process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a sound pattern setting process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a sound pattern setting process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a sound pattern setting process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a sound pattern setting process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a sound pattern setting process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a sound pattern setting process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a sound pattern setting process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a sound pattern setting process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a sound pattern setting process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a sound pattern setting process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a sound pattern setting process of the general control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a normal variation production sound effect control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a step-up effect sound effect control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a normal reach effect sound effect control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a premium character appearance production sound effect control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a character appearance production sound effect control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a roulette performance sound effect control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a SP development promotion production sound effect control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a SP development confirmed performance sound effect control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a SP reach effect sound effect control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a premium cut-in production sound effect control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a cut-in production sound effect control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a confirmed role object operation first performance sound effect control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a confirmed role object operation second performance sound effect control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the voice control timer update process of the integrated control part 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the voice control timer update process of the integrated control part 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the voice control timer update process of the integrated control part 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the voice control timer update process of the integrated control part 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the voice control timer update process of the integrated control part 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the voice control timer update process of the integrated control part 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the voice control timer update process of the integrated control part 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the voice control timer update process of the integrated control part 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a lamp emission information setting process of the overall control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a lamp emission information setting process of the overall control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a lamp emission information setting process of the overall control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a lamp emission information setting process of the overall control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a lamp emission information setting process of the overall control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a lamp emission information setting process of the overall control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a lamp emission information setting process of the overall control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a lamp emission information setting process of the overall control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a lamp emission information setting process of the overall control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a lamp emission information setting process of the overall control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a lamp emission information setting process of the overall control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a lamp emission information setting process of the overall control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a normal variation effect lamp control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a step-up effect lamp control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a normal reach effect lamp control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a premium character appearance effect lamp control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a character appearance effect lamp control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a roulette effect lamp control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a SP development promotion effect lamp control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an SP development confirmed effect lamp control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a SP reach effect lamp control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a premium cut-in effect lamp control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect lamp control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. It is a diagram showing a confirmed accessory actuation first performance lamp control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. 2 is a diagram showing a determined accessory object operation second performance lamp control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a lamp control timer update process of the lamp/drive control section 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a lamp control timer update process of the lamp/drive control section 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a lamp control timer update process of the lamp/drive control section 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a lamp control timer update process of the lamp/drive control section 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a lamp control timer update process of the lamp/drive control section 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a lamp control timer update process of the lamp/drive control section 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a lamp control timer update process of the lamp/drive control section 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a lamp control timer update process of the lamp/drive control section 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing accessory drive information setting processing of the lamp/drive control section 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing accessory drive information setting processing of the lamp/drive control section 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing accessory drive information setting processing of the lamp/drive control section 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing accessory drive information setting processing of the lamp/drive control section 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing accessory drive information setting processing of the lamp/drive control section 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing accessory drive information setting processing of the lamp/drive control section 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing accessory drive information setting processing of the lamp/drive control section 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing accessory drive information setting processing of the lamp/drive control section 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a step-up effect accessory control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a premium character appearance performance accessory control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a character appearance performance accessory control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a roulette performance accessory control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a SP development promotion performance accessory control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an SP development confirmed performance accessory control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a premium cut-in effect accessory control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect accessory control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the confirmed accessory operation 1st performance accessory control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the confirmed accessory operation second performance accessory control mode determination table of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing accessory control timer update processing of the lamp/drive control section 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing accessory control timer update processing of the lamp/drive control section 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing accessory control timer update processing of the lamp/drive control section 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing accessory control timer update processing of the lamp/drive control section 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing accessory control timer update processing of the lamp/drive control section 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing accessory control timer update processing of the lamp/drive control section 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing accessory control timer update processing of the lamp/drive control section 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing accessory control timer update processing of the lamp/drive control section 150 of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1. FIG.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the overall configuration of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 1, the housing of the gaming machine 1 includes a rectangular outer frame 60 and a glass door 50 that visibly covers the gaming area 6 of the outer frame 60.

One end of the glass door 50 (on the left side when facing the gaming machine 1) is connected to an outer frame 60 via a hinge mechanism 51. A locking mechanism is provided at the other end of the glass door 50 (on the right side when facing the gaming machine 1). When the locking mechanism of the glass door 50 is unlocked with a special key, the glass door 50 can be swung by the hinge mechanism section 51 to open the gaming area 6. The glass door 50 is provided with a door open switch 18a that detects when the glass door 50 is opened.

Outside the portion of the glass door 50 that covers the gaming area 6, there are a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a first special symbol retention display 23, a second special symbol retention display 24, and a normal symbol display device 20. A symbol display device 22 and a normal symbol reservation display 25 are provided.

The first special symbol display device 20 is for notifying the lottery result of a jackpot lottery that is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 14 of the gaming area 6 (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "starting prize"). It is. The second special symbol display device 21 is for notifying the lottery results of a jackpot lottery that is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting opening 15 of the gaming area 6 (hereinafter referred to as "starting prize winning" as appropriate). be. The first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 each variably display a plurality of types of distinguishable special symbols. The first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 are composed of seven segment LEDs. In the following description, the special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 will be appropriately referred to as "first special symbols," and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 21 will be appropriately referred to as "second special symbols." It is called "design".

The first special symbol reservation display 23 is for displaying the number of reservations of changes in the first special symbol. The second special symbol reservation display 24 is for displaying the number of reservations of changes in the second special symbol.

Here, the suspension of the variation of the first special symbol is based on the establishment of the starting condition that was established earlier, although the starting condition for executing the variation of the first special symbol is satisfied due to the start winning of the first starting hole 14. This occurs when a variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being executed or when a special game is being executed.

Similarly, the suspension of the variation of the second special symbol is based on the establishment of the starting condition that was established earlier, although the starting condition for executing the variation of the second special symbol was satisfied due to the start winning of the second starting port 15. This occurs when a variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being executed or when a special game is being executed.

Each of the first special symbol retention display 23 and the second special symbol retention display 24 is composed of two left and right LEDs. To specifically explain the display mode of the number of reservations on the first special symbol reservation display 23 and the second special symbol reservation display 24, in the first special symbol reservation display 23, the number of reservations of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is If there is only one, the left LED lights up. When the number of pending changes in the first special symbol is two, the right LED lights up. When the number of pending variations of the first special symbol is three, the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up. When the number of pending variations of the first special symbol is 4, the two left and right LEDs blink. The display mode of the number of reservations on the second special symbol reservation display 24 is the same as that of the first special symbol reservation display 23.

The normal symbol display device 22 is for notifying the result of a normal symbol lottery which is triggered by the passing of a game ball through the normal symbol gate 13. The normal symbol display device 22 variably displays a plurality of types of normal symbols, each of which can be identified. The normal symbol reservation display 25 is for displaying the number of pending changes in the normal symbols. The normal symbol retention display 25 is composed of two left and right LEDs. The display mode of the number of reservations on the normal symbol reservation display 25 is the same as that of the first special symbol reservation display 23 and the second special symbol reservation display 24.

The gaming area 6 of the gaming machine 1 is approximately egg-shaped. The game area 6 is divided into a left area 6L on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right area 6R on the right side. At the left end of the left region 6L, rails 5a and 5b are provided which extend in an arc with a spacing slightly wider than the game balls between them. A ball return prevention piece 5c is provided at the upper end of the inner rail 5b among these rails 5a and 5b.

A production button 35 is provided below the portion of the glass door 50 that covers the game area 6. The performance button 35 is used to advance the operation performance that accompanies the operation. The performance button 35 is provided with a performance button detection switch 35a. When the production button detection switch 35a detects that the production button 35 has been pressed, it outputs an on signal indicating this.

A cross key 39 is provided to the left of the production button 35. The cross key 39 includes an up cursor key 39A, a down cursor key 39B, a left cursor key 39C, and a right cursor key 39D. A center key 39E is provided at a position surrounded by an up cursor key 39A, a down cursor key 39B, a left cursor key 39C, and a right cursor key 39D.

The upper cursor key 39A, the lower cursor key 39B, the left cursor key 39C, and the right cursor key 39D of the cross key 39 are provided with cross key detection switches 39a, 39b, 39c, and 39d. The center key 39E is provided with a center key detection switch 39e. When the cross key detection switch 39a detects that the up cursor key 39A is pressed, it outputs an on signal indicating this. When the cross key detection switch 39b detects that the down cursor key 39B is pressed, it outputs an on signal indicating this. When the cross key detection switch 39c detects that the left cursor key 39C is pressed, it outputs an on signal indicating this. When the cross key detection switch 39d detects that the right cursor key 39D is pressed, it outputs an on signal indicating this. When the center key detection switch 39e detects that the center key 39E has been pressed, it outputs an on signal indicating this.

A tray for storing game balls is provided on the back side of the performance button 35 on the glass door 50. An operation handle 3 is provided at the lower right of the production button 35 on the glass door 50. The player performs a firing operation, which is an operation of gripping the operating handle 3 with his right hand and turning it clockwise.

A touch sensor 3a is provided inside the operating handle 3. The touch sensor 3a is composed of a capacitive proximity switch that utilizes a change in capacitance caused by a player's contact with the operating handle 3. A ball feed solenoid 4b is provided in the tray of the glass door 50. The ball feed solenoid 4b is composed of a straight solenoid. A firing volume 3b and a firing solenoid 4a are provided near the rotating portion of the operating handle 3. Firing volume 3b is composed of a variable resistor. The firing solenoid 4a is composed of a rotary solenoid.

Each of these parts 3a, 3b, 4a, 4b performs operations related to firing the game balls in the tray into the game area 6 under the control of the firing control board 160. More specifically, when the player's hand touches the operating handle 3, the touch sensor 3a supplies a touch signal indicating this to the firing control board 160. When the player's hand turns the operating handle 3, the firing volume 3b outputs a voltage divided according to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 3 to the firing control board 160. The firing control board 160 controls energizing the firing solenoid 4a and the ball feed solenoid 4b based on the output voltage of the firing volume 3b while the touch signal is being supplied from the touch sensor 3a.

Under the energization control of the firing control board 160, the ball feeding solenoid 4b sends out the game balls in the tray one by one toward the hitting member directly connected to the firing solenoid 4a. The firing solenoid 4a rotates the firing member. The game balls sent out from the receiving tray toward the hitting member are hit between the rails 5a and 5b by the rotation of the hitting member, and are guided by the rails 5a and 5b to rise. The game ball that has risen between the rails 5a and 5b passes through the ball return prevention piece 5c, reaches the game area 6, and falls unpredictably within the game area 6. Here, the rotational speed of the firing solenoid 4a is set to approximately 99.9 times/min based on the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control board 160. As a result, the number of shots per minute is approximately 99.9 (shots/minute) because one shot is fired every time the firing solenoid 4a rotates once. That is, one game ball is fired approximately every 0.6 seconds.

At the top of the game area 6, a decorative member 7 is provided that influences the flow of the game ball. At the periphery of the game area 6, a first performance drive device 330a, a second performance drive device 330b, a third performance drive device 330c, and a fourth performance drive device 330d are provided. The first performance drive device 330a has a first movable accessory 33a. The second performance drive device 330b has a second movable accessory 33b. The third performance drive device 330c has a third movable accessory 33c. The fourth performance drive device 330d has a fourth movable accessory 33d.

The first performance drive device 330a, the second performance drive device 330b, the third performance drive device 330c, and the fourth performance drive device 330d are under the control of the lamp/drive control section 150 in the performance control board 120. , the first movable accessory 33a, the second movable accessory 33b, the third movable accessory 33c, and the fourth movable accessory 33d.

The first movable accessory 33a, the second movable accessory 33b, the third movable accessory 33c, and the fourth movable accessory 33d are located in positions where part or all of the accessory is hidden behind the peripheral edge of the game area 6. (hereinafter, this position will be referred to as the initial position), and by moving from the initial position to the side of the game area 6 and exposing the accessory, the development of the performance and confirmation of a jackpot are announced.

To explain more specifically, when the performance during the symbol variation display develops into a performance with higher reliability of jackpot, the third movable accessory 33c may perform the operation of the first operation mode performed alone. . As shown in FIG. 4, in the operation of the first operation mode, the third movable accessory 33c falls to the side of the game area 6.

When the performance during symbol fluctuation display is to encourage or notify the development to a performance with higher reliability of jackpot, the third movable accessory 33c and the fourth movable accessory 33d are linked to perform the second It may perform actions in the operational mode. As shown in FIG. 5, in the second operation mode, the third movable accessory 33c falls to the side of the game area 6, and the fourth movable accessory 33d moves in the width direction of the fourth movable accessory 33d. The fanning operation of moving to a position where approximately half of the decorative member 7 is exposed inside and then returning to the initial position is repeated multiple times.

In the performance during symbol fluctuation display, when notifying the jackpot confirmation, the third movable accessory 33c, the fourth movable accessory 33d, and the first movable accessory 33a perform the third operation mode in conjunction, or The third movable accessory 33c, the fourth movable accessory 33d, the first movable accessory 33a, and the second movable accessory 33b perform a fourth operation mode in conjunction with each other.

As shown in FIG. 6, in the operation of the third operation mode, the third movable accessory 33c falls to the side of the game area 6, and the fourth movable accessory 33d moves so that the inner edges of the left and right fourth movable accessory 33d The first movable accessory 33a moves to a position where it connects in an egg shape in the center of the game area 6, and falls to a position inside the inner edge of the left and right fourth movable accessory 33d.

As shown in FIG. 7, in the operation of the fourth operation mode, the third movable accessory 33c, the fourth movable accessory 33d, and the first movable accessory 33a perform the same operation as in the third operation mode, and then The second movable accessory 33b rises to a position inside the inner edge of the left and right third movable accessory 33c, and the raised second movable accessory 33b is divided into two and separated to the left and right, and the left and right accessories are separated from each other. It swings with the center of gravity as the swing axis.

As shown in FIG. 1, a first performance lighting device 340a is provided at the center of the first movable accessory 33a of the gaming machine 1. The first performance lighting device 340a includes a first lamp 34a. At the center of the upper part of the glass door 50, a second performance lighting device 340b is provided. The second performance lighting device 340b includes a second lamp 34b. A third performance lighting device 340c is provided at the center of the third movable accessory 33c. The third performance lighting device 340c has a third lamp 34c. A fourth performance lighting device 340d is provided slightly inside the upper left corner and right corner of the glass door 50. The fourth lighting device 340d includes a fourth lamp 34d. The first lamp 34a, the second lamp 34b, the third lamp 34c, and the fourth lamp 34d are RGB full-color LED lamps.

The first performance lighting device 340a, the second performance lighting device 340b, the third performance lighting device 340c, and the fourth performance lighting device 340d are under the control of the lamp/drive control section 150 in the performance control board 120. , the first lamp 34a, the second lamp 34b, the third lamp 34c, and the fourth lamp 34d emit light to produce a game effect.

Audio output devices 32 (speakers) are provided on the left and right sides of the second performance lighting device 340b at the top of the gaming machine 1. The audio output device 32 performs a game production using production sound effects under the control of the overall control section 141 in the production control board 120.

A plurality of general winning holes 12 are provided below the left area 6L in the gaming area 6. The general winning hole 12 is provided with a general winning hole detection switch 12a that detects passage of a game ball in the general winning hole 12. When the general winning hole detection switch 12a detects passage of game balls, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls are paid out.

A first grand prize opening 16 is provided below the right area 6R in the gaming area 6. The first big prize opening 16 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. The first big winning hole 16 is provided with a first big winning hole detection switch 16a that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole 16. When the first big prize opening detection switch 16a detects the entry of game balls, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out.

The first big winning opening 16 is provided with a first big winning opening opening/closing door 16b, which is a special electric accessory, and a first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c that switches the opening/closing of the first big winning opening opening/closing door 16b. . The first big prize opening opening/closing door 16b has a rectangular plate shape with approximately the same dimensions as the first big winning opening 16. The lower edge of the first big prize opening opening/closing door 16b is pivotably attached to the lower edge of the first big winning opening 16. When the first big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 16c is turned off, the first big winning opening opening/closing door 16b stands up substantially flush with the board surface of the gaming area 6 and enters a closed state in which the first big winning opening 16 is closed. When the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c is turned on, the first big winning opening opening/closing door 16b is in an open state tilted forward with the lower edge of the first big winning opening 16 as a fulcrum.

While the first big prize opening opening/closing door 16b is in the closed state, the game ball falling from above the first big winning opening 16 passes directly in front of the first big winning opening 16. Therefore, while the first big prize opening opening/closing door 16b is in the closed state, the game balls will not enter the first big winning opening 16. On the other hand, while the first big prize opening opening/closing door 16b is in the open state, most of the game balls falling from above the first big winning opening 16 are directed above the first big winning opening opening/closing door 16b. It hits the saucer surface and is led to the first big prize opening 16 side. Therefore, while the first big prize opening opening/closing door 16b is in the open state, the game balls can easily enter the first big winning opening 16.

A second grand prize opening 17 is provided at the lower center of the gaming area 6. The second big winning hole 17 is provided with a second big winning hole detection switch 17a that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big winning hole 17. When the second big prize opening detection switch 17a detects the entry of game balls, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out.

The second grand prize opening 17 is provided with a second grand prize opening opening/closing door 17b, which is a special electric accessory, and a second grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 17c that switches the opening/closing of the second grand prize opening opening/closing door 17b. . The second big prize opening opening/closing door 17b has a rectangular plate shape with approximately the same dimensions as the second big winning opening 17. The lower edge of the second big prize opening opening/closing door 17b is pivotably attached to the lower edge of the second big winning opening 17. When the second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 17c is turned off, the second big winning opening opening/closing door 17b stands up substantially flush with the board surface of the gaming area 6 and enters a closed state in which the second big winning opening 17 is closed. When the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 17c is turned on, the second big winning opening opening/closing door 17b is in an open state tilted forward with the lower edge of the second big winning opening 17 as a fulcrum.

While the second grand prize opening opening/closing door 17b is in the closed state, game balls falling from the diagonally upper right side and the diagonally upper left side of the second major prize opening 17 pass directly in front of the second major prize opening 17. do. Therefore, while the second big prize opening opening/closing door 17b is in the closed state, the game balls will not enter the second big winning opening 17. On the other hand, while the second grand prize opening opening/closing door 17b is in the open state, most of the game balls falling from above the second grand prize opening 17 are directed upward from the second grand prize opening opening/closing door 17b. It hits the tray surface and is led to the second grand prize opening 17 side. Therefore, while the second big prize opening opening/closing door 17b is in the open state, the game ball easily enters the second big winning opening 17.

Above the second big prize opening 17 at the lower center of the gaming area 6, there are a first starting opening 14 and a second starting opening 15. The first starting port 14 and the second starting port 15 are arranged in the vertical direction. The first starting port 14 is provided with a first starting port detection switch 14a that detects passage of a game ball through the first starting port 14. When the first starting port detection switch 14a detects passage of game balls, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out.

The second starting port 15 is provided with a second starting port detection switch 15a that detects passage of a game ball through the second starting port 15. When the second starting port detection switch 15a detects passage of game balls, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out.

The second starting port 15 is provided with a pair of movable pieces 15b. These movable pieces 15b are switched between opening and closing states by a starting port opening/closing solenoid 15c. When the starting port opening/closing solenoid 15c is turned off, the pair of movable pieces 15b are in a closed state, with each movable piece 15b standing upright. When the starting port opening/closing solenoid 15c is turned on, the pair of movable pieces 15b are in an open state inclined in an inverted V shape. The movable piece 15b constitutes an electric tulip (hereinafter appropriately referred to as an "electronic tube") as an ordinary electric accessory.

While the movable piece 15b is in the closed state, most of the game balls falling toward the second starting port 15 from diagonally above the left and right sides of the second starting port 15 hit the outer surface of the movable piece 15b and bounce back. Therefore, while the movable piece 15b is in the closed state, it becomes difficult for the game ball to pass through the second starting port 15. On the other hand, while the movable piece 15b is in the open state, most of the game balls falling toward the second starting port 15 from diagonally above the left and right sides of the second starting port 15 are guided to the inner surface of the movable piece 15b. The second starting port 15 is reached. Therefore, while the movable piece 15b is in the open state, the game ball easily passes through the second starting port 15.

A normal symbol gate 13 is provided at a position slightly upwardly away from the first big prize opening 16 in the right area 6R of the gaming area 6. The normal symbol gate 13 is provided with a gate detection switch 13a that detects passage of a game ball through the normal symbol gate 13.

In the gaming machine 1, a jackpot lottery is executed when the starting condition for the first special symbol is satisfied due to a winning start at the first starting opening 14, and the starting condition for the second special symbol is established due to starting winning at the second starting opening 15. When the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the special symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner for a predetermined time and then stops in a jackpot stop mode. If the lottery result is a loss, the special symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner for a predetermined period of time and then stop in a loss stop mode. In addition, a normal symbol lottery is executed when the normal symbol starting condition is established by the passage of a game ball through the normal symbol gate 13, and if the lottery result of the regular symbol lottery is a win, the normal symbol changes over a predetermined period of time. After the display, it stops in a winning stop mode, and the movable piece 15b is opened in a winning opening mode. If the lottery result is a loss, the normal symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner for a predetermined period of time, and then stop in a loss stop mode.

When the special symbols stop at a jackpot symbol, a special game corresponding to the type of jackpot indicated by the stopped symbol is executed. In the special game, the first grand prize opening 16 or the second grand prize opening 17 is opened until the number of prizes in the first grand prize opening 16 or the second grand prize opening 17 reaches the specified number or the opening time reaches the specified time. The opening of the game is made into one round game, and this round game is repeated a plurality of times. There are seven types of jackpots in the gaming machine 1 as shown below.

a1. 1st special symbol 16R variable win This jackpot is one of the ones that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when this jackpot is won, 16 round games from the 1st round to the 16th round are played. In each of the 16 round games, the first grand prize opening 16 is opened until the number of winnings in the first grand prize opening 16 reaches the specified number (for example, 9) or 29 seconds have elapsed → the first grand prize for 2 seconds The first big prize opening 16 is opened and closed in an opening/closing manner of closing the winning opening 16.

If this jackpot is won, the gaming state related to the jackpot lottery after the end of the special game becomes a high probability gaming state which is more advantageous than the low probability state. During the low probability game state, the probability of winning the jackpot lottery is 1/300. During the high probability game state, the probability of winning the jackpot lottery is 1/60.

If this jackpot is won, the game state related to the normal symbol lottery after the end of the special game becomes a time-saving game state that is more advantageous than the non-time-saving game state. During the non-time-saving gaming state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is 65535/65536, the fluctuation time of the regular symbol is 29 seconds, and the movable piece 15b of the second starting port 15 is opened for each winning of the regular symbol lottery. The time becomes 0.2 seconds. In addition, during the time saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is 65535/65536, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds, and the movable piece 15b of the second starting port 15 per winning of the regular symbol lottery. The opening time is 3.5 seconds.

When this jackpot is won, the game state changes to a high probability game state and a time-saving game state through a special game, and then the high probability game state and the time-saving game state continue until the jackpot is won again.

b1. 1st special symbol 8R fixed variation win This jackpot is one of the ones that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when this jackpot is won, eight round games from the first round to the eighth round are played. In each of the eight round games, the second grand prize opening 17 is opened until the number of prizes in the second grand prize opening 17 reaches the specified number (for example, 9) or 29 seconds have elapsed → the second grand prize opening for 2 seconds The second big prize opening 17 is opened and closed in an opening/closing manner of closing the winning opening 17. If this jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game will be a high probability gaming state and a time saving gaming state. The high probability game state and the time saving game state continue until the player wins the jackpot again.

c1. 1st special symbol 8R normal win This jackpot is one of the ones that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when this jackpot is won, eight round games from the first round to the eighth round are performed. The manner of opening and closing of the second big prize opening 17 in each of the eight round games is the same as that in the first special drawing 8R winning. If this jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game becomes a low probability gaming state and a time saving gaming state. The low probability game state and the time saving game state continue until the player wins the jackpot again or the number of fluctuations after the special game reaches 100 without winning the jackpot.

d1. 1st special symbol 2R fixed variation win This jackpot is one of the ones that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when this jackpot is won, two round games, the first round and the second round, are performed. In two round games, the second grand prize opening 17 is opened until the number of winnings in the second grand prize opening 17 reaches the specified number (for example, 9 pieces) or 10 seconds have elapsed → the second grand prize for 2 seconds The second grand prize opening 17 is opened and closed in an opening/closing manner of closing the opening 17. If this jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game becomes a high probability gaming state and a time saving gaming state. The high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state continue until the player wins the jackpot again. Here, the time required for the special game if you win this jackpot (total opening time of the jackpot) is compared to the time required for the special game (total opening time of the jackpot) if you win another jackpot. short. Therefore, more game balls will be acquired if the player wins another jackpot than if he wins this jackpot. The 1st special drawing 2R probability variable win means a jackpot that becomes a high probability game state after a short jackpot, and is also called a "short hit" or "sudden sure hit".

e1. 2nd special symbol 16R variable win This jackpot is one of the ones that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting conditions of the second special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when this jackpot is won, 16 round games from the 1st round to the 16th round are played. The manner of opening and closing of the first big prize opening 16 in each of the 16 round games is the same as that of the first special drawing 16R winning. If this jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game becomes a high probability gaming state and a time saving gaming state. The high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state continue until the player wins the jackpot again.

f1. 2nd special symbol 8R variable win This jackpot is one of the ones that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting conditions of the second special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when this jackpot is won, eight round games from the first round to the eighth round are played. The manner of opening and closing of the second big prize opening 17 in each of the eight round games is the same as that in the first special drawing 8R winning. If this jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game becomes a high probability gaming state and a time saving gaming state. The high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state continue until the player wins the jackpot again.

g1. 2nd special symbol 8R normal win This jackpot is one of the ones that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the second special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when this jackpot is won, eight round games from the first round to the eighth round are performed. The manner of opening and closing of the second big prize opening 17 in each of the eight round games is the same as that in the first special drawing 8R winning. If this jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game becomes a low probability gaming state and a time saving gaming state. The low probability game state and the time saving game state continue until the jackpot is won again or the number of changes in the special symbols after the special game reaches 100 without winning the jackpot.

In the following explanation, the first special pattern 16R probability variation, the first special pattern 8R probability variation, the first special pattern 2R probability variation, the second special pattern 16R probability variation, and the second special pattern 8R probability variation are collectively summarized as " It's called a "definite hit". In addition, the first special pattern 8R normal win and the second special pattern 8R normal win are collectively referred to as "normal win." In addition, the first special figure 16R variable probability win and the second special figure 16R variable probability win are collectively referred to as "16R win" as appropriate. In addition, the first special pattern 8R normal win and the second special pattern 8R normal win are collectively referred to as "8R normal win." In addition, the first special pattern 8R probability winning, the first special pattern 8R normal winning, the second special pattern 8R certain variation winning, and the second special pattern 8R normal winning are collectively referred to as "8R winning" as appropriate. The first special drawing 2R winning is appropriately called "2R winning".

There are two types of losses in the gaming machine 1: special losses and normal losses. The special loss is a loss that can only be selected in a jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol.

When the first special symbol stops at a special losing symbol, the game state related to the normal symbol lottery after the symbol stops becomes the first special time-saving game state. During the first special time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the opening time are the same as in the time-saving game state. The first special time-saving game state continues until a jackpot is won or the number of changes in the special symbol reaches 200 without winning a jackpot.

A normal loss is a loss that can be selected in both a jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol and a jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the triggering condition of the second special symbol.

Unlike a special loss, stopping at a normal loss symbol itself does not trigger a change in the gaming state. However, in a low-probability gaming state, if the variable display that normally stops at a losing symbol continues for 800 times, the gaming state related to the normal symbol lottery after the 800th symbol stops is changed to the second special time-saving gaming state. become. During the second special time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery, the variation time of the normal symbol, and the opening time are the same as in the time-saving game state. The second special time-saving game state continues until a jackpot is won or the number of changes in the special symbol reaches 600 without winning a jackpot.

An out port 11 is provided at the center of the bottom of the game area 6. A game ball that has reached the bottom of the gaming area 6 without entering any of the general winning hole 12, first starting hole 14, second starting hole 15, first big winning hole 16, and second big winning hole 17. is discharged through this outlet 11.

An image display device 31 is fitted between the decorative member 7 and the first starting port 14 in the game area 6. The image display device 31 performs a game performance using performance images under the control of the general control section 141 within the performance control board 120.

To explain in more detail, the image display device 31 performs a symbol fluctuation performance as a performance in accordance with the symbol fluctuation display of the special symbol. As shown in FIG. 8(a), in the symbol variation production, the left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, right symbol 36R, and fourth symbol 36Z (hereinafter, these symbols 36L, 36C, 36R, and 36Z are appropriately referred to as "production symbols"). 36") is displayed. The left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z change in synchronization with the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21, so that the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 The same jackpot determination result as that indicated by the special symbol on the special symbol display device 21 is notified.

The symbols displayed as the left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, and right symbol 36R include "1" symbol, "2" symbol, "3" symbol, "4" symbol, "5" symbol, "6" symbol, and " There are 7” symbols, 8” symbols, and 9” symbols. Moreover, the display mode of the fourth symbol 36Z includes a first display mode and a second display mode.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), when the variable display of special symbols starts with the start winning of the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R. Each "1" design → "2" design → "3" design → "4" design → "5" design → "6" design → "7" design → "8" design → "9" design → "1" ” symbols, and the fourth symbol 36Z starts displaying a cycle of the first display mode → second display mode → first display mode. When the special symbols stop after being displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time, the left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, right symbol 36R, and fourth symbol 36Z are fixed (completely) in a combination corresponding to the special symbol that has been stopped and displayed. ), the fourth lamp 34d emits light in a green light emission pattern (0), and the performance sound is muted. If the combination of the confirmed left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, right symbol 36R, and fourth symbol 36Z is a jackpot, a special game will be executed, and if it is a normal loss or special loss, the next variation will be executed. It will be done. Types of jackpot, special loss, and normal loss notified by the combination of left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, right symbol 36R, and fourth symbol 36Z in symbol variation performance, and jackpot, special loss, and normal loss reported by special symbol. The types of losses always match.

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the relationship between the types of jackpot, special loss, and normal loss and the combinations of the left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, right symbol 36R, and fourth symbol 36Z. In the gaming machine 1, when a 16R variable winning is won in the jackpot lottery, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are either "333" or "777" and the fourth symbol 36Z is the first display mode, The combination stops.

If you win the 8R random winning lottery, the left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, and right symbol 36R are "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", and " 999'', the fourth symbol 36Z stops in the first display mode.

If you win the 8R regular win in the jackpot lottery, the left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, and right symbol 36R are "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", and " 999'', the fourth symbol 36Z stops in the second display mode.

When a 2R probability-variable win is won in the jackpot lottery, the left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, and right symbol 36R are "135" and the fourth symbol 36Z is the first display mode.

If the result of the jackpot lottery is a special loss, the combination stops with the left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, right symbol 36R being "808" and the fourth symbol being in the first display mode.

When the result of the jackpot lottery is usually a loss, the left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, right symbol 36R, and fourth symbol 36Z are stopped in combinations other than the above.

Here, the display size of the fourth symbol 36Z is extremely small compared to the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R. For this reason, if the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R stop in the same symbol combination other than "777" and "333", it will not be possible to tell whether the winning is an 8R probability winning or an 8R regular winning. It has become. When the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R stop at "777" or "333", it is easy to see that you have won a 16R probability winning at the time of stopping.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), when the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z stop in a winning manner to perform a special game, the game machine A special game performance will be held. The special game performance includes an opening performance related to the opening of the special game, a round game performance related to the round game, and an ending performance related to the ending of the special game.

As shown in FIG. 8(b), an image 37(0) of the fluctuation is displayed at the lower center of the image display device 31. When there is a pending change in the first special symbol, an image 37 1 of the first pending change (first pending in the order of variation) in the first special symbol is displayed on the left side of the image 37 (0) of the change on the image display device _31. (1), image 37 1 (2) of the second hold (the second hold in the order of change), image 37 ₁ (3) of the third hold (the third hold in the change order), and image 37 ₁ (3) of the second hold (the second hold in the change order); Up to four images of image 37 ₁ (4), which is the fourth pending image in order, are displayed.

In addition, when there is a pending change in the second special symbol, an image of the first pending change in the second special symbol (the first pending in the order of variation) is displayed on the right side of the image 37(0) of the change on the image display device 31. 37 ₂ (1), image 37 ₂ (2) of the second hold (the second hold in the change order), image 37 ₂ (3) of the third hold (the third hold in the change order), and the fourth hold A maximum of four images of image 37 ₂ (4) (the fourth pending change order) are displayed. Here, in FIG. 8(b), only images 37(0), 37 ₁ (1), 37 ₁ (2), and 37 ₁ (3) are shown for simplicity.

When the number of reservations displayed on the first special symbol reservation display 23 increases, images 37 ₁ (1), 37 ₁ (2), 37 ₁ (3), or 37 ₁ (4) according to the increased number of reservations are displayed. Appear. When the number of reservations displayed on the second special symbol reservation display 24 increases, the images 37 ₂ (1), 37 ₂ (2), 37 ₂ (3), or 37 ₂ (4) according to the increased number of reservations are displayed. Appear.

While the image 37 ₁ (1), 37 ₁ (2), 37 ₁ (3), or 37 ₁ (4) corresponding to the number of pending displays on the first special symbol pending display 23 is displayed, the special symbol is displayed once. Each time a fluctuation ends, the image 37(0) of the relevant fluctuation disappears, the first pending image 371(1) moves to the position of the fluctuation image ₃₇ (0) of the relevant fluctuation, and the images after the second pending 37 ₁ (2), 37 ₁ (3), or 37 ₁ (4) moves to the position to the right of each.

While the image 37 ₂ (1), 37 ₂ (2), 37 ₂ (3), or 37 ₂ (4) corresponding to the number of pending displays on the second special symbol pending display 24 is displayed, the special symbol is displayed once. Every time a fluctuation ends, the image 37(0) of the relevant fluctuation disappears, the first pending image 372(1) moves to the position of the fluctuation image ₃₇ (0) of the relevant fluctuation, and the images after the second pending 37 ₂ (2), 37 ₂ (3), or 37 ₂ (4) moves to the position to the left of each.

In the following explanation, images 37 (0), 37 ₁ (1), 37 ₁ (2), 37 1 (3), _{37 1} (4), 37 ₂ (1), 37 ₂ (2), 37 ₂ ( 3) and 37 ₂ (4) are appropriately referred to as "pending display images."

As shown in FIG. 10(a), the gaming machine 1 has four modes: normal mode, live mode, special training mode, and help mode. Among the four modes, the normal mode is a mode in which the ball is played left-handed. Live mode, special training mode, and help mode are modes that can be digested by right-handed hitting. The normal mode is a mode in a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state. The live mode is a mode in a high probability gaming state and a time saving gaming state. The special training mode is a mode when the game is in a low probability game state and a time saving game state. The help mode is a mode in a low probability game state and a first special game time saving state, or a low probability game state and a second special time saving game state.

The player starts playing the game in normal mode. In the normal mode, the gaming machine 1 performs stage performances of three stages: a marine stage, a savanna stage, and a cosmo stage, in addition to a symbol variation performance. In the normal mode, there is a stage change at each predetermined timing within the symbol fluctuation display (for example, immediately after the start of the fluctuation) with one or more symbol fluctuation displays in between, and in this stage change, the type of stage production will be changed.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), if the winning is won with a probability of winning, the performance after the end of the special game becomes the live mode performance. In the live mode performance, the normally changing background image becomes an animation that shows multiple anime characters singing.

Live mode continues until you win the jackpot again. If the next winning jackpot is a probability/variable hit, the performance after the end of the special game will be the live mode performance again. If the next winning jackpot is a normal win, the performance after the special game ends will be the special training mode performance.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), if the normal win is won, the performance after the end of the special game becomes the special training mode performance. In the special training mode, the normally changing background image becomes an animation showing the anime characters training for the live performance.

In the lower right corner of the background image, the remaining number of training modes is displayed. The remaining number of times immediately after shifting to special training mode is 100. The remaining number of times is counted down as 100→99→98...→1 every time the left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, right symbol 36R, and fourth symbol 36Z are confirmed (completely stopped) in a losing manner. When the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are confirmed in a losing manner in the symbol variation performance of the variation in which the remaining number of times is 1, an image of "special training mode end" appears.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), when the special symbol stops at a special losing symbol while hitting left, the performance after the stop becomes a help mode performance. In the help mode production, the words "help time has begun" appear, and the normally fluctuating production becomes an animation showing a yacht drifting on the ocean.

In the lower right corner of the background image, the remaining number of help mode is displayed. When the game stops with a special losing symbol, the remaining number of times immediately after shifting to the help mode is 200. The remaining number of times is counted down as 200→199→198...→1 every time the left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, right symbol 36R, and fourth symbol 36Z are determined (completely stopped) in a losing manner. In the symbol variation effect where the remaining number of times is 1, the word "last" appears. In this variation, when the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are confirmed in a losing manner, an image of "Help time is over" appears.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), during the low probability game state, if the number of variations in which the special symbol stops at a normal losing symbol reaches 800, the performance after the 800th variation stops is in the help mode. It will be a performance. In this case, the remaining number of times after shifting to the help mode is 600. The remaining number of times is counted down as 600→599→598...→1 every time the left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, right symbol 36R, and fourth symbol 36Z are confirmed (completely stopped) in a losing manner. In the symbol variation effect where the remaining number of times is 1, the word "last" appears. In this variation, when the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are confirmed in a losing manner, an image of "Help time is over" appears.

As shown in FIG. 13, the gaming machine 1 performs a normal variation performance at the beginning of the performance in accordance with the symbol variation display. In the normal variation performance, the image display device 31 displays an image in which the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R undergo normal variation (the variation in which the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are displayed in one cycle separately) and the current image. A background image corresponding to the mode (in the example of FIG. 13, a background image of a marine stage) is displayed, and the production lighting device 340d causes the fourth lamp 34d to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the current mode, and outputs audio. The device 32 outputs BGM corresponding to the current mode.

FIG. 10(b) is a diagram showing the background image, light emission mode, and BGM in each mode. As shown in FIG. 10(b), in the marine stage in the normal mode, the normally changing background image becomes an underwater animation, the light emitting mode of the fourth lamp 34d becomes the light emitting pattern (1), and the BGM is set to the song ( 1). In the savannah stage in the normal mode, the normally changing background image becomes a savannah animation, the light emission mode of the fourth lamp 34d becomes the light emission pattern (2), and the BGM becomes the music (2). In the cosmo stage in the normal mode, the normally changing background image becomes a cosmic animation, the light emission mode of the fourth lamp 34d becomes the light emission pattern (3), and the BGM becomes the music (3).

In the live mode, the normally changing background image becomes an animation of singing by an anime character, the light emission mode of the fourth lamp 34d becomes the light emission pattern (4), and the BGM becomes the music (4). In the special training mode, the normally changing background image becomes a special training animation, the light emission mode of the fourth lamp 34d becomes the light emission pattern (5), and the BGM becomes the music (5).

In the assistance mode, the normally changing background image becomes an animation of a yacht traveling on the ocean, the light emission mode of the fourth lamp 34d becomes light emission pattern (6), and the BGM becomes music (6).

As shown in FIG. 14, in a performance that matches the symbol variation display, a performance that progresses from a normal variation performance to a normal reach performance may be executed. In the normal reach effect, the image display device 31 displays the effect image of the normal reach effect, the effect lighting device 340d causes the fourth lamp 34d to emit light in the light emission mode of the normal reach effect, and the audio output device 32 displays the BGM of the normal reach effect. Output. The reliability of a jackpot when proceeding from a normal variable performance to a normal reach performance is higher than when not proceeding to a normal reach performance.

When proceeding from the normal fluctuation performance to the normal reach performance, one of the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R (in the example of Fig. 14(a), the left symbol 36L) temporarily stops, and a "Dun" production effect is created to indicate the stop of the left symbol. Sound is output. After the two symbols excluding the temporarily stopped one continue to be displayed for a while, the other of the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R (in the example of FIG. 14(a), the right symbol 36R) is assumed to have stopped first. It temporarily stops at the same type of symbol, and a production sound effect of "Dun" indicating the stop of the right symbol is output, and a production sound effect of "Reach" indicating the establishment of a reach is output. In accordance with this, the background image, light emission mode, and BGM are switched to those for normal reach performance.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a background image, light emission mode, and BGM in normal reach performance. As shown in FIG. 15, in the normal reach performance, the background image becomes an animation showing an adventure, the light emission mode becomes a light emission pattern (7), and the BGM becomes a song (7).

As shown in FIG. 16, in the performance that matches the symbol variation display, there is a case where the normal reach performance evolves into the SP reach performance. In the SP reach effect, the image display device 31 displays the effect image of the SP reach effect, the effect lighting device 340d causes the fourth lamp 34d to emit light in the light emission mode of the SP reach effect, and the audio output device 32 displays the effect image of the SP reach effect. Output BGM for reach performance. The SP reach performance is an advanced performance that develops from the normal reach performance. The reliability of the jackpot when the normal reach performance develops into the SP reach performance is higher than when it does not progress to the SP reach performance.

When the normal reach performance develops into the SP reach performance, the middle symbol 36C decelerates and almost stops, then rotates at high speed, and the left symbol 36L and right symbol 36R move away to the left and right corners of the screen. In accordance with this, the effect image, light emission mode, and BGM are switched to those of the SP reach effect.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a background image, a light emission mode, and BGM in the SP reach effect. As shown in FIG. 17, in the SP reach effect, the background image becomes an animation showing a battle between a plurality of characters, the light emission mode becomes light emission pattern (8), and the BGM becomes music (8).

As shown in FIG. 18, a step-up performance may be executed as a specific performance within the performance in accordance with the symbol variation display. The step-up performance is a performance in which the step performance progresses to a stage designated as the final stage (in the example of FIG. 18, stage 2) from among the four stages as the upper limit. In the step-up production, photo images of girls unique to each stage are layered in order. In the step-up performance, the higher the stage, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. In the step-up performance, the image display device 31 displays the performance image of the step-up performance, the performance drive device 330c operates the movable accessory 33c in the operation mode of the step-up performance, and the performance lighting device 340c: The third lamp 34c is made to emit light in the light emission mode of the step-up performance, and the audio output device 32 outputs the performance sound effect of the step-up performance.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a performance image, an operation mode, a light emission mode, and a performance sound effect of the step-up performance. As shown in FIG. 19, in the step-up effect that ends in the first stage, a photo image of a girl appears, the light emission mode of the third lamp 34c changes to light emission pattern (9), and a shooting sound of "click" is output. Ru. In the step-up performance that advances to the second stage, the first photo image and the second photo image that overlaps it appear consecutively, the movable accessory 33c operates in the first operation mode, and the third lamp 34c The light emission mode becomes light emission pattern (9), and a shooting sound of "click, click" is output. In the step-up performance that advances to the third stage, the first photo image, the second photo image, and the third photo image appear in succession, and the movable accessory 33c moves in the first operation mode, The light emission mode of the third lamp 34c becomes the light emission pattern (9), and a shooting sound of "click, click, click" is output. In the step-up performance that advances to the fourth stage, the first photo image, second photo image, third photo image, and fourth photo image appear in succession, and the movable accessory 33c It operates in the first operation mode, the light emission mode of the third lamp 34c becomes the light emission pattern (9), and a shooting sound of "click, click, click, click" is output.

As shown in FIG. 20, a character appearance effect may be executed as a specific effect within the effect in accordance with the symbol variation display. The character appearance performance is a performance in which a character appears that suggests the possibility of a jackpot. The characters include character A, character B, character C, and character D. The jackpot reliability of the four types of characters is as follows: Character A<Character B<Character C<Character D. Character D is a premium character. When character D appears, a jackpot is confirmed. The character appearance performance in which character D appears is a rare premium performance.

In the character appearance performance, the image display device 31 displays a performance image of the character appearance performance, the performance drive device 330c operates the movable accessory 33c in the operation mode of the character appearance performance, and the performance lighting device 340c: The third lamp 34c is made to emit light in the light emission mode of the character appearance effect, and the audio output device 32 outputs the effect sound of the character appearance effect.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an effect image, an operation mode, a light emitting mode, and an effect sound effect of a character appearance effect. As shown in FIG. 21, in the character appearance performance of character A, an image of character A appears, the movable accessory 33c moves in the first operation mode, and the light emission mode of the third lamp 34c changes to the light emission pattern (10). Then, a "pico" sound is output. In the character appearance performance of character B, the image of character B appears, the movable accessory 33c moves in the first operation mode, the light emission mode of the third lamp 34c becomes the light emission pattern (10), and the character B appears with a "pico" sound. Sound is output. In the character appearance performance of character C, the image of character C appears, the movable accessory 33c moves in the first operation mode, the light emission mode of the third lamp 34c changes to the light emission pattern (10), and the character C appears with a "pico" sound. Sound is output. In the character appearance performance of character D, the image of character D appears, the movable accessory 33c moves in the first operation mode, the light emission mode of the third lamp 34c becomes the light emission pattern (11), and a "Piko Piko Picorn" is displayed. A jackpot confirmation sound is output.

As shown in FIG. 22, a roulette effect may be executed as a specific effect within the effect in accordance with the symbol variation display. The roulette performance is a performance that suggests which of a plurality of development destination candidates the game will develop into depending on the outcome of the roulette wheel. The roulette rolls include "SP", which suggests that it will develop into a SP reach effect, "help", which suggests that it will be in a help mode, "miss", which suggests that it will lose, and a short hit. There is an ``Otsu'' that indicates that you will be elected.

In the roulette performance, the image display device 31 displays the performance image of the roulette performance, the performance drive device 330c operates the movable accessory 33c in the operation mode of the roulette performance, and the performance lighting device 340c displays the performance image of the roulette performance. The third lamp 34c is caused to emit light in a light emitting mode, and the audio output device 32 outputs a sound effect for a roulette effect.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a presentation image, an operation mode, a light emission mode, and a presentation sound effect of a character appearance production. As shown in FIG. 23, in the roulette performance that suggests proceeding to the SP reach performance, a performance image appears in which the roulette rotates and stops at "SP", the movable accessory 33c operates in the first operation mode, and the third The light emitting mode of the lamp 34c becomes the light emitting pattern (12), and the roulette sound "Rurururu Rusuton" is output. After this, it will develop into SP reach performance. In the roulette effect that suggests proceeding to the help mode, a effect image that rotates the roulette and stops at "help" appears, the movable accessory 33c operates in the first operation mode, and the light emission mode of the third lamp 34c changes. The light emission pattern becomes (12), and the roulette sound "Rurururu Lusuton" is output. After this, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z stop in a special loss stop mode and proceed to the help mode. In a roulette performance that suggests a loss, a performance image appears in which the roulette wheel rotates and stops at a "loss", the movable accessory 33c operates in the first operation mode, and the light emission mode of the third lamp 34c changes to a light emission pattern ( 12), and the roulette sound "Rurururu Lusuton" is output. After this, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z stop in a normal loss stop mode, and the normal loss is confirmed. In the roulette effect that suggests a short hit, a performance image appears in which the roulette wheel rotates and stops at the "hit", the movable accessory 33c operates in the first operation mode, and the third lamp 34c lights up in the light emission mode. The pattern becomes pattern (12), and the roulette sound "Rurururu Lusuton" is output. After this, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z stop in a short hit mode, and the short hit is confirmed.

As shown in FIG. 24, an SP development promotion performance may be executed as a specific performance within the performance in accordance with the symbol variation display. The SP development incitement performance is a performance that incites the development to SP reach performance. In the SP development inciting performance, the image display device 31 displays a performance image of the SP development inciting performance, and the performance drive devices 330c and 330d operate the movable accessories 33c and 33d in the operation mode of the SP development inciting performance, The performance lighting device 340c causes the third lamp 34c to emit light in the light emission mode of the SP development promotion performance, and the audio output device 32 outputs the performance sound effect of the SP development promotion performance.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a performance image, an operation mode, a light emission mode, and a performance sound effect of the SP development promotion performance. As shown in FIG. 25, in the SP development promotion performance, a sandstorm effect appears, the movable accessories 33c and 33d operate in the second operation mode, and the light emission mode of the third lamp 34c becomes the light emission pattern (13). , a "rustling" sound is output.

As shown in FIG. 26, an SP development confirmation performance may be executed as a specific performance within the performance in accordance with the symbol variation display. The SP development confirmation performance is a performance that notifies the confirmation of the development to the SP reach performance. In the SP development confirmed performance, the image display device 31 displays a performance image of the SP development confirmed performance, and the performance drive devices 330c and 330d operate the movable accessories 33c and 33d in the operation mode of the SP development confirmed performance, The performance lighting device 340c causes the third lamp 34c to emit light in the light emission mode of the SP development confirmed performance, and the audio output device 32 outputs the performance sound effect of the SP development confirmed performance.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a performance image, an operation mode, a light emission mode, and a performance sound effect of the SP development confirmed performance. As shown in FIG. 27, in the SP development confirmation performance, a bubble effect appears, the movable accessories 33c and 33d operate in the second operation mode, and the light emission mode of the third lamp 34c becomes the light emission pattern (14). , a development confirmation sound called "kyurune" is output.

As shown in FIG. 28, a cut-in effect may be executed as a specific effect within the effect in accordance with the symbol variation display. The cut-in effect is an effect in which cut-in images that indicate the possibility of a jackpot appear in a superimposed manner. The cut-in images include a cut-in image with a green background, a cut-in image with a red background, a cut-in image with a zebra pattern background, and a cut-in image with a rainbow-colored background. The reliability of the jackpot for the backgrounds of the four types of cut-in images is green < red < zebra pattern < rainbow color. When a cut-in image with a rainbow-colored background appears, the jackpot is confirmed. The cut-in effect with a rainbow-colored background is a rare premium effect.

In the cut-in performance, the image display device 31 displays a cut-in image, the performance drive devices 330c and 330d operate the movable accessories 33c and 33d in the cut-in performance mode, and the performance lighting device 340c operates. , the third lamp 34c is made to emit light in the light emission mode of the cut-in effect, and the audio output device 32 outputs the effect sound of the cut-in effect.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the effect image, operation mode, light emitting mode, and effect sound of the cut-in effect. As shown in FIG. 29, in the cut-in effect with a green background, a cut-in image with a green background appears, the movable accessories 33c and 33d move in the second operation mode, and the light emission mode of the third lamp 34c changes to a light emission pattern. (15), and a "click" sound is output. In the cut-in effect with a red background, a cut-in image with a red background appears, the movable accessories 33c and 33d move in the second operation mode, and the light emission mode of the third lamp 34c becomes the light emission pattern (15), A clicking sound is output. In the cut-in effect of the zebra pattern background, a cut-in image of the zebra pattern background appears, the movable accessories 33c and 33d operate in the second operation mode, and the light emission mode of the third lamp 34c becomes the light emission pattern (15). , a "click" sound is output. In the cut-in effect with a rainbow-colored background, a cut-in image with a rainbow-colored background appears, the movable accessories 33c and 33d operate in the second operation mode, and the light emission mode of the third lamp 34c becomes the light emission pattern (16). , a jackpot confirmation sound called "Kyurukyuruun" is output.

As shown in FIG. 30, a fixed role object operation performance may be executed as a specific performance within the performance in accordance with the symbol variation display. The confirmed role object operation performance includes a first confirmed role object operation performance that notifies the confirmation of 8R probability odd win or 8R normal win by the linked movements of three movable role objects 33a, 33c, and 33d, and four movable role objects. There is a confirmed role object operation second performance that notifies the confirmation of the 16R probability change win by the interlocking actions of 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d. The confirmed role object operation first performance is executed because the left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, right symbol 36R, and fourth symbol 36Z are to stop in the stopping mode of 8R probability odd hit or 8R normal hit. This is the timing just before the symbol is confirmed in the fluctuation. The second performance of the confirmed role object operation that notifies the confirmation of the 16R probability change is executed when the left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, right symbol 36R, and fourth symbol 36Z stop in the stopping manner of the 16R probability variation hit. This is the timing just before the symbol is confirmed in the fluctuation that is supposed to occur.

In the confirmed role object operation performance, the image display device 31 displays the effect image of the confirmed role object operation performance, and the performance drive devices 330a, 330b, 330c, and 330d move the movable role object in the operation mode of the determined role object operation performance. 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d are operated, the production lighting devices 340a and 340b cause the first lamp 34a and the second lamp 34b to emit light in the light emission mode of the confirmed role object operation effect, and the audio output device 32 Outputs sound effects for object movement.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the effect image, operation mode, light emission mode, and effect sound effect of the confirmed role object operation first effect and the confirmed role object operation second effect. As shown in FIG. 31, in the first performance of the determined accessory motion, a yellow lightning effect appears, the movable accessories 33a, 33c, and 33d move in the third operation mode, and the first lamp 34a and the second lamp The light emitting mode of 34b becomes the light emitting pattern (17), and a jackpot confirming sound called "Kururu Rune" is output. In the second performance of the confirmed accessory movement, a golden lightning effect appears, the movable accessories 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d operate in the fourth operation mode, and the light emission mode of the first lamp 34a and the second lamp 34b changes. The light emission pattern (18) is activated, and the jackpot confirmation sound "Kyurunkyurunkyurururun" is output.

In addition, when the special symbol change is suspended due to the start winning of the first starting hole 14 or the second starting hole 15, the gaming machine 1 may execute a look-ahead pending display change effect. The look-ahead pending display change performance is a performance that suggests the possibility of a jackpot in the pending game by changing the display mode of the pending display image.

As shown in FIGS. 32(a) and 32(b), a rank-up effect may be executed as part of the special game effect during the special game. The rank-up effect is when the left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, and right symbol 36R are in a stopping state of "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", or "999". In the special game that is played after the winning is confirmed, at the beginning of the execution of the special game, it is not specified whether the winning is 8R fixed winning or 8R normal winning, and during the special game it is not clear which jackpot was won. This is a performance that clearly shows that. The rank-up effect is executed during a period from timing t _SKK to t _RDE after the start timing t _S4R of the fourth round of the special game. In the rank-up performance, the player is urged to repeatedly press the performance button 35, and when the number of consecutive presses of the performance button 35 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 30 times), it is reported whether or not it is an 8R probability winning.

To explain in more detail, in the rank-up effect, at timing t _SKK , an image that says ``Charge the gauge and get the probability change'' appears in the center of the screen. Timing t In _{the RDS} , a horizontally rectangular gauge image, an image imitating the production button 35, an indicator image indicating the elapsed status of the operation reception validity period of the production button 35, and an operation guide image (image of "Consecutive Hits!") are displayed. Appear. In the gauge image, the left end of the range of progress in the gauge image is MIN, the right end of the range of progress in the gauge image is MAX, and the amount of progress between MIN and MAX indicates the accuracy per probability change.

In the rank-up effect, the time marker in the indicator image (the right end of the hatched area in the figure) moves to the right as the operation acceptance validity period passes. When the player repeatedly presses the performance button 35 within the operation acceptance validity period, the amount of progress in the gauge image advances to the right in accordance with the repeated presses. If the number of consecutive presses of the production button 35 within the operation reception valid period reaches 30, or the end timing of the operation reception valid period t _RDE before the number of consecutive presses reaches 30, it is determined whether the rank up was successful or failed. You will be notified of what you did.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), in the presentation of a successful rank increase, the amount of progress in the gauge reaches "MAX" and images of "Success" and "Congratulations on your success" are displayed. When a rank-up success effect is performed in the special game, a live mode effect (FIG. 11(a)) is performed after the special game ends.

As shown in FIG. 32(b), in the performance of rank up failure, the amount of progress of the gauge stops before "MAX" and an image of "failure" is displayed. In the special game, when a performance of rank up failure is performed, a special training mode performance is performed after the special game ends.

As shown in FIGS. 31(a) and 31(b), the change of special symbols is suspended due to the start winning, and the suspension (in the example of FIGS. 31(a) and 31(b), the first special When a look-ahead pending display change performance is executed in which the final variation is the variation corresponding to the third pending symbol (3rd pending of the symbol), the timing t _HH immediately after the start of each variation from the starting prize winning to the final variation (Figure 31 (a) In the example of FIG. 31(b), the timing t _HH (2) immediately after the start of the variation two before the final variation, the timing t _HH (1) immediately after the start of the variation one before the final variation, the final variation At timing t _HH (0)) immediately after the start of , the display mode of the pending display image corresponding to the final change changes to one of blue, green, and red. In the look-ahead pending display change effect, the reliability of the jackpot increases in the order of blue < green < red.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back of the gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 10, an effect control board 120, a payout control board 130, a power supply board 170, a gaming information output terminal board 30, a power plug 171, and a power switch (not shown). ), a RAM clear switch (not shown), and the like. When a starting operation is performed on the gaming machine 1, power is supplied from the power supply board 170 to the main control board 10, the effect control board 120, and the payout control board 130, and these boards are started.

In FIG. 3, a main control board 10 controls the basic operations of the gaming machine 1. The main control board 10 includes a one-chip microcomputer 110m, an input port (not shown), and an output port (not shown). The one-chip microcomputer 110m of the main control board 10 is composed of a main CPU 110m, a main ROM 110b, and a main RAM 110c.

The input ports of the main control board 10 include a payout control board 130, a general winning opening detection switch 12a, a gate detection switch 13a, a first starting opening detection switch 14a, a second starting opening detection switch 15a, and a first big winning opening detection switch. 16a, a second big prize opening detection switch 17a, a door opening switch 18a, a magnetic detection sensor 18b, and a vibration detection sensor 18c are connected.

The output ports of the main control board 10 include a payout control board 130, a starting opening opening/closing solenoid 15c, a first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c, a second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 17c, a first special symbol display device 20, a second special A symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, a first special symbol retention display 23, a second special symbol retention display 24, a normal symbol retention display 25, and a game information output terminal board 30 are connected. The game information output terminal board 30 is for outputting an external output signal generated by the main control board 10 to a hall computer of a game parlor or the like. The game information output terminal board 30 is provided with a connector for connection to a hall computer or the like of a game parlor.

The main CPU 110m of the main control board 10 reads out a program stored in the main ROM 110b and performs arithmetic processing based on input signals from each detection switch and timer. Further, the main CPU 110m directly controls the display devices 20 to 22 and the displays 23 to 25, and sends commands to other boards according to the results of arithmetic processing. When the main CPU 110m is activated, the main CPU 110m executes initialization processing, and after the initialization processing is completed and the game becomes possible, the main CPU 110m generates a jackpot random number (random number in the random number range of 0 to 60,000), Special pattern random numbers (random numbers in the random number range from 0 to 99), random numbers for reach determination (random numbers in the random number range from 0 to 99), random numbers for special pattern variation (random numbers in the random number range from 0 to 99) , while updating various random numbers including normal symbol random numbers (random numbers in the random number range of 0 to 65535) within each random number range, changes in special symbols, fluctuations in normal symbols, and games such as special games. Control progress.

The main ROM 110b of the main control board 10 stores data such as game control programs. The main ROM 110b includes a jackpot determination table for the special symbol display device, a hit determination table for the normal symbol display device, a symbol determination table, a fluctuation pattern determination table, a preliminary determination table, a special game control table, a big prize opening/closing control table, Various tables such as a special game end setting table are stored. Details of these tables will be described later.

The main RAM 110c of the main control board 10 functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing by the main CPU 110m. The main RAM 110c includes a special symbol retention storage area, a special symbol special electric processing data storage area, a stop symbol data storage area, a normal symbol retention storage area, a regular symbol general electric processing data storage area, a normal symbol data storage area, and the number of rounds (R ) storage area, number of balls entering the big winning opening (C) storage area, high probability game flag storage area, time-saving game flag storage area, first special time-saving game flag storage area, second special time-saving game flag storage area, game status buffer , 1st special symbol reservation number (U1) counter, 2nd special symbol retention number (U2) counter, normal symbol retention number (G) counter, high probability game number (X) counter, time saving number (J) counter, 1st Special time saving number (J1) counter, second special time saving (J2) counter, variation number (K) counter, special symbol time counter, special game timer counter, normal symbol time counter, auxiliary game timer counter, performance transmission data storage area Various storage areas are provided. At the time of a power outage, the data in the used area of the main RAM 110c is backed up by the backup power supply with a checksum added to it, and when the power is restored, the data backed up by the backup power supply is restored through a data check using the checksum. I'm starting to get it.

The power supply board 170 supplies a power supply voltage to the gaming machine 1 and also supplies a power failure detection signal indicating whether the power supply voltage has become below a predetermined value to the main control board 10 and the performance control board 120. The power supply board 170 has a backup power supply made of a capacitor. The power supply board 170 sets the power failure detection signal to a high level while the power supply voltage exceeds a predetermined value, and sets the power failure detection signal to a low level when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value.

The production control board 120 is a slave control board that controls production based on reception of production commands from the main control board 10. The production control board 120 is connected to the main control board 10 so as to be able to communicate in one direction from the main control board 10 to the production control board 120. The production control board 120 includes an overall control section 141, a display/audio control section 140, a lamp/drive control section 150, an input port and an output port for production control, and the like. A production button detection switch 35a, key detection switches 39a, 39b, 39c, 39d, etc. are connected to the input port of the production control board 120.

The production control board 120 receives production commands from the main control board 10, and based on the received commands, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the production drive devices 330a, 330b, 330c, 330d, and the production It serves as a production control means for instructing the contents of production by the lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d. The production control board 120 includes a production control section 120m, a display/audio control section 140, and a lamp/drive control section 150.

The performance control unit 120m includes a sub CPU 120a, a sub ROM 120b, a sub RAM 120c, and an RTC 120d. The RTC 120d outputs a time signal indicating the current date and time to the sub CPU 120a. The RTC 120d operates using the supplied power when the gaming machine 1 is powered, and operates using the power from the backup power supply mounted on the power supply board 170 when the gaming machine 1 is powered off.

Based on commands sent from the main control board 10 and input signals from the timer, the sub CPU 120a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the program stored in the sub ROM 120b, and uses the sub RAM 120c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing. and transmits the commands generated in the process to the overall control section 141 and the lamp/drive control section 150. When the sub CPU 120a performs the startup operation, it performs initialization processing, and after the initialization processing is completed and the game is ready, the sub CPU 120a generates random numbers 1 to 6 for performance (each in the random number range of 0 to 99). While updating various random numbers including six types of random numbers (with 6 types of random numbers) within each random number range, the performance is controlled according to the progress of the game. Here, the same random numbers 1 to 6 for presentation are not obtained at the same time.

The sub ROM 120b of the performance control unit 120m stores data such as a performance control program. The sub ROM 120b contains a variable performance pattern determination table, a prefetch pending display change performance execution determination table, a final stage pending display mode determination table, a prefetch pending display change performance scenario determination table, a stage change execution determination table, a new stage determination table, etc. Various tables are stored. Details of these tables will be described later. The sub RAM 120c of the production control unit 120m functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing by the sub CPU 120a. The sub RAM 120c includes a performance information storage area, a performance symbol storage area, a symbol variation performance pattern storage area, a game state storage area, a performance pattern storage area, a reach establishment standby flag storage area, an SP reach standby flag storage area, and a stage change standby flag. Various storage areas are provided, such as a storage area, a rank-up performance success standby flag storage area, a reach establishment standby timer counter, an SP reach standby timer counter, an operation acceptance valid period start timer counter, and an operation acceptance valid period end timer counter.

The display/audio control section 140 serves as an image control means for controlling the image display device 31 and as an audio control means for controlling the audio output device 32. The display/audio control unit 140 includes a general control unit 141, a CGROM 146, an audio processor 144, an audio ROM 148, an input/output port, and the like. An image display device 31 and an audio output device 32 are connected to input/output ports of the display/audio control section 140 .

The overall control unit 141 includes an overall CPU 141a, an overall ROM 141c, and an overall RAM 141b. The general CPU 141a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a program stored in the general ROM 141c, performs arithmetic processing while using the general RAM 141b as a work area, and controls the VDP 145 and the audio processor 144 based on the processing. do.

The control ROM 141c includes an image/audio control program for displaying images and controlling audio, a display list generation program for generating a display list consisting of a group of drawing control commands, and an animation pattern for displaying animation of a production pattern. , animation scene information, a sound list generation program for generating a sound list composed of a group of sound control commands, a presentation image control mode determination table, a presentation sound effect control mode determination table, and the like.

An animation pattern is a pattern in which the display order of animation scenes and the like are associated with animation scene information. Animation scene information includes weight frames, target data (sprite identification information, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transparency, etc.), drawing method (display, hide, enlarge, translucent, etc.) display, etc.), and various information such as a duty ratio that is a parameter for the brightness of the image display device 31. For example, as shown in FIG. 34(A), the animation pattern for the stage production of the marine stage includes the identification information of the mermaid princess and dolphin that form the background image of the marine stage as target data, and includes their drawing positions as parameters. . As shown in FIG. 34(B), the animation pattern of the step-up effect includes identification information of a photo to be displayed in the step-up effect as target data, and its display position as a parameter. As shown in FIG. 34C, the animation pattern of the cut-in effect includes identification information of the cut-in to appear in the cut-in effect as target data, and its display position as a parameter. As shown in FIG. 34(D), the animation pattern of the normally variable display of the production symbols includes identification information of the left symbol, right symbol, middle symbol, and fourth symbol as target data, and their drawing positions as parameters. include.

VDP145 is connected to CGROM146. The CGROM 146 stores compressed image data and uncompressed palette data. The image data is a predetermined image of an image displayed as a sprite or a frame of a movie on the image display device 31 (for example, individual images such as a production pattern image, a background image forming the background of a production pattern, a character image, and a dialogue image). This is material data that summarizes pixel information of a range of pixels (for example, 32×32 pixels). Pixel information of image data is composed of color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image. Palette data is data in which color number information specifying a color number is associated with display color information indicating an actual display color of a pixel.

A VRAM 147 is provided within the VDP 145 . The VRAM 147 has a display list storage area, an expansion storage area, a first frame buffer area, a second frame buffer area, and the like. The display list storage area is an area for temporarily storing the display list output from the overall control unit 141 (the overall CPU 141a). The expansion storage area is an area for temporarily storing image data obtained by decompressing compressed image data in the CGMOM.

The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are areas for drawing and displaying images. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between drawing use and display use each time drawing starts.

The VDP 145 stores the display list sent from the general control unit 141 in the display list storage area of the VRAM 147, reads the image data indicated by the display list in the CGROM 146, and stores the image data in the drawing frame buffer of the VRAM 147 based on this image data. A frame's worth of drawing data is drawn, and one frame's worth of drawing data in the display frame buffer of the VRAM 147 is outputted to the image display device 31 as a video signal (RGB signal, etc.).

Note that the VDP 145 is supplied with an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, and by frequency-dividing this operating clock, it generates synchronization signals (horizontal synchronization signal/vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the image display device 31. and outputs it to the image display device 31. In this embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 155 is 30 fps (1/30 second = approximately 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second; The speed may be set to 60 fps (1/60 second = approximately 16.6 ms) so that the drawing (image display) is performed twice.

Audio processor 144 is connected to audio ROM 148. The audio ROM 148 stores compressed audio data. The audio processor 144 reads the audio data indicated by the sound list transmitted from the general control unit 141 from the audio ROM 148, decodes this audio data, performs acoustic processing on the signal obtained by decoding, and generates the audio-processed signal. is output to the audio output device 32 as a sound signal of the effect sound.

The lamp/drive control unit 150 serves as a lamp control means for controlling the production lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d, and as an accessory control means for controlling the production drive devices 330a, 330b, 330c, and 330d. It fulfills the following roles. The lamp/drive control section 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a, a lamp RAM 150b, a lamp ROM 150c, an input/output port, and the like. The input/output ports of the lamp/drive control section 150 are connected to the lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d and the driving devices 330a, 330b, 330c, and 330d.

The lamp CPU 150a reads out the program stored in the lamp ROM 150c in response to an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, performs arithmetic processing while using the lamp RAM 150b as a work area, and based on the processing, lights the production lighting devices 340a, 340b. , 340c, 340d and performance drive devices 330a, 330b, 330c, 330d.

The lamp ROM 150c determines and sets a lamp/drive control program for lighting the lamps and driving accessories, and lamp light emission information for the lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d for lighting, and controls lighting for lighting according to the settings. A lighting mode determination program for causing the devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d to emit light, determines and sets accessory drive information for the performance drive devices 330a, 330b, 330c, and 330d, and according to this setting, the performance drive device 330a, It stores an operation mode determination program for operating 330b, 330c, and 330d, a performance lamp control mode determination table, a performance accessory control mode determination table, and the like.

The payout control board 130 controls the payout of game balls. The payout control board 130 is connected to the main control board 10 so as to be able to communicate in both directions. The payout control board 130 includes a one-chip microcomputer 110m composed of a payout CPU, a payout ROM, and a payout RAM (not shown). The payout CPU reads the program stored in the payout ROM based on input signals from the payout ball counting switch 132 and the timer, performs arithmetic processing while using the payout RAM as a work area, and responds based on the processing. A command to do this is sent to the main control board 10. A payout motor 131 of a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game balls from a game ball storage section is connected to the output side of the payout control board 130. Based on commands sent from the main control board 10, the payout CPU reads a predetermined program from the payout ROM and performs arithmetic processing, and also controls the payout motor 131 of the payout device to pay out predetermined game balls. At this time, the payout RAM functions as a data work area during calculation processing by the payout CPU.

Next, the operation of the gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 10 of the gaming machine 1. The main processing is started when power is supplied from the power supply board 170 to the main control board 10 by a startup operation and a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110m of the main control board 10.

In FIG. 35, the main CPU 110m performs initialization processing (S10). In the initialization process, the main CPU 110m reads and executes a game control program from the main ROM 110b in response to power-on. In the initialization process, the main CPU 110m turns on/off the RAM clear switch (not shown) on the back of the gaming machine 1 when the power is turned on, and saves data in the main RAM 110c during the power outage monitoring process (S20) at the time of the previous power outage. Based on the power outage occurrence information and checksum contents that are backed up by If so, the data in the main RAM 110c is restored.

Next, the main CPU 110m performs power cutoff monitoring processing (S20). In the power outage monitoring process, the main CPU 110m monitors whether or not the power outage of the game machine 1 has occurred, and when the power outage has occurred, the main CPU 110m activates the firing mechanism (touch sensor 3a, firing volume 3b, firing solenoid 4a, and stop firing of game balls by the ball feed solenoid 4b), clear the output port, stop paying out game balls by the payout device, create and save a checksum in each storage area of the main RAM 110c, and information on the occurrence of power outage. After performing a series of settings, access to the main RAM 110c is set to be prohibited in preparation for power-off.

Next, the main CPU 110m performs a game random value update process (S30). In the gaming random number update process, the main CPU 110m updates the reach determination random number and the special figure variation random number. Next, the main CPU 110m performs an initial random value update process (S40). In the initial random value update process, the main CPU 110m updates the jackpot initial random value, the normal symbol initial random value, and the special symbol initial random value.

After this, the main CPU 110m repeats the loop processing from step S20 to step S40. In addition to this loop processing, the main CPU 110m executes timer interrupt processing every time the reset clock pulse signal is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 10. The main CPU 110m of the main control board 10 executes timer interrupt processing every 4 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse signal in the reset clock pulse generation circuit in the main control board 10.

In FIG. 36, when the reset clock pulse signal is generated, the main CPU 110m saves the information in the register of the main CPU 110m at that time to the stack area (S100). Next, the main CPU 110m performs time control processing (S110). The time control process is a process for updating counters used to measure various times in the main RAM 110c. In the time control process, the main CPU 110m subtracts 1 from the special symbol time counter, special game timer counter, normal symbol time counter, and auxiliary game timer counter in the main RAM 110c.

Next, the main CPU 110m performs random number update processing (S120). In the random number update process, the main CPU 110m updates the jackpot random number, the normal symbol random number, and the special symbol random number. More specifically, the main CPU 110m updates each random number counter by +1. In addition, if the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is reset to 0 and each random number is updated from the initial random number at that time. .

After executing step S120, the main CPU 110m performs an initial random value update process (S130). In the initial random value update process, the main CPU 110m updates the jackpot initial random value, the normal symbol initial random value, and the special symbol initial random value.

Next, the main CPU 110m performs input control processing (S200). In the input control process, the main CPU 110m includes a general winning opening detection switch 12a, a first winning opening detection switch 16a, a second winning opening detection switch 17a, a first starting opening detection switch 14a, a second starting opening detection switch 15a, It is determined whether there is an input to each of the various switches of the gate detection switch 13a, and if there is an input, predetermined data is set. Details of the input control processing procedure will be described later.

After executing step S200, the main CPU 110m performs special figure special electric control processing (S300). In the special figure special electric line control process, the main CPU 110m updates the value of the special figure special electric line processing data provided in the main RAM 110c according to the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1, and executes the special figure memory determination process (special figure special electric line process Processing when data = 0), Special symbol fluctuation processing (Processing when special pattern special electricity processing data = 1), Special symbol stop processing (processing when special pattern special electricity processing data = 2), Jackpot game processing (processing when special pattern special electricity processing data = 2) One of the five processes is selected and executed: the process when the special figure special electric processing data=3) and the jackpot game end process (the process when the special figure special electric processing data=4). Details of the procedure of the special figure special electric control process will be described later.

After executing step S300, the main CPU 110m performs general electric power control processing (S400). In the general pattern and general electricity control process, the main CPU 110m updates the value of the general pattern and general electricity processing data provided in the main RAM 110c according to the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1, and performs the normal pattern memory determination process (general pattern and general electricity control process). Processing when general electricity processing data = 0), Normal symbol fluctuation processing (Processing when general electricity processing data = 1), Normal symbol stop processing (Processing when general electricity processing data = 2), and auxiliary game processing (processing when general figure general electric processing data=3) is selected and executed. Details of the procedure of the general electric power control process will be described later.

After executing step S400, the main CPU 110m performs payout control processing (S500). In the payout control process, the main CPU 110m refers to the general winning hole prize ball counter, the first starting hole prize ball counter, and the second starting hole prize ball counter in the main RAM 110c, and pays out the number of game balls indicated by each counter. A payout number designation command that instructs the payout number is generated, and this command is sent to the payout control board 130. When the payout control board 130 receives the payout number designation command, it controls the payout motor 131 of the payout device to pay out game balls.

After executing step S500, the main CPU 110m performs data generation processing (S600). In the data generation process, the main CPU 110m generates external output data, starting opening opening/closing solenoid data, first grand winning opening opening/closing solenoid data, second grand winning opening opening/closing solenoid data, special symbol display device data, and normal symbol display device data. generate.

After executing step S600, the main CPU 110m performs output control processing (S700). In the output control process, the main CPU 110m outputs signals of external output data created in the data generation process of step S600, starting opening opening/closing solenoid data, first grand winning opening opening/closing solenoid data, and second grand winning opening opening/closing solenoid data. Performs port output processing. In addition, in order to light up each LED of the first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21, and normal symbol display device 22, the special symbol display device data created in the data generation process of S600 above and the normal symbol Performs display device output processing to output display device data. Furthermore, a command sending process is also performed to send a command set in the presentation transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the presentation control section 120m.

After executing step S700, the main CPU 110m restores the information saved to the stack area in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110m (S800).

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing details of the input control process. In FIG. 37, the main CPU 110m performs input processing for the general winning opening detection switch 12a (S210). In the general winning opening detection switch 12a input process, the main CPU 110m determines whether or not there is a detection signal input from the general winning opening detection switch 12a. If no detection signal is input, the process directly advances to step S220. When a detection signal is input, a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) is added to the general winning hole prize ball counter in the main RAM 110c and updated.

After executing step S210, the main CPU 110m performs a big winning opening detection switch input process (S220). In the big winning opening detection switch input process, the main CPU 110m determines whether a detection signal is input from the first big winning opening detection switch 16a or the second big winning opening detection switch 17a. If the main CPU 110m does not receive a detection signal from either the first big winning opening detection switch 16a or the second big winning opening detection switch 17a, the main CPU 110m directly proceeds to step S230. When a detection signal is input from the first big winning hole detection switch 16a or the second big winning hole detection switch 17a, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) is added to the big winning hole prize ball counter in the main RAM 110c. Then, the number of balls entering the big winning hole (C) in the number of balls entering the big winning hole (C) storage area in the main RAM 110c is updated by +1.

After executing step S220, the main CPU 110m performs a first starting port detection switch input process (S230). In the first starting port detection switch input process, the main CPU 110m determines whether a detection signal is input from the first starting port detection switch 14a. If the main CPU 110m does not receive the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 14a, the main CPU 110m directly proceeds to step S240. When a detection signal is input from the first starting port detection switch 14a, the prize ball counter is updated, it is determined whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is less than 4, and the first special symbol reservation is performed. Update of the first special symbol reservation number (U1) when the number (U1) is less than 4, storage of a random value in the special symbol retention storage area, preliminary determination of jackpot lottery and starting prize designation according to the determination result A series of processes such as setting a command, setting a command for specifying the number of reserved special symbols according to the first number of reserved special symbols (U1), etc. are performed. Details of the procedure for inputting the first starting port detection switch will be described later.

After executing step S230, the main CPU 110m performs a second starting port detection switch input process (S240). In the second starting port detection switch input process, the main CPU 110m determines whether a detection signal is input from the second starting port detection switch 15a. If the main CPU 110m does not receive the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 15a, the main CPU 110m directly proceeds to step S250. When a detection signal is input from the second starting port detection switch 15a, the prize ball counter is updated, it is determined whether the second special symbol retention number (U2) is less than 4, and the second special symbol retention is performed. Update of the second special symbol reservation number (U2) when the number (U2) is less than 4, storage of the random value in the special symbol retention storage area, preliminary determination of the jackpot lottery and starting prize designation according to the determination result A series of processes such as setting a command, setting a special symbol reservation number designation command according to the number of reservations (U2) in the second special symbol reservation number (U2), etc. are performed. The procedure of the second starting port detection switch input process and the procedure of the first starting port detection switch input process are the same except for the difference in the data writing destination.

Next, the main CPU 110m performs gate detection switch input processing (S250). In the gate detection switch input process, the main CPU 110m determines whether a detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 13a. If there is no detection signal input from the gate detection switch 13a, the main CPU 110m immediately ends the current input control process. When a detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 13a, the main CPU 110m generates a gate passage designation command, and sets the generated gate passage designation command in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Further, in this case, the main CPU 110m determines whether the count value (G) of the normal symbol reservation number counter that counts the number of normal symbol reservations (G) is less than 4. If the count value (G) of the normal symbol retention number counter is less than 4, the count value (G) is updated by +1, the normal symbol random value is obtained, and the obtained normal symbol random value is changed to the normal symbol random value. Store it in the symbol retention storage area.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing details of the first starting port detection switch input process. In FIG. 38, when the main CPU 110m receives a detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 14a (S230-1: Yes), the main CPU 110m proceeds to step S230-2. If there is no detection signal input from the first starting port detection switch 14a (S230-1: No), the current first starting port detection switch input process ends.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110m adds a predetermined number (for example, three) to the starting hole prize ball counter and updates it (S230-2). After that, the main CPU 110m determines whether the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reservation counter that counts the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is less than 4 (S230-3).

If the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reservation counter is not less than 4 (S230-3: No), the main CPU 110m ends the current first starting opening detection switch input process. Further, if the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reservation counter is less than 4 (S230-3: Yes), the count value (U1) is updated by +1 (S230-4).

After executing step S230-4, the main CPU 110m acquires the jackpot random number value, and at the same time, the main CPU 110m acquires the jackpot random number value and selects the number that has not yet been stored and has the highest number in the first to fourth storage sections of the first special symbol reservation storage area of the special symbol reservation storage area. A small storage unit is used as a data storage location, and the acquired jackpot random number value is stored in the data storage storage unit (S230-5).

FIG. 39(a) is a diagram showing the special symbol retention storage area. As shown in FIG. 39(a), the special symbol retention storage area includes a 0th storage area corresponding to the fluctuation, a first special symbol retention storage area corresponding to the retention of the first special symbol, and a storage area for the second special symbol. It has a second special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the reservation. Each of the first special symbol reservation storage area and the second special symbol reservation storage area includes a first storage section corresponding to the first reservation, a second storage section corresponding to the second reservation, and a third storage section corresponding to the third reservation. and a fourth storage section corresponding to a fourth storage section. As shown in FIG. 39(b), each storage section in the special symbol reservation storage section is configured to be able to store a set of jackpot random numbers, special symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, and special symbol variation random numbers. It has become.

After executing step S230-5, the main CPU 110m acquires a special symbol random number value and stores the acquired special symbol random number value in the storage section where data is stored in the first special symbol retention storage area (S230-6). .

After executing step S230-6, the main CPU 110m acquires the random number value for special pattern variation and the random number value for reach determination, and stores the obtained random number value for special symbol variation and random number value for reach determination in the first special symbol retention storage area. (S230-7).

After executing step S230-7, the main CPU 110m performs preliminary determination processing (S230-8). In this preliminary determination process, the main CPU 110m refers to the preliminary determination table in the main ROM 110b, and selects the high probability game flag storage area, time-saving game flag storage area, and The presence or absence of flags set in the 1st special time-saving game flag storage area and the 2nd special time-saving game flag storage area, and the jackpot random value stored in the storage unit of the 1st special symbol retention storage area in steps S230-5 to S230-7. Based on the combination of the special symbol random number, the reach determination random number, and the special symbol variation random number, winning information for the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition for the first special symbol of this time is determined.

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a preliminary determination table for determining the result of the jackpot lottery in advance. The preliminary determination table includes a jackpot random number, a special symbol random number, a gaming state (time-saving gaming state, non-time-saving gaming state, first special time-saving gaming state, or second special time-saving gaming state), a random number for reach determination, A set of a special symbol variation random number value, winning information, and a starting winning designation command is referred to when the starting condition for the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20 is satisfied, and the second special symbol display device 21 It is stored separately and referred to when the starting condition of the second special symbol is satisfied.

After executing step S230-8, the main CPU 110m generates a starting winning designation command corresponding to the winning information determined in the preliminary determination process of step S230-8, and sets this starting winning designation command in the performance transmission data storage area. (S230-9). Thereafter, the main CPU 110m refers to the count value (U1) of the first special symbol retention counter, generates a special symbol retention number designation command indicating the first special symbol retention number (U1), and specifies the special symbol retention number. A command is set in the performance transmission data storage area (S230-10).

The starting winning designation command and the special symbol reservation number designation command set in the performance transmission data storage area are transmitted to the performance control unit 120m in the output control process (S700) of the timer interrupt process.

Here, the procedure of the second starting port detection switch input process (S240) is that the reference destination for the number of reservations in steps S230-3 and S230-4 is the second special symbol reservation number counter, and steps S230-5 to S230 The storage destination of the random number value at -7 is the second special symbol reservation storage area, the reference destination of the random number value at step S230-8 is the second special symbol reservation storage area, and the number of reservations at step S230-10. This process is the same as that of the first starting port detection switch input process (S230) except that the reference destination is the second special symbol reservation counter.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing details of the special figure special electric control process. In FIG. 41, the main CPU 110m loads special figure special electric processing data (S301). In the next step S302, the main CPU 110m refers to the branch address from the loaded special figure special electric line processing data, and if the special figure special electric line processing data = 0, moves the process to special symbol memory determination processing (step S310), If the figure special electric line processing data = 1, the process moves to special symbol fluctuation processing (step S320), and if the special figure special electric line processing data = 2, the process moves to special symbol stop processing (step S330), and the special figure special electric line processing data If =3, the process moves to the jackpot game process (step S340), and if the special figure special electric processing data=4, the process moves to the jackpot game end process (step S350).

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol storage determination process. In FIG. 42, the main CPU 110m determines whether or not a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S310-1). More specifically, the main CPU 110m refers to the special symbol time counter in the main RAM 110c, and if the special symbol time counter is not 0, it determines that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and the special symbol time counter is 0. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner. If the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S310-1: Yes), the main CPU 110m ends the current special symbol memory determination process. Further, if the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S310-1: No), the process advances to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110m refers to the count value (U2) of the second special symbol retention counter in the main RAM 110c and determines whether the second special symbol retention number (U2) is greater than 0. If the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is larger than 0 (S310-2: Yes), the main CPU 110m updates the count value (U2) of the second special symbol reservation counter by -1 (S310-3 ). Here, the gaming machine 1 is a model that gives priority to the suspension of the variation of the second special symbol over the suspension of the variation of the first special symbol. In the gaming machine 1 of this type, during the time-saving gaming state, even if the starting condition for the first special symbol is established, the preliminary determination is not performed.

If the count value (U2) of the second special symbol retention number counter is not 1 or more (S310-2: No), the main CPU 110m refers to the count value (U1) of the first special symbol retention number counter and selects the first special symbol retention number counter. It is determined whether the number of reserved symbols (U1) is greater than 0 (S310-4).

If the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more (S310-4: No), the main CPU 110m ends the current special symbol storage determination process.

If the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is larger than 0 (S310-4: Yes), the main CPU 110m updates the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reservation counter by -1 (S310-6) ). After executing step S310-3 or S310-6, the main CPU 110m performs storage area shift processing (S310-7). In this storage area shift process, the main CPU 110m selects one of the first special symbol retention storage area and second special symbol retention storage area that corresponds to the symbol from which the number of reservations was subtracted in step S310-3 or S310-6. The following processing is performed as a processing target.

When the main CPU 110m subtracts the count value (U2) of the second special symbol reservation number counter in step S310-3, the main CPU 110m saves the data in the second to fourth storage sections of the second special symbol reservation storage area to 1, respectively. The data in the first storage part of the second special symbol reservation storage area is written to the 0th storage part which is the determination storage area. By writing this data to the 0th memory section, the random numbers (jackpot random number, special symbol random number, reach determination random number, special symbol variation random number) that were previously stored in the 0th memory section are erased. be done.

In addition, when the main CPU 110m subtracts the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reservation number counter in step S310-6, the main CPU 110m each stores data in the second to fourth storage sections of the first special symbol reservation storage area. , and the data in the first storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is written to the 0th storage section. By writing this data to the 0th memory section, the random numbers (jackpot random number, special symbol random number, reach determination random number, special symbol variation random number) that were previously stored in the 0th memory section are erased. be done.

After executing step S310-7, the main CPU 110m generates a special symbol retention number designation command for notifying the production control unit 120m of the first special symbol retention number (U1) and the second special symbol retention number (U2). , this special symbol reservation number designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area (S310-8).

After executing step S310-8, the main CPU 110m performs jackpot determination processing (S311). In this jackpot determination process, the main CPU 110m determines the lottery result (jackpot or loss) of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the current starting condition, determines the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot, and determines the jackpot that has been determined. A jackpot symbol designation command corresponding to the type is generated and set in the performance transmission data storage area. If it is a loss, a symbol designation command for loss is generated and set in the performance transmission data storage area.

To explain in more detail, in this jackpot determination process, the main CPU 110m determines that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the current starting condition is a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 43 (flowchart showing details of the jackpot determination process). It is determined whether or not (S311-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110m refers to the jackpot lottery determination table in the main ROM 110b, and determines whether or not the flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area at the time of execution of this step S311-1, and the 0th memory in step S310-7. The lottery result is determined based on the combination with the jackpot random number stored in the section.

FIG. 43(a) is a diagram showing a jackpot lottery determination table for the first special symbol display device. FIG. 43(b) is a diagram showing a jackpot lottery determination table for the second special symbol display device. In the jackpot lottery determination table, there are sets of jackpot random numbers and jackpot lottery results (jackpot, special loss, or normal loss) that are referenced in the low probability gaming state and those that are referenced in the high probability gaming state. It is remembered separately.

The number of jackpot random numbers that will be a jackpot in a low probability gaming state and the jackpot random number that will be a jackpot in a high probability gaming state in the jackpot lottery determination table for the first special symbol display device and the jackpot lottery determination table for the second special symbol display device. Comparing the numbers, the jackpot random numbers for jackpots in the low probability gaming state are 100 to 299, while the jackpot random numbers for jackpots in the high probability gaming state are 100 to 1099. The random number range of the jackpot random number is 0 to 60,000. Therefore, the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability gaming state is 1/300, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability gaming state is increased by five times to 1/60.

In addition, in the jackpot lottery determination table for the first special symbol display device, the jackpot random numbers for special losses in the low probability gaming state are 2000 to 2099, and the jackpot random numbers for special losses in the high probability gaming state are none. None. In the jackpot lottery determination table for the second special symbol display device, there is no special loss jackpot random number value in either the low probability game state or the high probability game state. Therefore, during the low-probability gaming state, the player will win a special loss with a probability lower than the probability of winning a jackpot, but during the high-probability gaming state, he will not win a special loss.

If the determination result in step S311-1 is a jackpot (S311-1: Yes), the main CPU 110m proceeds to step S311-2, or if the determination result in step S311-1 is a special loss or a normal loss ( S311-1: No), proceed to step S311-5.

In step S311-2, the main CPU 110m performs jackpot symbol determination processing. In this jackpot symbol determination process, the main CPU 110m refers to the jackpot symbol determination table in the main ROM 110b, and based on the special symbol random value stored in the 0th storage unit in step S310-8, stops the variation of the stop symbol. The symbol data is determined, and the determined stop symbol data is stored in the stop symbol data storage area in the main RAM 110c. Here, the stop symbol data indicates a two-digit number corresponding to the type of special symbol that is stopped and displayed after changing.

FIG. 45(a) is a diagram showing a jackpot symbol determination table. In the jackpot symbol determination table, a special symbol random value, special symbol type (jackpot type), stop symbol data, and symbol designation command set are set as starting conditions for the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20. It is stored separately into what is referred to when the start condition of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 21 is met.

The production design designation command is a command for notifying the production control unit 120m of the type of special symbol that will be stopped and displayed after changing.

The stop symbol data stored in the stop symbol data storage area in this step S311-2 is used when determining the jackpot symbol in the special symbol stop process, when determining the operating mode of the jackpot prize opening in the jackpot game process, and during the jackpot game end process. Referenced when determining the gaming state. The details will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 110m generates a jackpot symbol designation command corresponding to the stop symbol data determined in step S311-2, and sets this symbol designation command in the performance transmission data storage area (S311-3).

Next, the main CPU 110m determines whether or not a flag is set at the current time (jackpot The gaming state at the time of lottery is determined, and gaming state information indicating the determined gaming state is stored in the gaming state buffer (S311-4).

In step S311-5, the main CPU 110m performs losing symbol determination processing. In this losing symbol determination process, the main CPU 110m refers to the losing symbol determination table in the main ROM 110b, determines the stopping symbol data of the losing stopping symbol, and stores the determined stopping symbol data in the stopping symbol data storage area.

FIG. 45(b) is a diagram showing a special losing symbol determination table. FIG. 45(c) is a diagram showing a normal loss symbol determination table. A set of special symbol types, stop symbol data, and symbol designation commands are stored in the special lose symbol determination table and the normal lose symbol determination table.

Next, the main CPU 110m generates a losing symbol designation command corresponding to the stop symbol data determined in step S311-5, and sets this symbol designation command in the performance transmission data storage area (S311-6).

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 42. After executing the jackpot determination process (S311), the main CPU 110m performs a fluctuation pattern determination process (S312). In the fluctuation pattern determination process, the main CPU 110m refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table in the main ROM 110b, and determines the lottery result (jackpot or loss) of the jackpot lottery in step S311-1 and the time-saving game flag storage area at the time of execution of step S312. Whether or not the flag is set, the pending number (U2) or (U1) after updating in step S310-3 or step S310-6, the jackpot random value stored in the 0th storage unit in step S310-7, and the random value for reach determination , and the combination of the special figure fluctuation random number value, determines the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation.

There are two types of variation pattern determination tables: one that is referenced when the first special symbol changes, and one that is referenced when the second special symbol changes. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table that is referred to when the first special symbol is varied. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table that is referred to when the second special symbol is varied.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table includes the type of special symbol (type of jackpot), gaming state (time-saving gaming state, non-time-saving gaming state, first special time-saving gaming state, second special time-saving gaming state), and pending. A number, a random value for reach determination, a random value for special symbol variation, the type of variation pattern of the special symbol, a variation time, and a set of variation start commands are stored. The variation start command is a command for notifying the production control unit 120m of the type of variation pattern.

In the special symbol variation pattern determination table, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, a variation pattern with a long variation time is likely to be selected. On the contrary, in the special symbol variation pattern determination table, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, a variation pattern with a short variation time is likely to be selected.

For example, the variation pattern options corresponding to the special symbol 01 (16R probability variation win) in the first special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46 include variation patterns 12, 13, 14, and 15. The variation time of variation pattern 12 is T12 (for example, T12=20000 ms). The variation time of variation pattern 13 is T13 (T13=30000ms). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 14 is T14 (T14=40000 ms). The fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern 15 is T15 (T15=60000 ms). The magnitude relationship of the selection rates of the variation patterns 12, 13, 14, and 15 is as follows: variation pattern 12<variation pattern 13<variation pattern 14<variation pattern 15.

Variation pattern options corresponding to special symbol 02 (8R probability variation win) in the first special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46 include variation patterns 22, 23, 24, and 25. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 22 is T12 (20000 ms). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 23 is T13 (30000 ms). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 24 is T14 (40000 ms). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 25 is T15 (60000 ms). The magnitude relationship of the selection rates of the variation patterns 22, 23, 24, and 25 is as follows: variation pattern 22<variation pattern 23<variation pattern 24<variation pattern 25.

Variation pattern options corresponding to special symbol 03 (8R normal win) in the first special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46 include variation patterns 32, 33, 34, and 35. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 32 is T12 (20000 ms). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 33 is T13 (30000 ms). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 34 is T14 (40000 ms). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 35 is T15 (60000 ms). The relationship between the selection rates of the variation patterns 32, 33, 34, and 35 is as follows: variation pattern 32<variation pattern 33<variation pattern 34<variation pattern 35.

Variation pattern 11 is included in the variation pattern options corresponding to special symbol 04 (2R probability variation win) in the first special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 11 is T11 (for example, T11=18000 ms).

The variation pattern options corresponding to the special symbol 20 (special loss) in the first special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46 include a variation pattern 91. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 91 is the same length T11 (18000 ms) as that of the fluctuation pattern 11.

In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46, special symbol 00 (normal loss), non-time-saving gaming state, pending number 0 to 2, no reach (random value for reach determination is "0 to 69") There is a variation pattern 59 as a variation pattern option corresponding to the combination. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 59 is T9 (for example, T9=6000 ms).

In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47, special symbol 00 (normal loss), non-time-saving gaming state, pending number 0 to 2, reach available (random value for reach determination is "70 to 99") Variation patterns 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, and 65 are options for variation patterns corresponding to the combinations. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 60 is T10 (for example, T10=10000 ms). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 61 is the same length T11 (18000 ms) as that of the fluctuation pattern 11. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 62 is the same length T12 (20000 ms) as that of the fluctuation pattern 12. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 63 is the same length T13 (30000 ms) as that of the fluctuation pattern 13. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 64 is the same length T14 (40000 ms) as that of the fluctuation pattern 14. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 65 is the same length T15 (60000 ms) as that of the fluctuation pattern 15. The magnitude relationship of the selection rates of the variation patterns 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, and 65 is as follows: variation pattern 60 > variation pattern 61 > variation pattern 62 > variation pattern 63 > variation pattern 64 > variation pattern 65.

In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47, special symbol 00 (normal loss), non-time-saving gaming state, pending number 3 to 4, no reach (random value for reach determination is "0 to 89") There is a variation pattern 58 as a variation pattern option corresponding to the combination. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 58 is T8 (for example, T8=3000 ms), which is shorter than that of the fluctuation pattern 59.

In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47, the combination of special symbol 00 (normal loss), time-saving gaming state, pending number 0 to 2, and reach (random value for reach determination is "70 to 99") There are variation patterns 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, and 65 as options for variation patterns corresponding to . The magnitude relationship of the selection rates of the variation patterns 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, and 65 is as follows: variation pattern 60 > variation pattern 61 > variation pattern 62 > variation pattern 63 > variation pattern 64 > variation pattern 65.

Here, when comparing the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table of FIGS. 46 and 47 with the preliminary determination table (FIG. 40) shown earlier, it is found that in the preliminary determination table, the number of pending fluctuations of the first special symbol (U1 ) or the number of pending changes (U2) of the second special symbol, it is possible to search for the corresponding data in the table. On the other hand, in the variation pattern determination table, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the number of pending variations of the first special symbol (U1) and the number of pending variations of the second special symbol (U2) are not referred to. It is impossible to search for the corresponding data in the table. Therefore, in the preliminary determination table, although it is possible to determine the type of performance to be developed after the reach performance, it is not possible to distinguish between "normal variation" and "shortened variation".

In FIG. 42, the main CPU 110m generates a variation start command corresponding to the variation pattern determined in step S312, and sets this variation start command in the performance transmission data storage area (S313).

Next, the main CPU 110m selects the current game based on the presence or absence of flags set in the high probability game flag storage area, the time-saving game flag storage area, the first special time-saving game flag storage area, and the second special time-saving game flag storage area. The state is determined, a gaming state designation command corresponding to the found gaming state is generated, and this gaming state designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area (S314).

Next, the main CPU 110m performs processing for starting variable display of special symbols (S315). Specifically, the main CPU 110m inputs variable display data for causing the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 to display a variable display of special symbols (blinking of LEDs) in a predetermined processing area. set. When the variable display data is set in the predetermined processing area, data for turning on or off the LED is created in step S600, and the created data is output in the output control process in step S700, so that the first special A variable display of the symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 is performed.

Next, the main CPU 110m sets a variation time based on the variation pattern determined in step S312 above in the special symbol time counter (S316). The special symbol time counter is decremented every 4 milliseconds in step S110.

Next, the main CPU 110m sets the special symbol special electric processing data=1 (S317), and ends the current special symbol storage determination processing. In the subsequent special symbol special electric control process, the process moves to special symbol variation processing in step S302, and the special symbol variation processing is performed.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation process. In FIG. 48, the main CPU 110m determines whether the special symbol variation time has elapsed (S320-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110m refers to the special symbol time counter set in step S316, and if the special symbol time counter is 0, it is determined that the special symbol variation time has elapsed; If not, it is determined that the special symbol variation time has not yet elapsed. If the main CPU 110m determines that the special symbol variation time has elapsed (S320-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S320-2, and if it determines that the special symbol variation time has not elapsed (S320-1: No), the current special symbol variation process is ended and the next subroutine is executed.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110m performs processing to stop the variable display of the special symbols. Specifically, the main CPU 110m clears the variable display data set in step S315, and displays the special symbol set in step S311-2 or S311-5 on the first special symbol display device 20 or the first special symbol display device 20. 2. Set stop symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 21 in a predetermined processing area (S320-2). As a result, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21.

Next, the main CPU 110m sets a symbol confirmation command in the performance transmission data storage area (S320-3).

Next, the main CPU 110m sets a symbol stop time (0.5 seconds=125 counter) in the special symbol time counter (S320-4). The special symbol time counter is decremented every 4 milliseconds in step S110.

Next, the main CPU 110m sets the special symbol special electric processing data to 2 (S320-5), and ends the current special symbol variation processing. In the subsequent special symbol special electric control process, the process moves to special symbol stopping processing in step S302, and the special symbol stopping processing is performed.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol stop processing. In FIG. 49, the main CPU 110m determines whether the special symbol stop time has elapsed (S330-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110m refers to the special symbol time counter set in step S320-4, and if the special symbol time counter is 0, it determines that the special symbol stop time has elapsed, and the special symbol time counter If it is not 0, it is determined that the stop time of the special symbol has not yet elapsed. If the main CPU 110m determines that the special symbol stop time has elapsed (S330-1: Yes), the main CPU 110m proceeds to step S330-2, and if it determines that the special symbol stop time has not elapsed (S330-1: No), proceed to step S330-24.

In step S330-2, the main CPU 110m checks whether the high probability game flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area. If the high probability game flag is not set (S330-2: No), the main CPU 110m proceeds to step S330-3, and if the high probability game flag is set (S330-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S330- Proceed to step 4.

In step S330-3, the main CPU 110m updates the number of fluctuations (K) in the number of fluctuations (K) storage area by +1, and proceeds to step S330-4. In step S330-4, the main CPU 110m checks whether the time-saving game flag is set in the time-saving game flag storage area. If the time saving game flag is set (S330-4: No), the main CPU 110m proceeds to step S330-5. If the time saving game flag is not set (S330-4: No), the process advances to step S330-8.

In step S330-5, the main CPU 110m updates the number of time reductions (J), the first special number of time reductions (J1), and the second special number of time reductions (J2) that are not 0 by -1. In the next step S350-6, the main CPU 110m checks whether any of the number of time reductions (J), the first special number of time reductions (J1), and the second special number of time reductions (J2) has become zero. The main CPU 110m proceeds to step S330-7 when there is a time saving number that becomes 0 (S350-6: Yes), and proceeds to step S330-8 when there is no time saving number that became 0 (S350-6: No). move on.

In step S330-7, the main CPU 110m clears the flag corresponding to the number of time reductions that has become zero. Specifically, if the time saving number (J) has become 0, the main CPU 110m clears the time saving game flag in the time saving game flag storage area, and since the first special time saving number (J1) has become 0, If so, clear the first special time-saving game flag in the first special time-saving game flag storage area, and if the second special time-saving number (J2) becomes 0, clear the second special time-saving game flag in the second special time-saving game flag storage area. Clear the special time-saving game flag.

In step S330-8, the main CPU 110m determines whether the stopped symbol data in the stopped symbol data storage area is a jackpot. If the stopped symbol data in the stopped symbol data storage area is a jackpot (S330-8: Yes), the process proceeds to step S330-9; if it is not a jackpot (S330-8: No), the process proceeds to step S330-16. move on.

In step S330-9, the main CPU 110m clears the flags in the high probability game flag storage area, the time-saving game flag storage area, the first special time-saving game flag storage area, and the second special time-saving game flag storage area.

In step S330-10, the main CPU 110m resets the number of high probability games (X), the number of time savings (J), the first special number of time savings (J1), and the second special number of time savings (J2). In the next step S330-11, the main CPU 110m resets the number of fluctuations (K) counter.

In step S330-12, the main CPU 110m performs jackpot start preparation setting processing. In the jackpot start preparation setting process, the main CPU 110m refers to the special game control table in the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area, the main CPU 110m selects the jackpot opening/closing control table for the 16R win, the jackpot opening/closing control table for the 8R win, etc. The winning opening opening/closing control table and the winning opening opening/closing control table for 2R are determined to be referred to.

FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the special game control table. FIG. 51(a) is a diagram showing a big prize opening opening/closing control table for 16R. FIG. 51(b) is a diagram showing a big prize opening/closing control table for winning 8R. FIG. 51(c) is a diagram showing a big winning opening opening/closing control table for 2R.

In the special game control table, sets of stop symbol data, opening time, table number of the referenced big winning opening opening/closing control table, and ending time are stored for each type of jackpot. Here, the table number of the big winning opening opening/closing control table for winning 16R is 01, the table number of the winning opening opening/closing control table for winning 8R is 02, and the table number of the big winning opening opening/closing control table for winning 2R is 01. It is 03.

The 16R winning opening opening/closing control table stores data indicating the opening time and closing time of the 1st to 16th rounds per 16R, and the type of opening opening. The 8R winning opening opening/closing control table stores data indicating the opening time and closing time of the 1st to 8th rounds per 8R, and the type of opening opening. The 2R winning opening/closing opening/closing control table stores data indicating the opening time and closing time of the first to second rounds per 2R, and the type of opening opening/closing opening.

The main CPU 110m determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot opening/closing control table determined in step S330-12, generates an opening designation command according to the jackpot type, and converts this opening designation command into performance transmission data. Set it in the storage area (S330-13).

Next, the main CPU 110m determines the start interval time according to the type of jackpot based on the big winning opening opening/closing control table determined in step S330-12, and sets this start interval time in the special symbol time counter ( S330-14), the process proceeds to step S330-15.

In step S330-15, the main CPU 110m sets the special figure special electric processing data to 3, and proceeds to step S330-24.

In step S330-16, the main CPU 110m determines whether the stopped symbol data in the stopped symbol data storage area is a special loss. If the stopped symbol data in the stopped symbol data storage area is a special loss (S330-16: Yes), the main CPU 110m proceeds to step S330-17, and if it is a normal loser (S330-16: No). ), the process proceeds to step S330-19.

In step S330-17, the main CPU 110m sets the first special time-saving flag in the first special time-saving game flag storage area. In step S330-18, the main CPU 110m sets the first special time saving number (J1) to 200 times.

In step S330-19, the main CPU 110m determines whether the number of fluctuations (K) has reached the prescribed number of 800 times. If the number of fluctuations (K) has reached the specified number of times (S330-19: Yes), the main CPU 110m proceeds to step S330-20, and if the number of fluctuations (K) has not reached the specified number of times (S330-19: No). ), the process proceeds to step S330-22.

In step S330-20, the main CPU 110m sets a second special time-saving flag in the second special time-saving game flag storage area. In step S330-21, the main CPU 110m sets the second special time saving number (J2) to 600 times.

In step S330-19, the main CPU 110m generates a time saving number designation command indicating the number of time saving times (J), a first special number of time saving times (J1), and a second special number of time saving times (J2), and Set in the production transmission data storage area. Thereafter, the process advances to step S330-24.

In step S330-24, the main CPU 110m determines whether flags are set in the high probability game flag storage area, the time-saving game flag storage area, the first special time-saving game flag storage area, and the second special time-saving game flag storage area. The current game state is determined, a game state designation command corresponding to the determined game state is generated, this game state designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area, and the current special symbol stop processing is completed. When 3 is set in the special figure special electric line processing data, in the subsequent special figure special electric line control process, the process moves to the special symbol storage determination process in step S302, and the special symbol storage determination process is performed. When 0 is set in the special figure special electric line processing data, in the subsequent special figure special electric line control process, the process moves to the special symbol storage determination process in step S302, and the special symbol storage determination process is performed.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing details of the jackpot game process. In FIG. 52, the main CPU 110m determines whether the opening is currently in progress (S340-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110m refers to the number of rounds (R) in the round number (R) storage area, determines that the opening is in progress if the number of rounds (R) is 0, and saves the number of rounds (R). If it is not 0, it is determined that opening is not in progress. If the main CPU 110m is opening (S340-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-2; if it is not opening (S340-1: No), the process proceeds to step S340-6.

In step S340-2, the main CPU 110m determines whether the start interval time has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 110m refers to the special symbol time counter set in step S330-14 of the special symbol stop processing, determines that the start interval time has elapsed if the special symbol time counter is 0, and If the symbol time counter is not 0, it is determined that the start interval time has not yet elapsed. If the main CPU 110m determines that the start interval time has elapsed (S340-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-3; if it determines that the start interval time has not yet elapsed (S340-2: No), The current jackpot game process ends.

In step S340-3, the main CPU 110m performs jackpot start setting processing. In the jackpot start setting process, the main CPU 110m updates the round number (R) in the round number (R) storage area by +1. Here, when the start interval time has elapsed, no operation has been performed yet, and the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area is 0. Therefore, the number of rounds (R) after updating in step S340-3 is 1.

After executing step S340-3, the main CPU 110m performs a big winning opening opening process (S340-4). In this big winning hole opening process, in order to open the first big winning hole opening/closing door 16b or the second big winning hole opening/closing door 17b, the first big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 16c or the second big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 17c is energized. Set the energization data to be used. Further, the main CPU 110m refers to the big winning opening opening/closing control table determined in step S330-12, and calculates the opening time of the first big winning opening 16 or the second big winning opening 17 in the current number of rounds (R). , this opening time is set in the special game timer counter.

After executing step S340-4, the main CPU 110m performs round start command transmission determination processing (S340-5). In the round start command transmission determination process, the main CPU 110m generates a round start command according to the number of rounds (R) in the round number (R) storage area, and sets this round start command in the performance transmission data storage area. , the current jackpot game process ends.

In step S340-6, the main CPU 110m determines whether ending is currently in progress. If the main CPU 110m determines that the ending is not in progress (S340-6: No), the process proceeds to step S340-7, and if it determines that the ending is in progress (S340-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-18.

In step S340-7, the main CPU 110m determines whether or not the grand prize opening is being closed. Specifically, if energization data (energization data for energizing the first grand prize opening/closing solenoid 16c or the second grand prize opening/closing solenoid 17c) is not set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, the main CPU 110m If it is determined that the winning opening is closed and energization data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, it is determined that the big winning opening is not closed. The main CPU 110m proceeds to step S340-8 when the grand prize opening is being closed (S340-7: Yes), and proceeds to step S340-9 when the grand prize opening is not being closed (S340-7: No). .

In step S340-8, the main CPU 110m determines whether the closing time has elapsed. Here, the closing time is set in the special game timer counter in step S340-10, which will be described later. If the main CPU 110m determines that the closing time has elapsed (S340-8: Yes), the main CPU 110m proceeds to the big winning opening opening process in step S340-4, and executes the big winning opening opening process and the subsequent round start command transmission determination process (S340). -5) is performed, and the current jackpot game process is ended. If the main CPU 110m determines that the closing time has not elapsed (S340-8: No), it ends the current jackpot game process.

In step S340-9, the main CPU 110m determines whether or not the condition for ending the opening of the grand prize opening is satisfied. Specifically, the main CPU 110m opens when the number of balls entering the grand prize opening (C) in the memory area reaches the specified number (9) or the opening time has elapsed. It is determined that the termination condition has been met. In addition, the main CPU 110m determines that the number of balls entering the grand prize opening (C) in the memory area has not reached the specified number (9), and the opening time has not elapsed. If so, it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied. If the main CPU 110m determines that the opening termination condition is satisfied (S340-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-10, and if it is determined that the opening termination condition is not satisfied (S340-9: No), the main CPU 110m proceeds to step S340-10. The jackpot game process ends.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 110m performs a big winning opening closing process. In the grand prize opening closing process, the main CPU 110m operates the first grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 16c or the second grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid to close the first grand prize opening opening/closing door 16b or the second grand prize opening opening/closing door 17b. The energization data for energizing 17c is stopped. In addition, the main CPU 110m refers to the grand prize opening opening/closing control table determined in step S330-12, and selects the first grand prize opening 16 or the second grand prize opening 17 based on the current number of rounds (R). Set the closing time on the special game timer counter. As a result, the grand prize opening will be closed.

After executing step S340-10, the main CPU 110m determines whether one round game has been completed (S340-11). Specifically, the main CPU 110m executes one round game when the number of balls entering the big winning hole (C) in the storage area reaches the specified number (9 balls). It is determined that the process has ended. In addition, the main CPU 110m terminates one round game when the number of balls entering the grand prize opening (C) in the memory area does not reach the specified number (9 balls). It is determined that the If the main CPU 110m determines that one round game has ended (S340-11: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-12, and if it determines that one round game has not ended (S340-11: No), the current jackpot game process ends.

In step S340-12, the main CPU 110m performs round data initialization processing. In the round data initialization process, the main CPU 110m resets the number of balls entering the big winning hole (C) in the number of balls entering the big winning hole (C) storage area to zero.

After executing step S340-12, the main CPU 110m determines that the number of rounds (R) in the round number (R) storage area is the maximum value (specifically, the final value of the big prize opening/closing control table determined in step S330-12). It is determined whether the number of rounds has reached (S340-13).

If it is determined that the number of rounds (R) has not reached the maximum value (S340-13: No), the main CPU 110m updates the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area by +1 (S340 -14), the current jackpot game process ends.

If it is determined that the number of rounds (R) has reached the maximum value (S340-13: Yes), the main CPU 110m resets the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area to 0 (S340-13). 15).

After executing step S340-15, the main CPU 110m determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot opening/closing control table determined in step S330-12, and generates an ending designation command according to the jackpot type, This ending designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area (S340-16).

After executing step S340-16, the main CPU 110m determines an end interval time (for example, 2 seconds) according to the type of jackpot, and sets this end interval time in the special game timer counter (S340-17).

After executing step S340-17, or when determining in step S340-6 that the main CPU 110m is ending (S340-6: Yes), the main CPU 110m determines whether the end interval time has elapsed (S340- 18). Specifically, the main CPU 110m refers to the special game timer counter set in step S340-17, and determines that the end interval time has elapsed if the special game timer counter is 0. If not, it is determined that the end interval time has not yet elapsed. If the main CPU 110m determines that the end interval time has not yet elapsed (S340-18: No), it ends the current jackpot game process.

If the main CPU 110m determines that the end interval time has elapsed (S340-18: Yes), it sets 4 in the special figure special electric processing data (S340-19) and ends the current jackpot game processing. In the subsequent special figure special electric control process, the process moves to the jackpot game end process in step S302, and the jackpot game end process is performed.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing details of the jackpot game ending process. In FIG. 53, the main CPU 110m loads the stop symbol data set in the stop symbol data storage area in step S311-2 and the game information set in the game state buffer in step S311-4 (S350-1).

After executing step S350-1, the main CPU 110m performs high probability game flag setting processing (S350-2). In the high probability game flag setting process, the main CPU 110m refers to the special game end setting table in the main ROM 110b, and determines the high probability at the end of the special game based on the stop symbol data and game information loaded in step S350-1. Decide whether or not to set the game flag.

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a special game end setting table. The special game end setting table includes stop symbol data, data indicating whether the time-saving gaming state is necessary, data indicating the number of time-saving games, data indicating whether the high-probability gaming state is necessary, and data indicating the number of high-probability gaming. The group is memorized.

Specifically, in step S350-1, if the stop symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01-02, 04-06", a high probability game flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area. , otherwise "03, 07", the high probability game flag is not set in the high probability game flag storage area.

After executing step S350-2, the main CPU 110m performs high probability game count setting processing (S350-3). In the high probability game state setting process, the main CPU 110m refers to the special game end setting table in the main ROM 110b, and based on the stopped symbol data and game information loaded in step S350-1, the number of games ( X) Determine the remaining number of fluctuations (X) to be stored in the storage area.

Specifically, in step S350-2, if the stop symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01-02, 04-06", 10000 is set in the number of games (X) storage area, If it is any other number "03, 07", 0 is set in the number of games (X) storage area.

After executing step S350-3, the main CPU 110m performs a time-saving game flag setting process (S350-4). In the time-saving game flag setting process, the main CPU 110m refers to the special game end setting table in the main ROM 110b, and sets the time-saving game flag at the end of the special game based on the stop symbol data and game information loaded in step S350-1. Determine whether or not a set of .

Specifically, in step S350-3, if the stop symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01-07", a time-saving game flag is set in the time-saving game flag storage area.

After executing step S350-4, the main CPU 110m performs time saving number setting processing (S350-5). In the time saving number setting process, the main CPU 110m refers to the special game end setting table in the main ROM 110b, and sets the number of games (J) at the end of the special game based on the stop symbol data and game information loaded in step S350-1. Determine the remaining number of fluctuations (J) to be stored in the storage area.

Specifically, in this step S350-4, if the stop symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01-02, 04-06", 10000 times is set in the number of games (J) storage area. , otherwise, 100 times is set in the number of games (J) storage area.

After executing step S350-5, the main CPU 110m determines whether flags are set in the high probability game flag storage area, time-saving game flag storage area, first special time-saving game flag storage area, and second special time-saving game flag storage area. Based on this, the current gaming state is determined, a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state is generated, and this gaming state designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area (S350-6).

After executing step S350-6, the main CPU 110m sets the special figure special electric processing data to 0 (S350-7), and ends the jackpot game end processing. In the subsequent special figure special electric control process, the process moves to special symbol storage determination processing in step S302, and special symbol storage determination processing is performed.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing details of the general electric power control process. In FIG. 55, the main CPU 110m loads the general electricity processing data (S401). In the next step S402, the main CPU 110m refers to the branch address from the loaded special figure and special electric line processing data, and if the general figure and general electric line processing data = 0, moves the process to the ordinary symbol memory determination process, and If the processing data = 1, the process is transferred to the normal symbol fluctuation processing, if the general pattern general electric processing data = 2, the processing is transferred to the normal pattern stop processing, and if the general pattern general electric processing data = 3, the process is transferred to the auxiliary game processing. Processing is transferred to .

The outline of the normal symbol memory determination process, the normal symbol variation process, the normal symbol stop process, and the auxiliary game process is as follows. In the normal symbol storage determination process (processing when the normal symbol/general electric processing data=0), the main CPU 110m determines whether the count value (G) of the normal symbol retention number counter is larger than 0 or not. If the count value (G) of the normal symbol retention number counter is 0, the current normal symbol storage determination process is ended. If the count value (G) of the normal symbol retention number counter is larger than 0, after updating the count value (G) of the normal symbol retention number counter by -1, the second to fourth symbols in the normal symbol retention storage area are The data in the storage section is shifted to the previous storage section, and the data in the first storage section is written to the 0th storage section. At this time, the normal symbol random number value that has already been written in the 0th storage section of the normal symbol reservation storage area will be erased. Thereafter, the main CPU 110m refers to the normal symbol lottery determination table in the main ROM 110b, and based on the combination of the presence or absence of the flag set in the time-saving game flag storage area and the normal symbol random number value in the 0th storage section of the normal symbol reservation storage area. , determine the lottery result (win or loss) of the normal symbol lottery, and determine the normal symbol fluctuation time (29 seconds in non-time saving gaming mode, 0.2 seconds in time saving gaming mode) according to this lottery result. decide.

FIG. 44(c) is a diagram showing a normal symbol lottery determination table. The normal symbol lottery determination table is stored in the main ROM 110b of the main control board 10. In the normal symbol lottery determination table, the combination of the normal symbol random number value and the lottery result (hit or loss) of the normal symbol lottery is divided into one to be referred to in the non-time-saving gaming state and one to be referred to in the time-saving gaming state. are remembered separately.

Comparing the number of random numbers for normal symbol determination that win in the non-time-saving gaming state and the number of random numbers for normal symbol determination that win in the time-saving gaming state in this normal symbol lottery determination table, it is found that the number of winnings in the non-time-saving gaming state is The random number value for determining normal symbols and the random number number for determining winning normal symbols in the time-saving gaming state are 65535 (0 to 65534) in common. The random number range of the random number value for normal symbol determination is 0 to 65535. Therefore, the winning probability in the non-time-saving gaming state and the winning probability in the time-saving gaming state are 65535/65536=1/1.00002.

After determining the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery, the main CPU 110m sets the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol time counter, starts the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 22, and sets 1 to the common symbol general processing data. Set.

In the normal symbol fluctuation processing (processing when the ordinary symbol general processing data = 1), the main CPU 110m determines whether the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (whether the normal symbol time counter has reached 0), and performs the normal symbol fluctuation. If it is determined that the time has not elapsed, the current normal symbol variation process is ended. When it is determined that the normal symbol variation time has elapsed, the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 22 is stopped and displayed as a symbol according to the normal symbol lottery result, and a predetermined normal symbol stop time is set in the normal symbol time counter. Set 2 to the general electricity processing data.

In the normal symbol stop processing (processing when the common symbol electrical processing data = 2), the main CPU 110m determines whether the normal symbol stop time has elapsed (whether the normal symbol time counter has reached 0), and stops the normal symbol. If it is determined that the time has not elapsed, the current normal symbol stop processing is ended. When it is determined that the normal symbol stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display device 22 is a winning symbol. If the stop symbol on the normal symbol display device 22 is not a winning symbol, 0 is set in the common symbol general processing data, and if the stop symbol on the normal symbol display device 22 is a winning symbol, the common symbol is not a winning symbol. Set 3 to general electricity processing data.

In the auxiliary game processing (processing when the general figure general electric processing data = 3), the main CPU 110m determines the opening time of the second starting port 15 (0.2 seconds in the non-time-saving game state, and 0.2 seconds in the case of the time-saving game state). 3.5 seconds), the second starting port 15 is kept open for this opening time, and then the second starting port 15 is closed, and 0 is set in the general electricity processing data.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the performance control section 120m of the gaming machine 1. The main process is started when a system reset occurs from the power supply board 170 to the sub CPU 120a of the production control unit 120m due to a startup operation.

In FIG. 56, the sub CPU 120a performs initialization processing (S1000). In the initialization process, the sub CPU 120a reads the startup program from the sub ROM 120b and initializes various flags in the sub RAM 120c when the power is turned on. After the initialization process is completed, the sub CPU 120a repeats the process (S1100) of updating the performance random numbers 1 to 6, etc. In addition to this random value update process, the sub CPU 120a executes a timer interrupt process every time the reset clock pulse signal is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of the production control section 120m. After the initialization process is completed and the game becomes possible, the sub-CPU 120a of the performance control unit 120m performs a clock pulse every 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse generator in the performance control unit 120m, as shown in FIG. Execute a series of processes.

In FIG. 57, the sub CPU 120a saves information in the register of the sub CPU 120a to the stack area (S1400).

Next, the sub CPU 120a performs timer update processing (S1500). In the timer update process, the sub CPU 120a updates various timer counters by -1 based on the time signal input from the RTC 120d. Details of the timer update process will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 120a performs command analysis processing (S1600). In the command analysis process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the command in the reception buffer, and based on the analysis result, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the performance drive devices 330a, 330b, 330c, 330d, and the performance The contents of the effects produced by the lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d are determined, and a command indicating the contents of the determined effects is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c. Details of the command analysis process will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 120a performs effect input control processing (S1700). In the performance input control process, the sub CPU 120a performs processing according to input signals from the detection switches 35a, 39a, 39b, 39c, 39d, and 39e of the performance button 35, cross key 39, and center key 39E. Details of the effect input control process will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 120a performs data output processing (S1800). In the data output process, the sub CPU 120a transmits the commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c in the command analysis process of step S1600 and the effect input control process of step S1700 to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150.

Next, the sub CPU 120a restores the information saved to the stack area in step S1400 to the register of the sub CPU 120a (S1900).

58, 59, and 60 are flowcharts showing details of the command analysis process. In FIG. 58, the sub CPU 120a checks whether there is a command received from the main control board 10 in the reception buffer (S1601). If there is a command in the reception buffer (S1601: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1610, and if there is no command in the reception buffer (S1601: No), it ends the current command analysis process.

In step S1610, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a special symbol reservation number designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is a special symbol reservation number designation command (S1610: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1611, and if the command in the reception buffer is not a special symbol reservation number designation command (S1610: No), Proceed to step 1620.

In step S1611, the sub CPU 120a performs special symbol reservation number update processing. In the special symbol reservation number update process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the special symbol reservation number designation command, determines the display number of reservation display images to be displayed on the image display device 31, and updates the display number of reservation display images corresponding to this number of reservation display images. Set the special figure display number specification command in the sending buffer.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the special symbol reservation number update process is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 control the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the lighting for effects related to the appearance or disappearance of the pending display image in the image display device 31. The devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d are executed.

In step S1620, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a start prize winning designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is a starting winning designation command (S1620: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1621, and if the command in the receiving buffer is not a starting winning designation command (S1620: No), the sub CPU 120a advances to step S1630. .

In step S1621, the sub CPU 120a performs start winning designation command storage processing. In the starting winning designation command storage process, the sub CPU 120a selects one of the first performance information storage area and the second performance information storage area of the performance information storage area of the sub RAM 120c that corresponds to the starting winning designation command in the reception buffer. , the storage unit with the lowest number and no data stored in the first to fourth storage units of the selected performance information storage area is set as the storage destination of the data, and the start winning designation command in the reception buffer is stored in the storage unit of the data storage destination. to be memorized.

FIG. 39(c) is a diagram showing the effect information storage area. As shown in FIG. 39(c), the performance information storage area includes a 0th storage area corresponding to the fluctuation, a first performance information storage area corresponding to the suspension of the first special symbol, and a storage area corresponding to the suspension of the second special symbol. It has a corresponding second performance information storage area. Each of the first performance information storage area and the second performance information storage area includes a first storage section corresponding to the first reservation, a second storage section corresponding to the second reservation, a third storage section corresponding to the third reservation, and a fourth storage section corresponding to a fourth reservation. As shown in FIG. 39(d), each storage section in the performance information storage area is capable of storing a start winning designation command and prefetch pending display change performance scenario data.

In FIG. 58, after executing step S1621, the sub CPU 120a performs a prefetch pending display change effect selection process (S1622). In the prefetch pending display change effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a selects a prefetch pending display change effect for the starting winning designation command stored in the performance information storage area in step S1621, with the final variation being the symbol variation corresponding to this starting winning designation command. When executing the prefetched pending display change performance, determine the necessity of execution of the pending display change performance, determine the scenario of the pending display change performance up to the final change, and use the prefetched pending display change performance scenario data indicating this scenario as performance information. It is stored in the corresponding storage section within the storage area. Details of the prefetch pending display change effect selection process will be described later.

In step S1630, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a symbol designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is a symbol designation command (S1630: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1631. If the command in the reception buffer is not a symbol designation command (S1630: No), the process advances to step S1640.

In step S1631, the sub CPU 120a performs production symbol determination processing. In the performance symbol determination process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the symbol designation command, determines the stop symbol numbers of the left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, right symbol 36R, and fourth symbol 36Z, and assigns the determined stop symbol numbers to the sub CPU 120a. A stop symbol designation command is stored in the performance symbol storage area in the RAM 120c, and a stop symbol designation command is generated to notify the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 of the stop symbol number, and the generated stop symbol designation command is set in the transmission buffer. do.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the production symbol determination process is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 determine the symbol combination when the fluctuation is stopped in the fluctuation.

In step S1640, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a fluctuation start command. If the command in the reception buffer is a variation start command (S1640: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1641, and if the command in the reception buffer is not a variation start command (S1640: No), the process proceeds to step S1670.

In step S1641, the sub CPU 120a performs storage area shift processing. In the storage area shift process, if data is stored in one or more of the first to fourth storage units of the second performance information storage area, the sub CPU 120a shifts the data to the second to fourth storage units of the second performance information storage area. The data in the section is shifted to the previous storage section, and the data in the first storage section of the second performance information storage area is written to the 0th storage section. By writing the data to the 0th storage section, the data (start winning prize designation command, prefetch pending display change performance scenario data) that was previously stored in the 0th storage section is erased. If no data is stored in the second performance information storage area and data is stored in one or more of the first to fourth storage units of the first performance information storage area, the first performance information storage area The data in the second to fourth storage sections are shifted to the previous storage section, and the data in the first storage section of the first performance information storage area is written to the zeroth storage section. By writing data into the 0th storage section, the data previously stored in the 0th storage section is erased.

Next, the sub CPU 120a determines whether prefetch pending display change performance scenario data is stored in the performance information storage area (S1642). If the prefetch pending display change effect scenario data is stored (S1642: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1643. If the prefetch pending display change effect scenario data is not stored (S1642: No), the process advances to step S1644.

In step S1643, the sub CPU 120a performs a prefetch effect control process. In the prefetch effect control process, the sub CPU 120a refers to the prefetch pending display change effect scenario data in the effect information storage area, determines whether or not there is a change in the display mode of the pending display image in the variation, and changes the display mode of the pending display image in the variation. When changing the display mode of the pending display image, a production pattern designation command is generated to instruct a change in the display format of the pending display image, and the generated production pattern designation command is set in the transmission buffer.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the prefetch effect control process is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 in the data output process of step S1800. When the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 receive a production pattern designation command that instructs to change the display mode of the pending display image, the image display device 31 outputs a production that changes the display mode of the pending display image. The device 32 and the production lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d are caused to execute.

In step S1644, the sub CPU 120a performs a variable effect pattern determination process. The fluctuation performance pattern determination process is a process for determining a symbol fluctuation performance pattern that is the flow of performance in the fluctuation. In the variation effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random value 1 updated in step S1100, and refers to the variable effect pattern determination table in the sub ROM 120b to determine the variation start command and the effect random value in the reception buffer. Based on the combination with 1, a symbol fluctuation performance pattern is determined, and information on the determined symbol fluctuation performance pattern is stored in a symbol fluctuation performance pattern storage area in the sub-RAM 120c. Further, the sub CPU 120a generates a performance pattern designation command for starting variation of the determined symbol fluctuation performance pattern, and sets the generated performance pattern designation command in the transmission buffer.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a variable effect pattern determination table. In the fluctuation performance pattern determination table, sets of performance random number value 1, symbol fluctuation performance pattern, and performance pattern designation command are stored for each one corresponding to the fluctuation start command.

Here, there are various types of symbol variation effect patterns that combine the effects shown in FIGS. 14 to 29.

For example, the symbol variation performance pattern options corresponding to a variation start command (16R probability variation, variation time 20000ms) with MODE data "E6H" and DATA data "12H" include symbol variation production pattern 1C1, symbol variation production pattern 1C2, symbol variation performance pattern 1C5, symbol variation performance pattern 1C7, symbol variation performance pattern 1C9, etc. The flow of the performance of the symbol variation performance pattern 1C1 is normal variation performance → step-up performance (step number 1) → normal reach performance → character appearance performance (character C) → development incitement performance → development confirmed performance → SP reach performance → cut-in performance (Red background) → Confirmed role object operation 2nd performance → Symbol confirmed (16R guaranteed variable hit).

Further, the symbol variation performance pattern 1C7 and the symbol variation performance pattern 1C9 include premium performance. The flow of the performance of the symbol variation performance pattern 1C7 is normal variation performance → normal reach performance → character appearance performance (premium character) → development confirmed performance → SP reach performance → cut-in performance (zebra background) → confirmed role object movement second performance → The symbol is confirmed (16R guaranteed odd hit). The flow of the pattern variation performance pattern 1C9 is normal variation performance → normal reach performance → character appearance performance (character C) → development confirmed performance → SP reach performance → cut-in performance (rainbow background) → confirmed role object movement second performance →The pattern is confirmed (16R guaranteed odd hit).

The symbol variation performance pattern options that correspond to the variation start command (2R probability variation, variation time 18000ms) with MODE data "E6H" and DATA data "11H" include symbol variation production pattern 1D1, symbol variation production pattern 1D2, etc. There is. The flow of the performance of the symbol variation performance pattern 1D1 is as follows: normal variation performance → step-up performance (number of steps 1) → normal reach performance → roulette performance (hitting the number) → symbol confirmation (2R probability variation win). The flow of the performance of the symbol variation performance pattern 1D2 is as follows: normal variation performance → normal reach performance → roulette performance (hitting the number) → symbol confirmation (2R probability variation win).

The symbol fluctuation performance pattern options corresponding to the fluctuation start command (special loss, fluctuation time 18000ms) with MODE data "E6H" and DATA data "E0H" include symbol fluctuation performance pattern 1E1, symbol fluctuation performance pattern 1E2, etc. be. The flow of the performance of the symbol variation performance pattern 1E1 is as follows: normal variation performance → step-up performance (number of steps: 1) → normal reach performance → roulette performance (helping with rolls) → symbol confirmation (special loss). The flow of the performance of the symbol variation performance pattern 1E2 is as follows: normal variation performance → normal reach performance → roulette performance (helping with rolls) → symbol confirmation (special loss).

The symbol fluctuation performance pattern options corresponding to the fluctuation start command (normal loss, fluctuation time T9 = 6000ms) with MODE data "E6H" and DATA data "59H" include symbol fluctuation performance pattern 1F1, symbol fluctuation performance pattern 1F2. and so on. The flow of the performance of the symbol fluctuation performance pattern 1F1 is normal fluctuation performance → step-up performance (step number 1) → symbol confirmation (usually a loss). The flow of the performance of the symbol variation performance pattern 1F2 is normal variation performance → symbol confirmed (usually a loss).

The symbol fluctuation performance pattern options that correspond to the fluctuation start command (normal loss, fluctuation time 18000ms) with MODE data "E6H" and DATA data "61H" include symbol fluctuation performance pattern 1G1, symbol fluctuation performance pattern 1G2, etc. be. The flow of the performance of the symbol variation performance pattern 1G1 is as follows: normal variation performance → step-up performance (step number 1) → symbol confirmation (usually a loss). The flow of the performance of the symbol variation performance pattern 1G2 is as follows: normal variation performance → normal reach performance → roulette performance (missing number) → symbol confirmation (normal loss).

The command set in the transmission buffer in the variable effect pattern determination process is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 in the data output process of step S1800. When the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 receive this command, they control the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the performance drive device 330a to create a performance that matches the symbol fluctuation according to the symbol fluctuation performance pattern indicated by the command. , 330b, 330c, 330d, and the production lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, 340d.

In the next step S1645, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the symbol variation performance pattern determined in the variation performance pattern determination process includes a normal reach performance. When the sub CPU 120a includes a normal reach effect (S1645: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1646, and when the normal reach effect is not included (S1645: No), the process proceeds to step S1648.

In the next step S1646, the sub CPU 120a sets a reach establishment standby flag in the reach establishment standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c.

In the next step S1647, the sub CPU 120a calculates the remaining time until the reach is established in the fluctuation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and sets the value to the reach establishment standby timer counter in the sub RAM 120c. Set to .

In the next step S1648, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the symbol variation performance pattern determined in the variation performance pattern determination process includes the SP ready-to-win performance. If the SP ready-to-win effect is included (S1648: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1649, and if the SP ready-to-reach effect is not included (S1648: No), the process proceeds to step S1655.

In the next step S1649, the sub CPU 120a sets the SP reach standby flag in the SP reach standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c.

In the next step S1650, the sub CPU 120a calculates the remaining time until the change reaches the SP reach effect, and divides this time by the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and sets the value to the SP reach standby timer counter in the sub RAM 120c. set.

In step S1655, the sub CPU 120a performs stage change determination processing. In the stage change determination process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether it is necessary to execute a stage change, determines a new stage after the change if the stage change is to be executed, generates a production pattern designation command for the new stage, and generates Set the created performance pattern specification command in the sending buffer. Details of the stage change determination process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the stage change determination process is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cause the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d to execute the stage performance of the new stage. .

In step S1670, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a symbol confirmation command. If the command in the reception buffer is a symbol confirmation command (S1670: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1671, and if the command in the reception buffer is not a symbol confirmation command (S1670: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1680.

In step S1671, the sub CPU 120a performs production symbol stop processing. In the effect pattern stop processing, the sub CPU 120a generates a pattern confirmation command and sets the generated stop designation command in the transmission buffer.

The stop designation command set in the transmission buffer in the production pattern stop process is sent to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 in the data output process of step S1800. When the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 receive this command, they control the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the lighting device for performance to perform the production related to the finalization (complete stop) of the production pattern 36 according to the command. 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d.

In step S1680, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is a gaming state specification command (S1680: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1681, and if the command in the reception buffer is not a gaming state specification command (S1680: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1690. .

In step S1681, the sub CPU 120a performs gaming state setting processing. In the gaming state setting process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the gaming state designation command in the reception buffer to determine the current gaming state, and stores gaming state information indicating the determined gaming state in the gaming state storage area of the sub RAM 120c. .

In the next step S1682, the sub CPU 120a checks whether the gaming state related to the normal symbol lottery has become the first special time-saving gaming state. If the first special time-saving game state is reached (S1682: Yes), the process advances to step S1684, and if the first special time-saving game state is not reached (S1682: No), the process advances to step S1683.

In step S1683, the sub CPU 120a checks whether the gaming state related to the normal symbol lottery has become the second special time-saving gaming state. If the second special time-saving game state is reached (S1683: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1684, and if the second special time-saving game state is not entered (S1683: No), the current command analysis process is ended.

In step S1684, the sub CPU 120a performs assistance mode start control processing. In the help mode start control process, the sub CPU 120a sets a help mode production pattern designation command in the transmission buffer.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the assistance mode start control process is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 in the data output process of step S1800. When the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 receive the command, the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 perform the production of the help mode on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the production lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d according to the command. Let it run.

In step S1690, sub CPU 120a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is an opening designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is an opening specification command (S1690: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1691; if the command in the reception buffer is not an opening specification command (S1690: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1692.

In step S1691, the sub CPU 120a performs special game effect selection processing. In the special game performance selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines an opening performance pattern based on the opening designation command in the reception buffer, and stores information on the determined opening performance pattern in the performance pattern storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Further, the sub CPU 120a executes a promotion effect in the fourth round when the opening designation command is for an 8R probability/variable win or an 8R normal win, and stores the effect information storage area for each round of the fourth round in the sub RAM 120c. Promotion performance execution data indicating the contents of the promotion performance is stored. Details of the special game performance selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the special game performance selection process is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 in the data output process of step S1800. When the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 receive this command, they control the opening effect of the special game on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d according to the command. have it executed.

In step S1692, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a round start command. If the command in the reception buffer is a round start command (S1692: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693; if the command in the reception buffer is not a round start command (S1692: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1694.

In step S1693, the sub CPU 120a performs round effect control processing. In the round performance control process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the round start command in the reception buffer, and determines whether the current round is an execution round of the promotion performance (the 4th round of 8R probability winning or 8R normal winning). judge. Based on this determination result, the sub CPU 120a determines the performance pattern for the current round, stores information on the determined performance pattern in the performance pattern storage area of the sub RAM 120c, and generates a performance pattern designation command for the current round. , set the generated performance pattern specification command in the transmission buffer. Details of the round performance control process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the round performance control process is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 in the data output process of step S1800. When the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 receive this command, they control the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d to produce a round effect of the special game according to the command. have it executed.

In step S1694, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is an ending designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is an ending designation command (S1694: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1695. If the command in the reception buffer is not an ending designation command (S1694: No), the current command analysis process ends.

In step S1695, the sub CPU 120a performs special game end effect control processing, and proceeds to step S1696. In the special game end performance control process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the ending specification command in the reception buffer, determines the ending performance pattern, and stores information on the determined performance pattern in the performance pattern storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Further, the sub CPU 120a generates an ending effect pattern designation command, and sets the generated effect pattern designation command in the transmission buffer. Furthermore, if there are flags set during the special game, the sub CPU 120a clears them.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the special game end performance control process is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 in the data output process of step S1800. When the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 receive this command, they control the ending effect of the special game on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d according to the command. have it executed.

In step S1696, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the jackpot that triggered the execution of the ended special game is a normal win or a variable probability win. If the jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game is a normal win (S1696: Yes), the process advances to step S1697. If the jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game is a variable probability win (S1696: No), the process advances to step S1698.

In step S1697, the sub CPU 120a performs special training mode start control processing. In the special training mode start control process, the sub CPU 120a generates a performance pattern designation command for the special training mode, and sets the generated performance pattern designation command in the transmission buffer.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the training mode start control process is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 in the data output process of step S1800. When the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 receive the command, they execute the special training mode effect on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d according to the command. let

In step S1698, the sub CPU 120a performs live mode start control processing. In the live mode start control process, the sub CPU 120a generates a live mode performance pattern designation command, and sets the generated performance pattern designation command in the transmission buffer.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the live mode start control process is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 in the data output process of step S1800. When the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 receive the command, they execute the live mode performance on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the performance lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d according to the command. let

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing details of the prefetch pending display change effect selection process. In FIG. 62, the sub CPU 120a sets the reservation corresponding to the storage unit in the performance information storage area that stores the start winning prize designation command in the starting winning designation command storage process as a prefetch determination target reservation, and the fluctuation of this prefetching determination target reservation develops. It is determined whether or not the variation has an SP reach effect which is an effect (S1622-1). If the variation has an effect (S1622-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1622-2. If the variation does not include a development effect (S1622-1: No), the current prefetch pending display change effect selection process ends.

In step S1622-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not there is a variation having a development effect in the suspension whose variation order is earlier than the suspension subject to pre-reading determination. If there is no variation having an advanced effect (S1622-2: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1622-3. If there is a variation having a development effect (S1622-2: Yes), the current prefetch pending display change effect selection process is ended.

In step S1622-3, the sub CPU 120a performs a prefetch pending display change effect execution determination process. In the prefetch pending display change effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a obtains a random value 2 for effect, which is one of the random values updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the prefetch pending display change performance execution determination table in the sub ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the preliminary determination result (jackpot or loss) indicated by the start winning designation command of the prefetch determination target pending and the random number value 2 for the performance. , determines whether it is necessary to execute the prefetch pending display change effect.

FIG. 63(a) is a diagram showing a prefetch pending display change effect execution determination table. In the pre-read pending display change performance execution determination table, a set of data indicating the random number value 2 for performance and the necessity of execution (``execute'' and ``do not execute'') is referred to when the preliminary determination result is a jackpot. and those to be referred to when there is a special loss or a normal loss.

Specifically, for the jackpot, 55 random numbers 2 (0 to 54) for production are associated with data indicating that the prefetch pending display change production is executed, and 45 (55 to 99) random numbers 2 are associated with The random number value 2 for presentation is associated with data indicating that the prefetch pending display change presentation is not executed. For special losses and normal losses, 45 (0 to 44) random numbers 2 for presentation are associated with data indicating that a look-ahead pending display change presentation is to be executed, and 55 (45 to 99) presentation The random number value 2 is associated with data indicating that the prefetch pending display change effect is not executed.

In step S1622-4, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the determination result of the prefetch pending display change effect execution determination process is "execute" or "not execute." If the determination result is "execute" (S1622-4: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1622-5. If the determination result is "not executed" (S1622-4: No), the current prefetch pending display change effect selection process is ended.

In step S1622-5, the sub CPU 120a performs prefetch pending display change final stage determination processing. In the prefetch pending display change final stage determination process, the sub CPU 120a obtains the random number value 3 for effect, which is one of the random numbers updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the final stage pending display mode determination table in the sub ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the preliminary judgment result (jackpot or loss) indicated by the starting winning designation command of the pending judgment target and the random number value 3 for production, The display mode of the pending display image at the final stage in the prefetch pending display change performance is determined.

FIG. 63(b) is a diagram showing a final stage pending display mode determination table. In the final stage pending display mode determination table, there is a set of data indicating the random number value 3 for presentation and the final stage pending display mode ("blue", "green", and "red") when the preliminary judgment result is a jackpot. It is stored separately into two types: one to be referred to when there is a special loss or a normal loss. Specifically, for the jackpot, 10 random numbers 3 (0 to 9) for performance are associated with data indicating the "blue" pending display mode, and 30 random numbers (10 to 39) for performance Random number 3 is associated with data indicating a "green" pending display mode, and 60 (40 to 99) random number values 3 for production are associated with data indicating a "red" pending display mode. There is. Regarding special losses and normal losses, 60 (0 to 59) random numbers 3 for presentation are associated with data indicating the "blue" pending display mode, and 30 (60 to 89) random numbers for presentation The numerical value 3 is associated with data indicating a "green" pending display mode, and the 10 random numerical values 3 (90 to 99) for presentation are associated with data indicating a "red" pending display mode. .

In step S1622-6, the sub CPU 120a performs prefetch pending display change effect scenario determination processing. In the prefetch pending display change effect scenario determination process, the sub CPU 120a obtains a random value 4 for effect, which is one of the random values updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the prefetch pending display change performance scenario determination table in the sub ROM 120b, and determines the predetermined result (jackpot or loss) indicated by the start winning designation command for the prefetched determination target pending, the final stage pending display mode, the pending number, and A look-ahead pending display change performance scenario is determined based on a combination of random numbers 4 for performance.

There are two types of prefetch pending display change performance scenario determination tables: one to be referred to when the preliminary determination result is a jackpot, and one to be referred to when the preliminary determination result is a loss. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a prefetch pending display change performance scenario determination table to be referred to when the preliminary determination result is a jackpot. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a look-ahead pending display change performance scenario determination table that is referred to when the preliminary determination result is a special loss or a normal loss.

In the prefetch pending display change performance scenario determination table, each set of random number value 4 for performance and prefetched pending display change performance scenario data corresponds to the combination of the pending display mode and the number of holds in the final stage of the prefetched pending display change performance. is stored in In the jackpot look-ahead pending display change performance scenario determination table and the loss look-ahead pending display change performance scenario determination table, the presence or absence of allocation of the random number 4 for performance to the performance scenarios HR39 and HR49 of the hold display change performance called "falling down". are different.

More specifically, in this table, the option corresponding to the combination of blue and the number of reservations 1 includes the reservation display change effect scenario HB11. The pending display change effect scenario HB11 is a scenario in which the pending display image is changed to blue in the final change. 100 (0 to 99) random numbers 4 for presentation are associated with the pending display change presentation scenario HB11. Options corresponding to the combination of blue and the number of reservations 2 include reservation display change effect scenarios HB21 and HB22. The pending display change effect scenarios HB21 and HB22 are scenarios in which the timing at which the pending display image turns blue is different. 70 random numbers 4 (0 to 69) for production are associated with the pending display change production scenario HB21, and 30 (70 to 99) random numbers 4 are associated with the pending display change production scenario HB22. ing.

Options corresponding to the combination of blue and the number of reservations 3 include reservation display change effect scenarios HB31, HB32, and HB33. The hold display change effect scenarios HB31, HB32, and HB33 are scenarios in which the timing at which the hold display image turns blue is different. 20 to 50 random numbers 4 for presentation are associated with the hold display change presentation scenarios HB31, HB32, and HB33, respectively. Options corresponding to the combination of blue and the number of holds 4 include hold display change effect scenarios HB41, HB42, HB43, and HB44. The pending display change effect scenarios HB41, HB42, HB43, and HB44 are scenarios in which the timing at which the pending display image turns blue is different. 10 to 40 random number values 4 for performance are associated with the hold display change performance scenarios HB41, HB42, HB43, and HB44, respectively.

The option corresponding to the combination of green and the number of reservations 1 includes a reservation display change effect scenario HG11. The pending display change effect scenario HG11 is a scenario in which the pending display image is changed to green in the final change. 100 (0 to 99) random numbers 4 for presentation are associated with the pending display change presentation scenario HG11. Options corresponding to the combination of green and the number of reservations 2 include reservation display change effect scenarios HG21 and HG22. The hold display change effect scenarios HG21 and HG22 are scenarios that differ in the timing at which the hold display image turns green and the presence or absence of a change to blue before reaching that point. 70 random numbers 4 (0 to 69) for production are associated with the pending display change production scenario HG21, and 30 (70 to 99) random numbers 4 are associated with the pending display change production scenario HG22. ing.

Options corresponding to the combination of green and the number of reservations 3 include reservation display change effect scenarios HG31 to HG38. The hold display change effect scenarios HG31 to HG38 are scenarios that differ in the timing at which the hold display image turns green and the presence or absence of a change to blue before reaching that point. 5 to 20 performance random numbers 4 are associated with the hold display change performance scenarios HG31 to HG38, respectively. Options corresponding to the combination of green and the number of reservations 4 include reservation display change effect scenarios HG41 to HG48. The hold display change effect scenarios HG41 to HG48 are scenarios that differ in the timing at which the hold display image turns green and the presence or absence of a change to blue before reaching that point. 5 to 20 performance random numbers 4 are associated with the hold display change performance scenarios HG41 to HG48, respectively.

Among the options corresponding to the combination of red and the number of reservations of 1, there is a reservation display change effect scenario HR11. The pending display change effect scenario HR11 is a scenario in which the pending display image is made red in the final change. 100 (0 to 99) random numbers 4 for presentation are associated with the pending display change presentation scenario HR11. The options corresponding to the combination of red and the number of holds 2 include hold display change effect scenarios HR21, HR22, HR23, and HR24. The hold display change effect scenarios HR21, HR22, HR23, and HR24 are scenarios that differ in the timing at which the hold display image turns red and whether or not it changes to blue or green before reaching that point. 10 to 40 random numbers 4 for effect are associated with the hold display change effect scenarios HR21, HR22, HR23, and HR24, respectively.

Options corresponding to the combination of red and the number of reservations 3 include reservation display change performance scenarios HR31 to HR39. The hold display change effect scenarios HR31 to HR39 are scenarios that differ in the timing at which the hold display image turns red and whether or not it changes to blue or green before reaching that point. Here, the hold display change production scenarios HR31 to HR38 are "upstart" scenarios in which the hold display mode changes from blue to green to red, which is more reliable in later changes than in the previous change. On the other hand, the hold display change effect scenario HR39 is a "falling down" scenario in which the hold display mode changes from green to red to green in subsequent changes to a hold display mode that is less reliable than the previous change. In the jackpot table, 5 to 20 random numbers 4 for performance are associated with the pending display change performance scenarios HR31 to HR38, and one (99) random value 4 for performance is associated with the pending display change performance scenario HR39. are associated. On the other hand, in the losing table, 5 to 20 performance random numbers 4 are associated with the pending display change performance scenarios HR31 to HR38. Furthermore, in the losing table, no random number value 4 for performance is associated with the pending display change performance scenario HR39.

Options corresponding to the combination of red and the number of reservations 4 include reservation display change performance scenarios HR41 to HR49. The hold display change effect scenarios HR41 to HR49 are scenarios that differ in the timing at which the hold display image turns red and whether or not it changes to blue or green before reaching that point. Among the pending display change performance scenarios HR41 to HR49, the pending display change performance scenarios HR41 to HR48 are "rising" scenarios, and the pending display changing performance scenario HR49 is a "downhill" scenario. In the jackpot table, 5 to 20 random numbers 4 for performance are associated with the pending display change performance scenarios HR41 to HR48, and 1 (99) random value 4 for performance is associated with the pending display change performance scenario HR49. are associated. On the other hand, in the loss table, 5 to 20 production random numbers 4 are associated with the pending display change production scenarios HR41 to HR48. Furthermore, in the losing table, no random value 4 for performance is associated with the pending display change performance scenario HR49.

In this way, in the gaming machine 1, for the combination of red and the number of reservations 3 and the combination of red and the number of reservations 4, the reservation display change production scenarios HR39 and HR49 of "falling down" can be selected only from the jackpot table. ing. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, the look-ahead pending display change performance of "falling down" becomes a final fluctuation jackpot confirmation performance (a performance that notifies that the final fluctuation will result in a jackpot before the final fluctuation symbol stops).

In step S1622-7 of FIG. 62, the sub CPU 120a stores the scenario data of the prefetch pending display change effect scenario determined in the prefetch pending display change effect scenario determination process in the storage section in the effect information storage area.

Here, in the prefetch pending display change effect selection process, if there is a developed effect in the prefetch judgment target pending and there is no developed effect in the previous pending in the change order (S1622-1: Yes → S1622-2: No) , a prefetch pending display change effect execution determination process is performed. Through such a process flow, when executing the prefetch pending display change effect, the production control unit 120m executes the development effect as a variation display of the final variation of the prefetch pending display change effect, and To restrict the execution of a development performance as a performance during a variable display before the final change of a display change performance.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing details of the stage change determination process. In FIG. 66, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the current gaming mode is the normal mode (S1655-1). If the current gaming mode is the normal mode (S1655-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1632-2, and if the current gaming mode is either the special training mode or the live mode (S1655-1: No), the current stage change determination process ends.

In step S1655-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the starting winning designation command stored in the performance information storage area in the starting winning designation command storage process is normally the winning information of the loser. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1655-4 if the starting winning designation command is for winning information of a normal loss (S1655-2: Yes), and if the starting winning designation command is not for normal losing winning information (S1655-2: No), the current stage change determination process ends.

In step S1655-4, the sub CPU 120a performs stage change execution determination processing. In the stage change execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a obtains the performance random number value 5 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the stage change execution determination table in the sub ROM 120b and determines whether or not to execute a stage change based on the number of changes from the previous stage change and the random value 5 for performance.

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a stage change execution determination table. In the stage change execution determination table, a set of random number 5 for production and data indicating whether execution is necessary ("execute" or "not execute") is included, depending on the number of changes from 0 to 9 since the previous stage change. These are divided into those that are referenced occasionally, those that are referenced when the number of changes since the previous stage change is 10 to 19, and those that are referenced when the number of changes since the previous stage change is 20 or more. remembered.

In the table, the greater the number of changes since the previous stage change, the more likely data indicating that a stage change will be executed is selected. Specifically, for times 0 to 9, 20 (0 to 19) production random numbers 5 are associated with data indicating that a stage change is to be performed, and 80 (20 to 99) The random number value 5 for production is associated with data indicating that a stage change is not performed. For times 10 to 19, 50 random numbers 5 (0 to 49) for presentation are associated with data indicating that a stage change is to be executed, and 50 random numbers 5 (50 to 99) for presentation are associated with data indicating that a stage change is to be performed. is associated with data indicating that the stage change will not be performed. For 20 times or more, 80 random numbers 5 (0 to 79) for presentation are associated with data indicating that a stage change will be executed, and 20 random numbers 5 for presentation (80 to 99) are It is associated with data indicating that a stage change will not be performed.

In step S1655-4, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the determination result of the stage change performance execution determination process is "execute" or "not execute." If the determination result is "execute" (S1655-4: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1655-5. If the determination result is "not executed" (S1655-4: No), the current stage change determination process ends.

In step S1655-5, the sub CPU 120a sets a stage change standby flag in the stage change standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c.

In step S1655-6, the sub CPU 120a performs stage change timing determination processing. In the stage change timing determination process, the sub CPU 120a determines the stage change execution timing within the fluctuation. In step S1655-7, the sub CPU 120a calculates the remaining time until the stage change execution timing, divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and sets the value to the stage change standby timer counter in the sub RAM 120c. Set to .

In step S1655-8, the sub CPU 120a performs new stage determination processing. In the new stage determination process, the sub CPU 120a obtains the production random number value 6 updated in step S1100. In the new stage determination process, the sub CPU 120a refers to the new stage determination table in the sub ROM 120b and determines a new stage based on the random number value 6 for performance.

FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a new stage determination table. In the new stage determination table, each set of the random number value 6 for production and stage data indicating the new stage after the stage change is stored for each set corresponding to the current stay stage.

Specifically, when the current stage is the marine stage, the options include the savanna stage and the cosmo stage, and when the current stage is the savanna stage, the options include the marine stage and the cosmo stage. If this is the Cosmo stage, the options include the Marine stage and the Savanna stage. Each option is associated with 50 performance random numbers 6.

In step S1655-9, the sub CPU 120a stores the data of the new stage in the stage change information storage area of the sub RAM 120c.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing details of the special game performance selection process (step S1691 in FIG. 50). In FIG. 69, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the type of jackpot that triggered the current special game is a 2R probability variable win (S1691-1). If the type of jackpot is a 2R probability variable win (S1691-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1691-2, and if it is not a 2R probability variable win (S1691-1: No), the process proceeds to step S1691-3.

In step S1691-2, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform the opening performance per 2R, and stores information on the opening performance pattern per 2R in the performance pattern storage area.

In step S1691-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the type of jackpot that triggered the current special game is a 16R probability variable win. When the type of jackpot is a 16R probability variable win (S1691-3: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1691-4, and when it is not a 16R probability variable win (S1691-3: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1691-5.

In step S1691-4, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform an opening performance per 16R, and stores information on an opening performance pattern per 16R in the performance pattern storage area.

In step S1691-5, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the type of jackpot that triggered the current special game is an 8R probability variable win. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1691-6 when the type of jackpot is an 8R probability variable win (S1691-5: Yes), and proceeds to step S1691-7 when the type is an 8R normal win (S1691-5: No).

In step S1691-6, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform a rank-up success effect, and stores the rank-up effect execution indicating that the rank-up success effect is to be executed in the round-by-round effect information storage area of the fourth round of the sub RAM 120c. Store data.

In step S1691-7, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform a rank-up failure effect, and stores the rank-up effect execution indicating that the rank-up failure effect is to be executed in the round-by-round effect information storage area of the fourth round of the sub RAM 120c. Store data.

After executing step S1691-6 or S1691-7, the sub CPU 120a decides to perform the opening performance per 8R, and stores information on the opening performance pattern per 8R in the performance pattern storage area (S1691-8).

In step S1691-9, the sub CPU 120a sets the performance pattern designation command for the opening performance determined in step S1691-2, S1691-4, or S1691-8 in the transmission buffer. After that, the current special game selection process ends.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing details of the round effect control process. In FIG. 70, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the round start command in the reception buffer is for the fourth round (S1693-1). If the round start command in the reception buffer is for the fourth round (S1693-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693-2, and if it is for a round other than the fourth round (S1693-1), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693-2. :No), the process advances to step S1963-6.

In step S1693-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether rank-up performance execution data is stored in the round-by-round performance information storage area of the sub RAM 120c. If the rank-up effect execution data is stored (S1693-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693-3, and if the rank-up effect execution data is not stored (S1693-2: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693-3. Proceed to S1693-6.

In step S1693-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the rank-up performance execution data in the round-by-round performance information storage area indicates the execution of a successful rank-up performance or the execution of a failed rank-up performance. judge. If the rank-up performance execution data indicates execution of a successful rank-up performance (S1693-3: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693-4, and determines whether the rank-up performance execution data indicates execution of a failed rank-up performance. If it is as shown (S1693-3: No), the process advances to step S1693-5.

In step S1693-4, the sub CPU 120a sets a rank up success performance standby flag in the rank up performance success standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. After that, the process advances to step S1693-5. The rank-up successful performance standby flag is a flag indicating that the rank-up successful performance is waiting for execution.

In step S1693-5, the sub CPU 120a waits until the start timing of the operation acceptance valid period for the rank-up effect of the current round (fourth round) (the time when the image of the effect button 35, the indicator image, and the operation guide image appear). The remaining time is calculated, and the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds is set in the operation reception valid period start timer counter for the rank-up effect in the sub-RAM 120c. In addition, the sub CPU 120a calculates the remaining time until the end time of the operation reception valid period for the rank-up performance of this round (the time when the time marker in the indicator image reaches the end), and divides this time by 2 milliseconds. The obtained value is set in the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter for rank-up effect in the sub-RAM 120c. The operation acceptance valid period start timer counter and the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter are counted down each time the timer update process in step S1500 is executed. The operation reception valid period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start timing of the operation reception valid period. The operation acceptance valid period end timer counter becomes 0 at the end time of the operation acceptance valid period.

In step S1693-6, the sub CPU 120a sets the production pattern designation command for the round production of the current round in the transmission buffer.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing details of the timer update process. In FIG. 71, if there is a timer counter in the sub RAM 120c that is not 0, the sub CPU 120a updates it by -1 (S1501).

In the next step S1502, the sub CPU 120a checks whether the reach establishment standby flag is set in the reach establishment standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1503 when the ready-to-reach establishment standby flag is set (S1502: Yes), and proceeds to step S1506 when the ready-to-reach establishment standby flag is not set (S1503: No).

In step S1503, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the reach establishment standby timer counter in the sub RAM 120c is greater than zero. When the ready-to-win establishment standby timer counter is 0 (S1503: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1504, and when the ready-to-reach establishment standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S1502: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1506.

In step S1504, the sub CPU 120a generates a performance pattern designation command that instructs execution of the normal reach performance, and sets the generated performance pattern designation command in the transmission buffer. In the next step S1505, the sub CPU 120a clears the reach establishment standby flag in the sub RAM 120c.

The performance pattern designation command for the normal reach performance set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 in the data output process of step S1800. When receiving this command, the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cause the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d to execute the normal reach effect.

In step S1506, the sub CPU 120a checks whether the SP reach standby flag is set in the SP reach standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. If the SP reach standby flag is set (S1506: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1507, and if the SP reach standby flag is not set (S1507: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1510.

In step S1507, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the SP reach standby timer counter of the sub RAM 120c is greater than zero. If the SP reach standby timer counter is 0 (S1507: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1508, and if the SP reach standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S1506: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1510.

In step S1508, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designation command that instructs the execution of the SP ready-to-reach effect, and sets the generated effect pattern designation command in the transmission buffer. In the next step S1509, the sub CPU 120a clears the SP reach standby flag in the sub RAM 120c.

The performance pattern designation command for the SP reach performance set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 in the data output process of step S1800. When receiving this command, the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cause the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d to execute the SP reach effect.

In step S1510, the sub CPU 120a checks whether a stage change standby flag is set in the stage change standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. If the stage change standby flag is set (S1510: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1511, and if the stage change standby flag is not set (S1511: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1510.

In step S1511, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the stage change standby timer counter of the sub RAM 120c is greater than zero. If the stage change standby timer counter is 0 (S1511: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1512, and if the stage change standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S1510: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1510.

In step S1512, the sub CPU 120a generates a performance pattern designation command that instructs a stage change to the stage indicated by the data in the stage change information storage area of the sub RAM 120c, and sets the generated performance pattern designation command in the transmission buffer. In the next step S1513, the sub CPU 120a clears the stage change standby flag in the sub RAM 120c.

The stage change performance pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the overall control section 141 and the lamp/drive control section 150 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cause the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d to execute the stage performance of the new stage. .

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing details of the effect input control process. In FIG. 72, the sub CPU 120a performs operation information storage area update processing (S1701). The operation information storage area update process is a process for updating information in the operation information storage area of the sub-RAM 120c.

FIG. 73(a) is a diagram showing the operation information storage area. FIG. 73(b) is a diagram showing an example of updating the operation information storage area. As shown in FIG. 73(a), the operation information storage area includes an upper cursor key sampling signal storage area, a lower cursor key sampling signal storage area, a left cursor key sampling signal storage area, a right cursor key sampling signal storage area, and a center key sampling signal storage area. It has a sampling signal storage area, a performance button sampling signal storage area, a performance button on edge storage area, a performance button off edge storage area, a performance button off edge number storage area, and a performance button on-off edge signal number storage area. .

Each of the production button sampling signal storage area, production button on edge storage area, production button off edge storage area, production button off edge number storage area, and production button on-off edge signal number storage area stores the latest sampling timing information. It has a latest sampling storage section that stores information on the latest sampling timing, and a previous sampling storage section that stores information on the previous sampling timing (2 milliseconds ago).

In the operation information storage area update process, the sub CPU 120a updates the up cursor key sampling signal storage area based on the input signal of the detection switch 39a of the up cursor key 39A. Further, the lower cursor key sampling signal storage area is updated based on the input signal of the detection switch 39b of the lower cursor key 39B. Furthermore, the left cursor key sampling signal storage area is updated based on the input signal of the detection switch 39c of the left cursor key 39C. Furthermore, the right cursor key sampling signal storage area is updated based on the input signal of the detection switch 39d of the right cursor key 39D. Furthermore, the central key sampling signal storage area is updated based on the input signal of the detection switch 39e of the central key 39E. Also, based on the input signal of the detection switch 35a of the production button 35, the production button sampling signal storage area, production button on edge storage area, production button off edge storage area, and production button on-off edge signal number storage area are updated. do.

More specifically, at sampling timing every 2 milliseconds, the sub CPU 120a writes 1 in the up cursor key sampling signal storage area if the input signal of the detection switch 39a is ON, and when the input signal of the detection switch 39a is OFF. If so, write 0 to the upper cursor key sampling signal storage area. Further, if the input signal of the detection switch 39b is ON, 1 is written in the lower cursor key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39b is OFF, 0 is written in the lower cursor key sampling signal storage area. Further, if the input signal of the detection switch 39c is ON, 1 is written in the left cursor key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39c is OFF, 0 is written in the left cursor key sampling signal storage area. Further, if the input signal of the detection switch 39d is ON, 1 is written in the right cursor key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39d is OFF, 0 is written in the right cursor key sampling signal storage area. Furthermore, if the input signal of the detection switch 39e is ON, 1 is written in the central key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39e is OFF, 0 is written in the central key sampling signal storage area.

The sub CPU 120a transfers the information of the latest sampling storage section of the production button sampling signal storage area, production button on edge storage area, production button off edge storage area, and production button on-off edge signal number storage area to the previous sampling storage section. Copy each. Then, as shown in the update example of FIG. 73(b), if the input signal of the detection switch 35a is ON, the sub CPU 120a writes 1 in the latest sampling storage section of the production button sampling signal storage area, and writes 1 to the latest sampling storage section of the production button sampling signal storage area, and If the input signal is OFF, 0 is written in the latest sampling storage section of the production button sampling signal storage area. If the previous sampling signal storage section of the production button sampling signal storage area is 0 and the latest sampling storage section is 1, the sub CPU 120a writes 1 to the latest sampling storage section of the production button on edge signal storage area, and writes 1 to the latest sampling storage section of the production button on edge signal storage area, and writes 1 to the latest sampling storage section of the production button on edge signal storage area. If (the previous sampling signal is 1 → the latest sampling signal is 1, the previous sampling signal is 0 → the latest sampling signal is 0, or the previous sampling signal is 1 → the latest sampling signal is 0), the production button on edge signal storage area Write 0 to the latest sampling storage section.

If the previous sampling signal storage section of the production button sampling signal storage area is 1 and the latest sampling storage section is 0, the sub CPU 120a writes 1 to the latest sampling storage section of the production button off edge signal storage area, and writes 1 to the latest sampling storage section of the production button off edge signal storage area, and writes 1 to the latest sampling storage section of the production button off edge signal storage area. If (the previous sampling signal is 1 → the latest sampling signal is 1, the previous sampling signal is 0 → the latest sampling signal is 0, or the previous sampling signal is 0 → the latest sampling signal is 1), the production button off edge signal storage area Write 0 to the latest sampling storage section.

When the sub CPU 120a writes 1 to the latest sampling storage section of the production button sampling signal storage area, the sub CPU 120a adds 1 to the number in the latest sampling storage section of the production button on-off edge signal number storage area and rewrites it to a number. When 0 is written in the latest sampling storage area of the sampling signal storage area, the latest sampling storage area of the production button on-off edge signal number storage area is reset to 0.

In the next step S1702, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the operation reception valid period start timer counter for rank-up effect is 0. After the start timing of the operation acceptance valid period for the continuous hit performance in the rank-up performance, the determination result of this step becomes "Yes". If the operation acceptance valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1702: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1703. If the operation acceptance valid period start timer counter is greater than 0 (S1702: No), the process advances to step S1713.

In step S1703, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter for rank-up effect is 0. If it is within the operation acceptance valid period for the rank-up effect, the determination result of this step will be "No," and at the end time of the operation acceptance valid period, the determination result of this step will be "Yes." If the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter is greater than 0 (S1703: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1704. If the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1703: Yes), the process advances to step S1709.

In step S1704, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the value in the latest sampling signal storage section of the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is greater than or equal to a predetermined value. The predetermined value in this step is a value obtained by dividing a sufficient period (for example, 1 second) by 2 milliseconds to determine that the production button 35 is continuously operated (kept pressed). do. If the production button 35 is continuously operated (kept pressed) for one second or more, the determination result of this step is "Yes". If the value in the latest sampling signal storage section of the production button on-off edge signal number storage area is less than the predetermined value (S1704: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1705. If the value in the latest sampling signal storage section of the production button on-off edge signal number storage area is greater than or equal to the predetermined value (S1704: Yes), the process advances to step S1713.

In step S1705, the sub CPU 120a determines whether 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage section of the production button on edge storage area. If it is immediately after the production button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step will be "Yes". If 1 is written (S1705: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1706. If 0 is written (S1705: No), the process advances to step S1713.

In step S1706, the sub CPU 120a updates the number of consecutive hits NRD in the number of consecutive hits storage area of the sub RAM 120c by +1. After that, the process advances to step S1707.

In step S1707, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the updated number of consecutive hits NRD has reached 30 or not. If the number of presses of the effect button 35 after the display of the "Continuous Hits!" guide image reaches 30 times, the determination result of this step will be "Yes", and if the number of presses of this step has not reached 30 times, the determination result of this step will be "Yes". The determination result is "No". If the number of consecutive hits NRD has not reached 30 (S1707: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1708. If the number of consecutive hits NRD reaches 30 (S1707: Yes), the process advances to step S1709.

In step S1708, the sub CPU 120a sets the production progress designation command in the transmission buffer. After that, the process advances to step S1712.

When the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1708, the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 display the image display device 31, audio output, and the like to advance the gauge progress amount of the gauge image to the right by a predetermined amount. The device 32 and the production lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d are caused to execute.

In step S1709, it is confirmed whether the rank-up successful performance standby flag is set in the rank-up successful performance standby flag storage area of the sub-RAM 120c. The rank-up successful production standby flag is set at the start of the fourth round of the special game with 8R probability variation. If the rank-up successful production standby flag is set (S1709: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1710. If the rank up successful production standby flag is not set (S1709: No), the process advances to step S1713.

In step S1710, the sub CPU 120a sets a performance pattern designation command for rank-up failure in the transmission buffer. After that, the process advances to step S1713.

When the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1710, the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 transmit the result notification effect of the rank-up failure effect to the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect for the effect. The lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d are caused to execute.

In step S1711, the sub CPU 120a sets an effect pattern designation command for successful rank up in the transmission buffer. After that, the process advances to step S1712.

When the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1711, the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 transmit the result notification effect of the successful rank up effect to the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect for the effect. The lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d are caused to execute.

In step S1712, the sub CPU 120a clears the rank up effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. After that, the process advances to step S1713.

In step S1713, the sub CPU 120a generates an operation designation command according to the operation of the production button 35, the cross key 39, or the center key 39E, and sets the generated operation designation command in the transmission buffer.

When the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1713, the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 display the effect according to the operation of the effect button 35, cross key 39, or center key 39E on the image display device. 31, the audio output device 32 and the production lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d are caused to execute.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the overall control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1. The main process is started when a system reset occurs from the power supply board 170 to the central CPU 141a due to a startup operation.

In FIG. 74, the supervising CPU 141a performs initialization processing (S2010). In the initialization process, when the power is turned on, the overall CPU 141a reads the startup program from the overall ROM 141c of the overall control unit 141, initializes the flag in the overall RAM 141b, and instructs the initial settings of the VDP 145.

In the next step S2020, the overall CPU 141a checks whether there is a received command received from the production control unit 120m in the reception buffer. If there is a command in the reception buffer (S2020: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030, and if there is no command in the reception buffer (S2020: No), the operation proceeds to step S2050.

In step S2030, the supervising CPU 141a performs animation pattern setting processing. In the animation pattern setting process, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the commands in the reception buffer, determines the content of the effect image corresponding to the subsequent series of effects, and the waiting time until the timing to start displaying the effect image, and starts displaying the effect image. At the timing, the animation pattern of each effect image is determined and set. Details of the animation pattern setting process will be described later.

In step S2040, the overall CPU 141a performs sound setting processing. In the sound setting process, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the commands in the reception buffer, determines the content of the effect sound corresponding to the subsequent series of effects, and the waiting time until the output start timing of the effect sound, and determines the output start timing of the effect sound. In this step, the sound pattern of each performance sound is determined and set. Details of the sound setting process will be described later.

In step S2050, the overall CPU 141a determines whether the FB switching flag=01. The FB switching flag becomes 01 if the drawing of the previous display list is completed in the V blank interrupt every 1/30 seconds. If the FB switching flag is 01 (S2050: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2060, and if the FB switching flag is not 01 (S2050: No), the process proceeds to step S2020.

In step S2060, the supervising CPU 141a sets the FB switching flag=00 (turns off the FB switching flag), and proceeds to the next step S2070. In step S2070, the overall CPU 141a performs display list generation/output processing. In the display list generation/output process, the supervising CPU 141a generates a display list according to the animation pattern set in the animation pattern setting process, and outputs it to the VDP 145. The display list is image shaping information for shaping an effect image to be displayed on the image display device 31.

In step S2080, the overall CPU 141a performs drawing command processing. In the drawing command process, the supervising CPU 141a instructs the VDP 145 to draw an image based on the display list output in the display list generation/output process. In response to this drawing command, the VDP 145 performs a process of drawing an effect image based on the display list on the drawing frame buffer, and a process of displaying the effect image drawn on the display frame buffer on the image display device 31.

In step S2090, the overall CPU 141a performs sound list generation/output processing. In the sound list generation/output process, the supervising CPU 141a generates a sound list made up of a group of sound control commands, and outputs the generated sound list to the audio processor 144. The sound list is audio output information for specifying sounds (BGM, sound effects, etc.) such as audio data and music data to be output from the audio output device 32.

In step S2100, the overall CPU 141a performs audio output command processing. In the audio output command process, the central CPU 141a instructs the audio control unit to output sounds based on the outputted sound list. By performing this sound output command processing, the audio control unit causes the audio output device 32 to output a sound based on the sound list.

In step S2110, the supervising CPU 141a performs animation control processing to update animation scene information (address) for each predetermined animation pattern in preparation for creating a display list for the next frame, and returns to step S2020. Thereafter, the supervising CPU 141a repeats the loop processing from step S2020 onwards. In addition to this loop processing, the overall CPU 141a executes timer interrupt processing every time the reset clock pulse signal is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the drawing end interrupt processing of the overall control unit 141. When the drawing of one frame is finished, the VDP 145 of the overall control unit 141 outputs a drawing end interrupt signal to the overall CPU 141a. When a drawing end interrupt signal is input from the VDP 145, the supervising CPU 141a executes a drawing end interrupt process.

In the drawing end interrupt process, the supervising CPU 141a sets the drawing end flag=01 (step S2210). Thereafter, the current drawing end interrupt processing is ended.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the V blank interrupt processing of the overall control unit 141. The VDP 145 of the overall control unit 141 outputs a V blank interrupt signal (vertical synchronization signal) to the overall CPU 141a every 1/30 seconds. When the supervising CPU 141a receives the V blank interrupt signal from the VDP 145, it executes the V blank interrupt process.

In the V blank interrupt process, the supervising CPU 141a performs a process of updating various counters such as a scene switching counter, a wait frame counter, and a frame counter (step S2310). In the next step S2320, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the drawing end flag=01. The drawing end flag becomes 01 if the drawing of a predetermined unit of frames has been completed.

If the drawing end flag=01 (S2320; Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2330, and if the drawing end flag=01 (S2320; No), it ends the current V blank interrupt process.

In step S2330, the supervising CPU 141a sets the drawing end flag=00 (turns off the drawing end flag). In step S2340, the supervising CPU 141a gives an instruction to the memory controller of the VDP 145 to switch between the "display frame buffer" and the "drawing frame buffer."

In step S2350, the supervising CPU 141a sets the FB switching flag=01 (turns on the FB switching flag) and ends the current V blank interrupt process. When the overall control unit 141 receives an instruction to create a video signal from the overall CPU 141a, it generates an RGB signal (analog signal) indicating the image data as a video signal from the image data (digital signal) stored in the display frame buffer of the VRAM 147. The generated video signal (RGB signal) and synchronization signals (vertical synchronization signal, horizontal synchronization signal, etc.) for synchronizing with the image display device 31 are output to the image display device 31, and the current V blank is generated. Ends interrupt processing.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing by the overall control unit 141. The overall CPU 141a of the overall control unit 141 executes timer interrupt processing every 4 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse signal in the reset clock pulse generation circuit in the performance control unit 120m.

In the timer interrupt processing, the central CPU 141a performs image control timer update processing (S2410). In the image control timer update process, if there is a timer counter set in the animation pattern setting process, the supervising CPU 141a updates it by -1. Details of the image control timer update process will be described later.

In the next step S2420, the overall CPU 141a performs voice control timer update processing. In the audio control timer update process, the central CPU 141a updates the timer counter set in the sound setting process by -1, if any. Details of the voice control timer update process will be described later.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the lamp/drive control section 150. In FIG. 78, the lamp CPU 150a performs initialization processing (S2510). In the initialization process, the lamp CPU 150a reads a startup program from the lamp ROM 150c of the lamp/drive control unit 150 in response to power-on, and performs processes such as initializing flags and the like stored in the lamp ROM 150c.

In the next step S2520, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether there is a received command received from the production control unit 120m in the reception buffer. If there is a command in the reception buffer (S2520: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530, and if there is no command in the reception buffer (S2520: No), the operation proceeds to step S2550.

In step S2530, the lamp CPU 150a performs lamp emission information setting processing. In the lamp light emission information setting process, the lamp CPU 150a analyzes the command in the reception buffer, and determines the content of the light emission of the lamps 34a, 34b, 34c, and 34d corresponding to the subsequent series of effects and the waiting time until the light emission start timing. , lamp light emission information is determined and set at the light emission start timing of the lamps 34a, 34b, 34c, and 34d. Details of the lamp light emission information setting process will be described later.

In step S2540, the lamp CPU 150a performs accessory drive information setting processing. In the accessory drive information setting process, the lamp CPU 150a analyzes the commands in the reception buffer, and determines the details of the drive of the movable accessories 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d corresponding to the subsequent series of performances and the wait time until the drive start timing. The time is determined, and the accessory drive information is determined and set at the drive start timing of the movable accessory objects 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d. Details of the accessory drive information setting process will be described later.

In step S2550, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the FB switching flag=01. The FB switching flag becomes 01 if the drawing of the previous display list is completed in the V blank interrupt every 1/30 seconds. If the FB switching flag is 01 (S2550: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2560, and if the FB switching flag is not 01 (S2550: No), the process proceeds to step S2520.

In step S2560, the lamp CPU 150a sets the FB switching flag=00 (turns off the FB switching flag), and proceeds to the next step S2570.

In step S2570, the lamp CPU 150a performs lamp control processing. In the lamp control process, the lamp CPU 150a controls the lamps 34a, 34b, 34c, and 34d of the corresponding performance lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d in a light emission mode according to the lamp emission information set in the lamp emission information setting process. to emit light.

In step S2580, the lamp CPU 150a performs accessory drive processing. In the accessory drive process, the lamp CPU 150a drives the movable accessory 33a of the corresponding performance drive device 330a, 330b, 330c, 330d in a driving manner according to the accessory drive information set in the accessory drive information setting process. 33b, 33c, and 33d are driven.

After this, the lamp CPU 150a repeats the loop processing from step S2520 onwards. In addition to this loop processing, the lamp CPU 150a executes timer interrupt processing every time the reset clock pulse signal is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the drawing end interrupt processing of the lamp/drive control section 150. When the drawing of one frame is completed, the VDP 145 of the lamp/drive control unit 150 outputs a drawing end interrupt signal to the lamp CPU 150a. When a drawing end interrupt signal is input from the VDP 145, the lamp CPU 150a executes a drawing end interrupt process.

In the drawing end interrupt process, the lamp CPU 150a sets the drawing end flag=01 (step S2610). Thereafter, the current drawing end interrupt processing is ended.

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the V blank interrupt processing of the lamp/drive control section 150. The VDP 145 of the lamp/drive control unit 150 outputs a V blank interrupt signal (vertical synchronization signal) to the lamp CPU 150a every 1/30 seconds. When the V blank interrupt signal is input from the VDP 145, the lamp CPU 150a executes V blank interrupt processing.

In the V blank interrupt process, the lamp CPU 150a sets the FB switching flag=01 (turns on the FB switching flag) (step S2710). Thereafter, the current V blank interrupt processing is ended.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing by the lamp/drive control section 150. The lamp CPU 150a of the lamp/drive control section 150 executes a timer interrupt process every 4 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse signal in the reset clock pulse generation circuit in the production control section 120m.

In the timer interrupt process, the lamp CPU 150a performs a lamp control timer update process (S2810). In the lamp control timer update process, the lamp CPU 150a updates the timer counter by -1 if there is a timer counter set in the lamp light emission information setting process. Details of the lamp control timer update process will be described later.

In the next step S2820, the lamp CPU 150a performs accessory control timer update processing. In the accessory control timer update process, if there is a timer counter set in the accessory drive setting process, the lamp CPU 150a updates it by -1. Details of the accessory control timer update process will be described later.

82 to 93 are flowcharts showing details of the animation pattern setting process (step S2040 in FIG. 74) of the overall control unit 141. In FIG. 82, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the normal variation effect image display flag is set in the normal variation effect image display flag storage area of the control RAM 141b (S2030-1). The normal fluctuation effect image display flag indicates that the background image of the marine stage, savanna stage, cosmo stage, live mode, special training mode, or help mode shown in FIG. 10(b) is being displayed. It's a flag. The normal variable image display flag is set in step S2030-61, which will be described later, when a variation start production pattern designation command is received from the production control unit 120m. If the normal variation effect image display flag is set (S2030-1: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-2, and if the normal variation effect image display flag is not set (S2030-1: No), proceed to step S2030-6.

In step S2030-2, the overall CPU 141a performs normal variation effect image control mode determination processing. In the normal variation effect image control mode determination process, the overall CPU 141a refers to the normal variation effect image control mode determination table in the overall ROM 141c, and determines the effect image of the normal variation effect based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Determine the control mode.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a normal variation effect image control mode determination table. The normal fluctuation performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that can be received by the general control unit 141 from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode (“end” or “continue”) of the performance image of the normal fluctuation performance. Each set of data shown is stored. "End" data indicates that the display of the effect image of the normal variable effect is immediately stopped when the corresponding effect pattern specification command is received, and "Continue" data indicates that the display of the effect image of the normal variable effect is immediately stopped when the corresponding effect pattern specification command is received. In this case, it indicates that the display of the effect image of the normal variation effect is continued.

In the next step S2030-3, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the normal variation effect image control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "End" (S2030-3: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to Step S2030-4, and if the control mode is "Continue" (S2030-3: No), the process proceeds to Step S2030-6. move on.

In step S2030-4, the supervising CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the normal variation effect. The animation pattern for the normal variation effect is set in step S2030-62, which will be described later, when a variation start effect pattern designation command is received from the effect control unit 120m. When the animation pattern of the normal variation effect is cleared, the background image of the marine stage, savanna stage, cosmo stage, live mode, special training mode, or help mode (shown in FIG. 10(b)) is displayed on the image display device 31. ) will be stopped.

In the next step S2030-5, the overall CPU 141a clears the normal variable effect image display flag in the overall RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2030-6.

In step S2030-6, the overall CPU 141a checks whether the step-up effect image displaying flag is set in the step-up effect image displaying flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b (S2030-6). The step-up effect image displaying flag is a flag indicating that a step-up effect image (photo image shown in FIG. 19) is being displayed. The step-up image displaying flag is set in step S2410-5 of the image control timer update process (FIGS. 107 to 114), which will be described later, when the display timing of the step-up effect effect image in the variation has arrived. . If the step-up effect image displaying flag is set (S2030-6: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-7, and if the step-up effect image display flag is not set (S2030-6: No), the process advances to step S2030-11.

In step S2030-7, the overall CPU 141a performs step-up effect image control mode determination processing. In the step-up effect image control mode determination process, the overall CPU 141a refers to the step-up effect image control mode determination table in the overall ROM 141c, and determines the effect image of the step-up effect based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Determine the control mode.

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a step-up effect image control mode determination table. The step-up performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that can be received by the general control unit 141 from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode (“end” or “continue”) of the performance image of the step-up performance. Each set of data shown is stored. "End" data indicates that the display of the step-up production image will be immediately stopped when the corresponding production pattern specification command is received, and "Continue" data indicates that the display of the production image of the step-up production will be immediately stopped when the corresponding production pattern specification command is received. In this case, it indicates that the display of the step-up effect image is to be continued.

In the next step S2030-8, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the step-up effect image control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "end" (S2030-8: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-9, and if the control mode is "continue" (S2030-8: No), the process proceeds to step S2030-11. move on.

In step S2030-9, the supervising CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the step-up effect. The animation pattern of the step-up effect is set in step S2410-7 of the image control timer update process (FIGS. 107 to 114), which will be described later, when the display timing of the effect image of the step-up effect in the variation has arrived. . When the animation pattern of the step-up effect is cleared, the display of the effect image (photo image shown in FIG. 19) of the step-up effect is stopped on the image display device 31.

In the next step S2030-10, the overall CPU 141a clears the step-up effect image displaying flag in the overall RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2030-11.

In step S2030-11, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the normal reach effect image displaying flag is set in the normal reach effect image displaying flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b. The normal reach performance image display flag is a flag indicating that the normal reach performance image (the background image of the adventure shown in FIG. 15) is being displayed. The normal reach image displaying flag is set in step S2030-96, which will be described later, when a command for designating an effect pattern indicating a reach effect is received from the effect control unit 120m. If the normal reach performance image display flag is set (S2030-11: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-12, and if the normal reach performance image display flag is not set (S2030-11: No). , proceed to step S2030-16.

In step S2030-12, the supervising CPU 141a performs normal reach effect image control mode determination processing. In the normal reach effect image control mode determination process, the supervising CPU 141a refers to the normal reach effect image control mode determination table in the overall ROM 141c, and determines the control mode of the normal reach effect image based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. decide.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a normal reach effect image control mode determination table. The normal reach performance control mode determination table includes data indicating the types of performance pattern designation commands that can be received by the general control unit 141 from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode (“end” or “continue”) of the performance image of the normal reach performance. Each set is stored. "End" data indicates that the display of the normal reach performance image will be immediately stopped when the corresponding production pattern specification command is received, and "Continue" data indicates that the display of the normal reach production image will be immediately stopped when the corresponding production pattern specification command is received. Indicates that the display of the effect image of the normal reach effect is to be continued.

In the next step S2030-13, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the normal reach effect image control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "End" (S2030-13: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to Step S2030-14, and if the control mode is "Continue" (S2030-13: No), the process proceeds to Step S2030-16. move on.

In step S2030-14, the supervising CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the normal reach effect. The animation pattern for the normal reach effect is set in step S2030-95, which will be described later, when a reach effect effect pattern designation command is received from the effect control unit 120m. When the animation pattern of the normal reach effect is cleared, the display of the effect image of the normal reach effect (the background image of the adventure shown in FIG. 15) is stopped on the image display device 31.

In the next step S2030-15, the supervising CPU 141a clears the normal reach effect image displaying flag in the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2030-16.

In step S2030-16, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the character appearance effect image displaying flag is set in the character appearance effect image displaying flag storage area of the general RAM 141b (S2030-16). The character appearance effect image display flag is a flag indicating that a character appearance effect image (image of the character shown in FIG. 21) is being displayed. The character appearance image displaying flag is set in step S2410-11 of the image control timer update process (FIGS. 107 to 114), which will be described later, when the display timing of the effect image of the character appearance effect in the variation has arrived. . If the character appearance effect image displaying flag is set (S2030-16: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-17, and if the character appearance effect image display flag is not set (S2030-16: No), proceed to step S2030-23.

In step S2030-17, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the premium character image flag is set in the premium character image flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. The premium character image flag is set in step S2030-68, which will be described later, when the character appearing in the character appearance effect is a premium character. If the premium character image flag is set (S2030-17: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-18, and if the premium character image flag is not set (S2030-17: No), the process proceeds to step S2030- Proceed to step 19.

In step S2030-18, the central CPU 141a performs premium character appearance effect image control mode determination processing. In the premium character appearance effect image control mode determination process, the supervising CPU 141a refers to the premium character appearance effect image control mode determination table in the integrated ROM 141c, and determines the appearance of the premium character based on the type of the effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Determine the control mode of the effect image of the effect.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a premium character appearance effect image control mode determination table. The premium character appearance performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that can be received by the general control unit 141 from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode of the performance image of the character appearance performance in which the premium character appears (“end”). or "continuation") are stored. The data "End" indicates that the display of the performance image of the character appearance performance in which the premium character appears will be immediately stopped when the corresponding production pattern specification command is received, and the data "Continue" indicates that the display of the performance image of the character appearance production in which the premium character appears will be immediately stopped. Indicates that when a pattern designation command is received, the display of the effect image of the character appearance effect in which the premium character appears will be continued.

In step S2030-19, the central CPU 141a performs character appearance effect image control mode determination processing. In the character appearance effect image control mode determination process, the overall CPU 141a refers to the premium character appearance effect image control mode determination table in the overall ROM 141c, and selects character A, B, or The control mode of the effect image of the character appearance effect of C is determined.

FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a character appearance effect image control mode determination table. The character appearance effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the general control unit 141 from the effect control unit 120m, and the control mode of the effect image of the character appearance effect (“end” or “continue”). Each set of data shown is stored. Data of "End" indicates that the display of the effect image of the character appearance effect is immediately stopped when the corresponding effect pattern specification command is received, and data of "Continue" indicates that the display of the effect image of the character appearance effect is immediately stopped when the corresponding effect pattern specification command is received. In this case, it indicates that the display of the effect image of the character appearance effect is to be continued.

In step S2030-20, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the premium character appearance effect control mode determination process or the character appearance effect image control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". . If the control mode is "End" (S2030-20: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to Step S2030-21, and if the control mode is "Continue" (S2030-20: No), the process proceeds to Step S2030-22. move on.

In step S2030-21, the supervising CPU 141a clears the animation pattern for character appearance. The animation pattern of the character appearance effect is set in step S2410-13 of the image control timer update process (FIGS. 107 to 114), which will be described later, when the display timing of the effect image of the character appearance effect in the variation has arrived. . When the animation pattern of the character appearance effect is cleared, the image display device 31 stops displaying the effect image of the character appearance effect (the image of the character shown in FIG. 21).

In the next step S2030-22, the supervising CPU 141a clears the character appearance effect image displaying flag in the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2030-23.

In step S2030-23, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the roulette effect image displaying flag is set in the roulette effect image displaying flag storage area of the general RAM 141b (S2030-23). The roulette effect image displaying flag is a flag indicating that a roulette effect image (the roulette image shown in FIG. 23) is being displayed. The roulette image displaying flag is set in step S2410-17 of the image control timer update process (FIGS. 107 to 114), which will be described later, when the display timing of the effect image of the roulette effect in the variation has arrived. If the roulette effect image display flag is set (S2030-23: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-24, and if the roulette effect image display flag is not set (S2030-23: No). , proceed to step S2030-28.

In step S2030-24, the central CPU 141a performs roulette effect image control mode determination processing. In the roulette performance image control mode determination process, the central CPU 141a refers to the roulette performance image control mode determination table in the central ROM 141c, and determines the control mode of the roulette performance image based on the type of performance pattern designation command in the reception buffer. decide.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a roulette performance image control mode determination table. The roulette performance control mode determination table includes data indicating the types of performance pattern designation commands that can be received by the general control unit 141 from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode (“end” or “continue”) of the performance image of the roulette performance. Each set is stored. "End" data indicates that the display of the effect image of the roulette effect is immediately stopped when the corresponding effect pattern specification command is received, and "Continue" data indicates that the display of the effect image of the roulette effect is immediately stopped when the corresponding effect pattern specification command is received. Indicates that the display of the effect image of the roulette effect is to be continued in this case.

In the next step S2030-25, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the roulette effect image control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "End" (S2030-25: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to Step S2030-26, and if the control mode is "Continue" (S2030-25: No), the process proceeds to Step S2030-28. move on.

In step S2030-26, the supervising CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the roulette effect. The animation pattern of the roulette effect is set in step S2410-19 of the image control timer update process (FIGS. 107 to 114), which will be described later, when the display timing of the effect image of the roulette effect in the variation has arrived. When the animation pattern of the roulette performance is cleared, the display of the roulette performance image (the roulette image shown in FIG. 23) is stopped on the image display device 31.

In the next step S2030-27, the supervising CPU 141a clears the roulette effect image displaying flag in the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2030-28.

In step S2030-28, the supervisory CPU 141a checks whether the SP development promotion image displaying flag is set in the SP development promotion image displaying flag storage area of the administration RAM 141b. The SP development promotion image display flag is a flag indicating that the SP development promotion image (the sandstorm effect image shown in FIG. 25) is being displayed. The SP development inciting image display flag is set in step S2410-23 of the image control timer update process (FIGS. 107 to 114), which will be described later, when the display timing of the effect image of the SP development inciting effect in the fluctuation has arrived. be done. If the SP development promotion image displaying flag is set (S2030-28: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-29, and if the SP development promotion image display flag is not set (S2030-28). 28: No), the process advances to step S2030-33.

In step S2030-29, the supervising CPU 141a performs SP development promotion effect image control mode determination processing. In the SP development inciting performance image control mode determination process, the central CPU 141a refers to the SP development inciting performance image control mode determination table in the central ROM 141c, and determines the SP development inciting performance based on the type of performance pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Determine the control mode of the effect image.

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a SP development promotion effect image control mode determination table. The SP development stimulation performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that the general control unit 141 can receive from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode of the performance image of the SP development stimulation performance (“end” or “continue”). ) are stored. The data of "End" indicates that the display of the performance image of the SP development inciting performance is immediately stopped when the corresponding performance pattern specification command is received, and the data of "Continue" indicates that the display of the performance image of the SP development stimulation performance is immediately stopped when the corresponding performance pattern specification command is received. When received, it indicates that the display of the effect image of the SP development promotion effect is to be continued.

In the next step S2030-30, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the SP development promotion effect image control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "End" (S2030-30: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to Step S2030-31, and if the control mode is "Continue" (S2030-30: No), the process proceeds to Step S2030-33. move on.

In step S2030-31, the supervising CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the SP development promotion effect. The animation pattern of the SP development stimulation effect is set in step S2410-25 of the image control timer update process (FIGS. 107 to 114), which will be described later, when the display timing of the effect image of the SP development stimulation effect in the fluctuation has arrived. be done. When the animation pattern of the SP development promotion effect is cleared, the display of the SP development promotion effect image (the sandstorm effect image shown in FIG. 25) is stopped on the image display device 31.

In the next step S2030-32, the supervising CPU 141a clears the SP development promotion effect image displaying flag in the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2030-33.

In step S2030-33, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the SP development confirmed effect image display flag is set in the SP development confirmed effect image display flag storage area of the general RAM 141b. The SP development confirmed performance image displaying flag is a flag indicating that the SP development confirmed performance image (the bubble effect image shown in FIG. 27) is being displayed. The SP development confirmed image displaying flag is set in step S2410-29 of the image control timer update process (FIGS. 107 to 114), which will be described later, when the display timing of the effect image of the SP development confirmed effect in the change comes. be done. If the SP development confirmed performance image displaying flag is set (S2030-33: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-34, and if the SP development confirmed performance image display flag is not set (S2030- 33: No), the process advances to step S2030-38.

In step S2030-34, the supervising CPU 141a performs SP development confirmed effect image control mode determination processing. In the SP development confirmed effect image control mode determination process, the central CPU 141a refers to the SP development confirmed effect image control mode determination table in the general ROM 141c, and determines the SP development confirmed effect based on the type of performance pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Determine the control mode of the effect image.

FIG. 101 is a diagram showing the SP development confirmed effect image control mode determination table. The SP development confirmed performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that the general control unit 141 can receive from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode of the performance image of the SP development confirmed performance (“end” or “continue”). ) are stored. "End" data indicates that the display of the performance image of the SP development confirmed performance is immediately stopped when the corresponding performance pattern specification command is received, and "Continue" data indicates that the display of the performance image of the SP development confirmed performance is immediately stopped when the corresponding performance pattern specification command is received. When received, it indicates that the display of the effect image of the SP development confirmed effect is to be continued.

In the next step S2030-35, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the SP development confirmed effect image control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "End" (S2030-35: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to Step S2030-36, and if the control mode is "Continue" (S2030-35: No), the process proceeds to Step S2030-38. move on.

In step S2030-36, the supervising CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the SP development confirmation effect. The animation pattern of the SP development confirmed effect is set in step S2410-31 of the image control timer update process (FIGS. 107 to 114), which will be described later, when the display timing of the effect image of the SP development confirmed effect in the fluctuation has arrived. be done. When the animation pattern of the SP development confirmed effect is cleared, the display of the effect image (bubble effect image shown in FIG. 27) of the SP development confirmed effect is stopped on the image display device 31.

In the next step S2030-37, the supervising CPU 141a clears the SP development confirmed effect image displaying flag in the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2030-38.

In step S2030-38, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the SP ready-to-win effect image displaying flag is set in the SP ready-to-win effect image displaying flag storage area of the general RAM 141b. The SP reach effect image displaying flag is a flag indicating that the SP reach effect effect image (the battle animation image shown in FIG. 17) is being displayed. The SP ready-to-win image displaying flag is set in step S2030-93, which will be described later, when a production pattern designation command for development to SP ready-to-win production is received from the production control unit 120m. If the SP reach effect image displaying flag is set (S2030-38: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-39, and if the SP reach effect image display flag is not set (S2030-38: No), proceed to step S2030-43.

In step S2030-39, the supervising CPU 141a performs SP reach effect image control mode determination processing. In the SP reach effect image control mode determination process, the supervising CPU 141a refers to the SP reach effect image control mode determination table in the overall ROM 141c, and determines the effect image of the SP reach effect based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Determine the control mode.

FIG. 102 is a diagram showing the SP reach effect image control mode determination table. The SP reach performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that can be received by the general control unit 141 from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode (“end” or “continue”) of the performance image of the SP reach performance. Each set of data shown is stored. "End" data indicates that the display of the performance image of the SP reach effect is immediately stopped when the corresponding production pattern specification command is received, and "Continue" data indicates that the display of the SP reach effect production image is immediately stopped when the corresponding production pattern specification command is received. In this case, it indicates that the display of the effect image of the SP reach effect is continued.

In the next step S2030-40, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the SP reach effect image control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "End" (S2030-40: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to Step S2030-41, and if the control mode is "Continue" (S2030-40: No), the process proceeds to Step S2030-43. move on.

In step S2030-41, the supervising CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the SP reach effect. The animation pattern for the SP ready-to-win performance is set in step S2030-100, which will be described later, when a command for designating a performance pattern for development to the SP ready-to-reach performance is received from the performance control unit 120m. When the animation pattern of the SP reach effect is cleared, the display of the effect image of the SP reach effect (the battle animation image shown in FIG. 17) is stopped on the image display device 31.

In the next step S2030-42, the supervising CPU 141a clears the SP reach effect image displaying flag in the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2030-43.

In step S2030-43, the overall CPU 141a checks whether the cut-in effect image display flag is set in the cut-in effect image display flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b. The cut-in effect image display flag is a flag indicating that a cut-in effect image (the cut-in image shown in FIG. 29) is being displayed. The cut-in image displaying flag is set in step S2410-35 of the image control timer update process (FIGS. 107 to 114), which will be described later, when the display timing of the effect image of the cut-in effect in the variation has arrived. . If the cut-in effect image displaying flag is set (S2030-43: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-44, and if the cut-in effect image display flag is not set (S2030-43: No), proceed to step S2030-50.

In step S2030-44, the overall CPU 141a checks whether the premium cut-in image flag is set in the premium cut-in image flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b. The premium cut-in image flag is set in step S2030-82, which will be described later, when the background of the cut-in effect is a rainbow background. If the premium cut-in image flag is set (S2030-44: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-45, and if the premium cut-in image flag is not set (S2030-44: No), the process proceeds to step S2030-45. Proceed to S2030-46.

In step S2030-45, the central CPU 141a performs premium cut-in effect image control mode determination processing. In the premium cut-in effect image control mode determination process, the overall CPU 141a refers to the premium cut-in effect image control mode determination table in the overall ROM 141c, and performs a rainbow-colored background cut based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Determine the control mode of the effect image of the in-effect.

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a premium cut-in effect image control mode determination table. The premium cut-in performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that can be received by the general control unit 141 from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode of the performance image for the rainbow-colored background cut-in performance (“end” or Each set of data indicating "continuation") is stored. The data "End" indicates that the display of the effect image of the cut-in effect with the rainbow background will be immediately stopped when the corresponding effect pattern specification command is received, and the data "Continue" indicates that the display of the effect image of the cut-in effect with the rainbow background is immediately stopped. Indicates that when a designated command is received, the display of the effect image of the cut-in effect with the rainbow background is to be continued.

In step S2030-46, the overall CPU 141a performs cut-in effect image control mode determination processing. In the cut-in effect image control mode determination process, the overall CPU 141a refers to the premium cut-in effect image control mode determination table in the overall ROM 141c, and selects green, red, or zebra based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. The control mode of the effect image of the cut-in effect of the background of the pattern is determined.

FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect image control mode determination table. The cut-in effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that can be received by the general control unit 141 from the effect control unit 120m, and the control mode (“end” or “continue”) of the effect image of the cut-in effect. Each set of data shown is stored. "End" data indicates that the display of the cut-in production image will be immediately stopped when the corresponding production pattern specification command is received, and "Continue" data indicates that the display of the cut-in production image will be immediately stopped when the corresponding production pattern specification command is received. Indicates that the display of the effect image of the cut-in effect is to be continued in this case.

In step S2030-47, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the premium cut-in effect control mode determination process or the cut-in effect image control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". . If the control mode is "End" (S2030-47: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to Step S2030-48, and if the control mode is "Continue" (S2030-47: No), the process proceeds to Step S2030-49. move on.

In step S2030-48, the supervising CPU 141a clears the cut-in animation pattern. The animation pattern of the cut-in effect is set in step S2410-37 of the image control timer update process (FIGS. 107 to 114), which will be described later, when the display timing of the effect image of the cut-in effect in the variation has arrived. . When the cut-in effect animation pattern is cleared, the image display device 31 stops displaying the cut-in effect image (the cut-in image shown in FIG. 29).

In the next step S2030-49, the overall CPU 141a clears the cut-in effect image displaying flag in the overall RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2030-50.

In step S2030-50, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the confirmed accessory action first effect image display flag is set in the confirmed accessory action first effect image display flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b. The confirmed accessory action first effect image displaying flag is a flag indicating that the effect image (the yellow lightning image shown in FIG. 31) of the confirmed accessory action first effect is being displayed. The confirmed accessory action first performance image displaying flag is set in the image control timer update process (FIGS. 107 to 114), which will be described later, when the display timing of the final performance image of the confirmed accessory action first performance in the fluctuation has arrived. It is set in step S2410-41. If the confirmed accessory action first effect image display flag is set (S2030-50: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-51, and sets the confirmed accessory action first effect image display flag. If not (S2030-50: No), the process advances to step S2030-55.

In step S2030-51, the supervising CPU 141a performs a confirmed accessory action first effect image control mode determination process. In the confirmed accessory action first performance image control mode determination process, the central CPU 141a refers to the confirmed accessory action first performance image control mode determination table in the general ROM 141c, and determines the final performance pattern designation command based on the type of performance pattern designation command in the reception buffer. , determines the control mode of the performance image of the confirmed role object operation first performance.

FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a confirmed accessory action first effect image control mode determination table. The confirmed accessory action first performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that can be received by the general control unit 141 from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode of the performance image of the confirmed accessory action first performance (“ Each set of data indicating "end" or "continue" is stored. The data of "End" indicates that the display of the effect image of the confirmed role object operation first effect is immediately stopped when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, and the data of "Continue" indicates that the display of the effect image of the confirmed role object operation first effect is immediately stopped. Indicates that when a specified command is received, the display of the performance image of the confirmed accessory action first performance is to be continued.

In the next step S2030-52, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the confirmed accessory action first effect image control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "End" (S2030-52: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to Step S2030-53, and if the control mode is "Continue" (S2030-52: No), the process proceeds to Step S2030-55. move on.

In step S2030-53, the supervising CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the confirmed accessory action first performance. The animation pattern of the confirmed accessory action first performance is executed in the steps of the image control timer update process (FIGS. 107 to 114), which will be described later, when the display timing of the performance image of the determined accessory action first performance in the fluctuation has arrived. Set in S2410-43. When the animation pattern of the confirmed role object operation first effect is cleared, the display of the effect image (the image of the yellow lightning bolt shown in FIG. 31) of the confirmed role object operation first effect is stopped on the image display device 31. .

In the next step S2030-54, the supervising CPU 141a clears the confirmed accessory action first effect image display flag in the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2030-55.

In step S2030-55, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the confirmed accessory action second effect image display flag is set in the confirmed accessory action second effect image display flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b. The confirmed accessory action second performance image displaying flag is a flag indicating that the performance image (the image of the golden lightning bolt shown in FIG. 31) of the confirmed accessory action second performance is being displayed. The confirmed accessory action second performance image displaying flag is set in the image control timer update process (FIGS. 107 to 114), which will be described later, when the display timing of the determined accessory action second performance image in the fluctuation comes. Set in step S2410-47. If the confirmed accessory action second effect image displaying flag is set (S2030-55: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-56, and sets the confirmed accessory action second effect image display flag. If not (S2030-55: No), the process advances to step S2030-60.

In step S2030-56, the supervising CPU 141a performs a confirmed accessory action second performance image control mode determination process. In the confirmed accessory action second performance image control mode determination process, the central CPU 141a refers to the final performance second performance image control mode determination table in the general ROM 141c, and determines the final performance pattern designation command based on the type of performance pattern designation command in the reception buffer. , determines the control mode of the performance image of the confirmed role object operation second performance.

FIG. 106 is a diagram showing a confirmed accessory action second effect image control mode determination table. The confirmed accessory action second performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that can be received by the general control unit 141 from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode of the performance image of the confirmed accessory operation second performance (“ Each set of data indicating "end" or "continue" is stored. The data of "End" indicates that the display of the effect image of the confirmed role object operation second effect is immediately stopped when the corresponding effect pattern specification command is received, and the data of "Continue" indicates that the display of the effect image of the confirmed role object operation second effect is immediately stopped. Indicates that when a designated command is received, the display of the performance image of the confirmed accessory action second performance is to be continued.

In the next step S2030-57, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the confirmed accessory action second effect image control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "End" (S2030-57: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to Step S2030-58, and if the control mode is "Continue" (S2030-57: No), the process proceeds to Step S2030-60. move on.

In step S2030-58, the supervising CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the confirmed accessory action second performance. The animation pattern of the confirmed role object action second effect is executed in the steps of the image control timer update process (FIGS. 107 to 114), which will be described later, when the display timing of the effect image of the confirmed role object action second effect in the fluctuation has arrived. Set in S2410-49. When the animation pattern of the confirmed role object action second performance is cleared, the display of the effect image (the golden lightning bolt image shown in FIG. 31) of the confirmed role object action second performance is stopped on the image display device 31. .

In the next step S2030-59, the supervising CPU 141a clears the confirmed accessory action second performance image displaying flag in the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2030-60.

In step S2030-60, the overall CPU 141a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a command for specifying a variation start effect pattern. If the command in the reception buffer is a variation start production pattern specification command (S2030-60: Yes), the control CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-61, and if it is not a variation start production pattern specification command (S2030-60: No). ), the process proceeds to step S2030-91.

In step S2030-61, the supervising CPU 141a sets the normal variation effect image display flag in the normal variation effect image display flag storage area of the control RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-62, the supervising CPU 141a sets an animation pattern for the normal variation effect. After this, the image display device 31 displays (the background image of the marine stage, savanna stage, cosmo stage, live mode, special training mode, or help mode shown in FIG. 10(b)).

In the next step S2030-63, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the variation start performance pattern designation command and determines whether there is a step-up performance in the series of performances to be executed in the variation. If there is a step-up effect (S2030-63: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-64, and if there is no step-up effect (S2030-63: No), the process proceeds to step S2030-66.

In the next step S2030-64, the general CPU 141a sets a step-up effect image standby flag in the step-up effect image standby flag storage area of the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-65, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the display timing of the effect image of the step-up effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and stores the value in the supervising RAM 141b. Set the step-up effect image standby timer counter.

In the next step S2030-66, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the variation start production pattern designation command and determines whether or not there is a character appearance production in the series of productions executed in the variation. If there is a character appearance effect (S2030-66: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-67, and if there is no character appearance effect (S2030-66: No), the process proceeds to step S2030-71.

In step S2030-67, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the character appearing in the character appearance effect is a premium character. If a premium character appears (S2030-67: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-68, and if a character other than the premium character appears (S2030-67: No), proceeds to step S2030-69.

In step S2030-68, the supervising CPU 141a sets a premium character image flag in the premium character image flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-69, the general CPU 141a sets a character appearance effect image standby flag in the character appearance effect image standby flag storage area of the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-70, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the display timing of the effect image of the character appearance effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and stores the value in the supervising RAM 141b. Set the character appearance effect image standby timer counter.

In the next step S2030-71, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the performance pattern designation command for starting the variation, and determines whether or not there is a roulette performance among the series of performances executed in the variation. If there is a roulette effect (S2030-71: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-72, and if there is no roulette effect (S2030-71: No), the process proceeds to step S2030-74.

In the next step S2030-72, the overall CPU 141a sets a roulette effect image standby flag in the roulette effect image standby flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-73, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the display timing of the performance image of the roulette performance, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and stores the value in the supervising RAM 141b. Set the roulette effect image standby timer counter.

In the next step S2030-74, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the variation start performance pattern designation command and determines whether or not there is an SP development stimulation performance in the series of performances executed in the variation. If there is an SP development promotion effect (S2030-74: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-75, and if there is no SP development promotion effect (S2030-74: No), the process proceeds to step S2030-77.

In the next step S2030-75, the supervising CPU 141a sets an SP development promotion effect image standby flag in the SP development promotion effect image standby flag storage area of the control RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-76, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the display timing of the effect image of the SP development promotion effect, and calculates the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. Set the SP development incitement effect image standby timer counter in the RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-77, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the variation start production pattern designation command and determines whether or not there is an SP development confirmed production in the series of productions to be executed in the variation. If there is an SP development confirmation effect (S2030-77: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-78, and if there is no SP development confirmation effect (S2030-77: No), the process proceeds to step S2030-80.

In the next step S2030-78, the supervising CPU 141a sets an SP development confirmed effect image standby flag in the SP development confirmed effect image standby flag storage area of the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-79, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the display timing of the effect image of the SP development confirmation effect, and calculates the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. Set the SP development confirmed effect image standby timer counter in the RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-80, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the variation start production pattern designation command and determines whether or not there is a cut-in production in the series of productions to be executed in the variation. If there is a cut-in effect (S2030-80: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-81, and if there is no cut-in effect (S2030-80: No), the process proceeds to step S2030-85.

In step S2030-81, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the background of the cut-in effect is rainbow-colored. If the background is rainbow-colored (S2030-81: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-82, and if the background is not rainbow-colored (S2030-81: No), the process proceeds to step S2030-83.

In step S2030-82, the overall CPU 141a sets a premium cut-in image flag in the premium cut-in image flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-83, the general CPU 141a sets a cut-in effect image standby flag in the cut-in effect image standby flag storage area of the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-84, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the display timing of the effect image of the cut-in effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and stores the value in the supervising RAM 141b. Set the cut-in effect image standby timer counter.

In the next step S2030-85, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the variation start production pattern designation command and determines whether or not there is a confirmed role object action first production in the series of productions to be executed in the variation. . If there is a confirmed accessory action first performance (S2030-85: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-86, and if there is no confirmed accessory action first performance (S2030-85: No), step S2030- Proceed to 88.

In the next step S2030-86, the general CPU 141a sets a confirmed accessory action first effect image standby flag in the confirmed accessory object action first effect image standby flag storage area of the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-87, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the display timing of the performance image of the confirmed accessory action first performance, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The value is set in the confirmed accessory action first performance image standby timer counter in the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-88, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the variation start production pattern designation command and determines whether or not there is a confirmed role object action second production in the series of productions to be executed in the variation. . If there is a confirmed accessory action second performance (S2030-88: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-89, and if there is no confirmed accessory action second performance (S2030-88: No), step S2030- Proceed to 91.

In the next step S2030-89, the general CPU 141a sets a confirmed accessory action second effect image standby flag in the confirmed accessory object action second effect image standby flag storage area of the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-90, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the display timing of the effect image of the confirmed role object action second effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The value is set in the confirmed role object operation second performance image standby timer counter of the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-91, the overall CPU 141a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a design-determined performance pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is not a design-confirmed performance pattern designation command (S2030-91: No), the process proceeds to step S2030-92, and if the command is a design-determined performance pattern designation command (S2030-91: Yes). ), the process proceeds to step S2030-98.

In step S2030-92, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a performance pattern designation command for development to SP reach performance. If the command in the reception buffer is a performance pattern designation command for development to SP reach performance (S2030-92: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-93, and determines that the command in the reception buffer is not a performance pattern designation command for development to SP reach performance (S2030-92: Yes). If (S2030-92: No), the process advances to step S2030-95.

In step S2030-93, the supervising CPU 141a sets the SP ready-to-win effect image displaying flag in the SP ready-to-win effect image displaying flag storage area of the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-94, the supervising CPU 141a sets an animation pattern for the SP reach effect, and proceeds to step S2030-101. After this, the image display device 31 displays an SP reach effect effect image (battle animation image shown in FIG. 17).

In step S2030-95, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a command for specifying a reach effect effect pattern. If the command in the reception buffer is a command for specifying an effect pattern for achieving a reach (S2030-95: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2030-96, and if the command in the reception buffer is not a command for specifying an effect pattern for achieving a reach (S2030-95: No). , proceed to step S2030-105.

In step S2030-96, the supervising CPU 141a sets a normal reach effect image displaying flag in the normal reach effect image displaying flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2030-97, the supervising CPU 141a sets an animation pattern for the normal reach effect, and proceeds to step S2030-103. After this, on the image display device 31, a normal reach effect effect image (image of the animation of the adventure shown in FIG. 15) is displayed.

In step S2030-98, the supervising CPU 141a sets an animation pattern for the symbol confirmation effect, and proceeds to step S2030-99. After this, on the image display device 31, a performance image of the symbol confirmation performance (an image in which the left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, right symbol 36R, and fourth symbol 36Z are completely stopped) is displayed.

In step S2030-99, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the SP ready-to-win effect image displaying flag is set in the SP ready-to-win effect image displaying flag storage area of the general RAM 141b. If the SP reach effect image displaying flag is set (2030-99: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-100, and if the SP reach effect image display flag is not set (2030-99: No), the process advances to step S2030-101.

In step S2030-100, the supervising CPU 141a clears the SP reach effect image displaying flag, and proceeds to step S2030-101.

In step S2030-101, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the normal reach effect image displaying flag is set in the normal reach effect image displaying flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b. If the normal reach performance image display flag is set (S2030-101: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-102, and if the normal reach performance image display flag is not set (S2030-101: No). , proceed to step S2030-103.

In step S2030-102, the supervising CPU 141a clears the normal reach effect image displaying flag, and proceeds to step S2030-103.

In step S2030-103, the overall CPU 141a checks whether the normal variation effect image display flag is set in the normal variation image display flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b. If the normal variation effect image display flag is set (S2030-103: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-104, and if the normal variation effect image display flag is not set (S2030-103: No), proceed to step S2030-105.

In step S2030-104, the supervising CPU 141a clears the normal variable effect image display flag, and proceeds to step S2030-105.

In step S2030-105, the overall CPU 141a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is an opening performance pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is an opening performance pattern designation command (S2030-105: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-106, and if it is not an opening performance pattern designation command (S2030-105: No), The process advances to step S2030-107.

In step S2030-106, the supervising CPU 141a sets an animation pattern for the opening performance. From this point on, the image display device 31 displays a performance image of the opening performance.

In step S2030-107, the overall CPU 141a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a round performance pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is a round performance pattern designation command (S2030-107: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-108, and if it is not a round performance pattern designation command (S2030-107: No), The process advances to step S2030-109.

In step S2030-108, the supervising CPU 141a sets an animation pattern for the round performance. From now on, the image display device 31 displays the effect image of the round effect.

In step S2030-109, the overall CPU 141a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is an ending effect pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is an ending effect pattern specification command (S2030-109: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-110, and if it is not an ending effect pattern specification command (S2030-109: No), The process advances to step S2030-111.

In step S2030-110, the supervising CPU 141a sets an animation pattern for the ending effect. After this, the image display device 31 displays an effect image of the ending effect.

In step S2030-111, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is an effect pattern designation command for pending display change. If the command in the reception buffer is a production pattern specification command for pending display change (S2030-111: Yes), the control CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-112, and if the command in the reception buffer is not a production pattern specification command for pending display change (S2030-111). :No), the process advances to step S2030-113.

In step S2030-112, the supervising CPU 141a sets an animation pattern for the pending display change effect. From this point on, the image display device 31 displays a performance image of the pending display change performance.

In step S2030-113, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a production pattern designation command for successful rank up. If the command in the reception buffer is a command for specifying a successful performance pattern for rank up (S2030-113: Yes), the control CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-114, and if it is not a command for specifying a successful performance pattern for rank up (S2030-113). :No), the process advances to step S2030-115.

In step S2030-114, the supervising CPU 141a sets an animation pattern for a successful rank-up effect. After this, the image display device 31 displays a performance image of a successful ranking up performance.

In step S2030-115, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a command for specifying a performance pattern for failure in ranking up. If the command in the reception buffer is a performance pattern designation command for rank-up failure (S2030-115: Yes), the control CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-116, and if it is not a rank-up failure performance pattern designation command (S2030-115). :No), the process advances to step S2030-117.

In step S2030-116, the supervising CPU 141a sets an animation pattern for a rank-up failure effect. From this point on, the image display device 31 displays a performance image of a rank-up failure performance.

In step S2030-117, the overall CPU 141a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a stage change performance pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is a stage change performance pattern designation command (S2030-117: Yes), the control CPU 141a proceeds to step S2030-118, and if the command in the reception buffer is not a stage change performance pattern designation command (S2030-117: No). ), this animation pattern setting process ends.

In step S2030-118, the supervising CPU 141a sets an animation pattern for stage change production. From now on, the image display device 31 displays the effect image of the new stage.

107 to 114 are flowcharts showing details of the image control timer update process (step S2410 in FIG. 77) of the overall control unit 141. In FIG. 107, if there is a timer counter in the general RAM 141b that is referenced in the animation pattern setting process that is not 0, the general CPU 141a updates it by -1.

In the next step S2410-2, the overall CPU 141a checks whether the step-up effect image standby flag is set in the step-up effect image standby flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b. If the step-up effect image standby flag is set (S2410-2: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-3, and if the step-up effect image standby flag is not set (S2410-2: No). , the process advances to step S2410-8.

In step S2410-3, the supervisory CPU 141a determines whether the step-up effect image standby timer counter of the supervisory RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the step-up effect image standby timer counter is 0 (S2410-3: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-4, and if the step-up effect image standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2410-3: Yes). , the process advances to step S2410-8.

In step S2410-4, the supervising CPU 141a clears the step-up effect image standby flag.

In the next step S2410-5, the overall CPU 141a sets a step-up effect image display flag in the step-up effect image display flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2410-6, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the display end timing of the effect image of the step-up effect, and calculates the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. Set the step-up effect image end standby timer counter in the RAM 141b.

In the next step S2410-7, the supervising CPU 141a sets an animation pattern for the step-up effect. After this, the image display device 31 displays a step-up effect image.

In the next step S2410-8, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the character appearance effect image standby flag is set in the character appearance effect image standby flag storage area of the general RAM 141b. If the character appearance effect image standby flag is set (S2410-8: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-9, and if the character appearance effect image standby flag is not set (S2410-8: No). , the process advances to step S2410-14.

In step S2410-9, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the character appearance effect image standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the character appearance effect image standby timer counter is 0 (S2410-9: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-10, and if the character appearance effect image standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2410-9: Yes). , the process advances to step S2410-14.

In step S2410-10, the supervising CPU 141a clears the character appearance effect image standby flag.

In the next step S2410-11, the general CPU 141a sets a character appearance effect image display flag in the character appearance effect image display flag storage area of the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2410-12, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the display end timing of the effect image of the character appearance effect, and calculates the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the character appearance effect image end standby timer counter in the RAM 141b.

In the next step S2410-13, the supervising CPU 141a sets an animation pattern for character appearance. After this, the image display device 31 displays a performance image of the character appearance performance.

In the next step S2410-14, the overall CPU 141a checks whether the roulette effect image standby flag is set in the roulette effect image standby flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b. If the roulette effect image standby flag is set (S2410-14: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-15, and if the roulette effect image standby flag is not set (S2410-14: No), the process proceeds to step S2410-15. Proceed to S2410-20.

In step S2410-15, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the roulette performance image standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the roulette effect image standby timer counter is 0 (S2410-15: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-16, and if the roulette effect image standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2410-15: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2410-16. Proceed to S2410-20.

In step S2410-16, the supervising CPU 141a clears the roulette effect image standby flag.

In the next step S2410-17, the overall CPU 141a sets a roulette effect image display flag in the roulette effect image display flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2410-18, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the display end timing of the performance image of the roulette performance, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and calculates the value obtained by storing the value in the supervising RAM 141b. Set the roulette effect image end wait timer counter.

In the next step S2410-19, the supervising CPU 141a sets an animation pattern for the roulette performance. After this, the image display device 31 displays a performance image of the roulette performance.

In the next step S2410-20, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the SP development promotion effect image standby flag is set in the SP development promotion effect image standby flag storage area of the control RAM 141b. If the SP development promotion effect image standby flag is set (S2410-20: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-21, and if the SP development promotion effect image standby flag is not set (S2410-20: No), the process advances to step S2410-26.

In step S2410-21, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the SP development promotion effect image standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the SP development promotion effect image standby timer counter is 0 (S2410-21: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-22, and if the SP development promotion effect image standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2410-21: Yes), the process advances to step S2410-26.

In step S2410-22, the supervising CPU 141a clears the SP development promotion effect image standby flag.

In the next step S2410-23, the supervisory CPU 141a sets the SP development promotion image displaying flag in the SP development promotion image display flag storage area of the administration RAM 141b.

In the next step S2410-24, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the display end timing of the performance image of the SP development promotion performance, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. Set the SP development inciting effect image end standby timer counter in the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2410-25, the supervising CPU 141a sets an animation pattern for the SP development promotion effect. After this, the image display device 31 displays a performance image of the SP development promotion performance.

In the next step S2410-26, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the SP development confirmed effect image standby flag is set in the SP development confirmed effect image standby flag storage area of the general RAM 141b. If the SP development confirmed effect image standby flag is set (S2410-26: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-27, and if the SP development confirmed effect image standby flag is not set (S2410-26: No), the process advances to step S2410-32.

In step S2410-27, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the SP development confirmed effect image standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the SP development confirmed effect image standby timer counter is 0 (S2410-27: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-28, and if the SP development confirmed effect image standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2410-27: Yes), the process advances to step S2410-32.

In step S2410-28, the supervising CPU 141a clears the SP development confirmed effect image standby flag.

In the next step S2410-29, the supervising CPU 141a sets the SP development confirmed effect image display flag in the SP development confirmed effect image display flag storage area of the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2410-30, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the display end timing of the effect image of the SP development confirmation effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. Set the SP development confirmed effect image end standby timer counter in the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2410-31, the supervising CPU 141a sets an animation pattern for the SP development confirmation effect. From now on, the image display device 31 displays an effect image of the SP development confirmed effect.

In the next step S2410-32, the overall CPU 141a checks whether the cut-in effect image standby flag is set in the cut-in effect image standby flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b. If the cut-in effect image standby flag is set (S2410-32: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-33, and if the cut-in effect image standby flag is not set (S2410-32: No). , proceed to step S2410-38.

In step S2410-33, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the cut-in effect image standby timer counter of the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the cut-in effect image standby timer counter is 0 (S2410-33: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-34, and if the cut-in effect image standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2410-33: Yes). , proceed to step S2410-38.

In step S2410-34, the supervising CPU 141a clears the cut-in effect image standby flag.

In the next step S2410-35, the overall CPU 141a sets a cut-in effect image display flag in the cut-in effect image display flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2410-36, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the display end timing of the effect image of the cut-in effect, and calculates the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the cut-in effect image end standby timer counter in the RAM 141b.

In the next step S2410-37, the supervising CPU 141a sets an animation pattern for the cut-in effect. After this, the image display device 31 displays a cut-in effect image.

In the next step S2410-38, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the confirmed accessory action first effect image standby flag is set in the confirmed accessory object action first effect image standby flag storage area of the integrated RAM 141b. If the confirmed accessory action first effect image standby flag is set (S2410-38: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-39, and determines that the confirmed accessory action first effect image standby flag is not set. If (S2410-38: No), the process advances to step S2410-44.

In step S2410-39, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the confirmed accessory action first performance image standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the confirmed accessory object operation first effect image standby timer counter is 0 (S2410-39: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-40, and determines that the confirmed accessory object operation first effect image standby timer counter is greater than 0. If so (S2410-39: Yes), the process advances to step S2410-44.

In step S2410-40, the supervising CPU 141a clears the confirmed accessory action first effect image standby flag.

In the next step S2410-41, the supervising CPU 141a sets the confirmed accessory action first effect image display flag in the confirmed accessory object action first effect image display flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2410-42, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the display end timing of the performance image of the confirmed accessory action first performance, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The obtained value is set in the confirmed accessory action first performance image end standby timer counter of the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2410-43, the supervising CPU 141a sets an animation pattern for the confirmed accessory action first performance. After this, on the image display device 31, a performance image of the confirmed accessory action first performance is displayed.

In the next step S2410-44, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the confirmed accessory action second effect image standby flag is set in the confirmed accessory object action second effect image standby flag storage area of the integrated RAM 141b. If the confirmed accessory action second performance image standby flag is set (S2410-44: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-45, and determines that the confirmed accessory action second performance image standby flag is not set. If (S2410-44: No), the process advances to step S2410-50.

In step S2410-45, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the confirmed accessory action second performance image standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the confirmed accessory action second performance image standby timer counter is 0 (S2410-45: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-46, and determines that the determined accessory action second performance image standby timer counter is greater than 0. If so (S2410-45: Yes), the process advances to step S2410-50.

In step S2410-46, the supervising CPU 141a clears the confirmed accessory action second effect image standby flag.

In the next step S2410-47, the supervising CPU 141a sets the confirmed accessory action second effect image display flag in the confirmed accessory action second effect image display flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2410-48, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the display end timing of the performance image of the confirmed accessory action second performance, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The obtained value is set in the confirmed accessory action second performance image end standby timer counter of the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2410-49, the supervising CPU 141a sets an animation pattern for the confirmed accessory action second performance. After this, on the image display device 31, a performance image of the confirmed accessory action second performance is displayed.

In step S2410-50, the overall CPU 141a checks whether the step-up effect image display flag is set in the step-up effect image display flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b. If the step-up effect image displaying flag is set (S2410-50: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-51, and if the step-up effect image display flag is not set (S2410-50: No), the process advances to step S2410-54.

In step S2410-51, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the step-up effect image end standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the step-up effect image end standby timer counter is 0 (S2410-51: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-52, and if the step-up effect image end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2410-51: Yes), proceed to step S2410-54.

In step S2410-52, the supervising CPU 141a clears the step-up effect image displaying flag.

In step S2410-53, the supervising CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the step-up effect. When the animation pattern of the step-up effect is cleared, the display of the effect image of the step-up effect is stopped on the image display device 31.

In step S2410-54, the overall CPU 141a checks whether the character appearance effect image display flag is set in the character appearance effect image display flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b. If the character appearance effect image displaying flag is set (S2410-54: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-55, and if the character appearance effect image display flag is not set (S2410-54: No), the process advances to step S2410-60.

In step S2410-55, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the character appearance performance image end standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the character appearance effect image end standby timer counter is 0 (S2410-55: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-56, and if the character appearance effect image end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2410-55: Yes), proceed to step S2410-60.

In step S2410-56, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the premium character image flag is set in the premium character image flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the premium character image flag is set (S2410-56: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-57; if the premium character image flag is not set (S2410-56: No), the process proceeds to step S2410- Proceed to step 58.

In step S2410-57, the supervising CPU 141a clears the premium character image flag.

In step S2410-58, the supervising CPU 141a clears the character appearance effect image displaying flag.

In step S2410-59, the supervising CPU 141a clears the animation pattern for character appearance. When the animation pattern of the character appearance effect is cleared, the display of the effect image of the character appearance effect is stopped on the image display device 31.

In step S2410-60, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the roulette effect image displaying flag is set in the roulette effect image displaying flag storage area of the general RAM 141b. If the roulette effect image display flag is set (S2410-60: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-61, and if the roulette effect image display flag is not set (S2410-60: No). , proceed to step S2410-64.

In step S2410-61, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the roulette performance image end standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the roulette effect image end standby timer counter is 0 (S2410-61: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-62, and if the roulette effect image end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2410-61: Yes). , proceed to step S2410-64.

In step S2410-62, the supervising CPU 141a clears the roulette effect image displaying flag.

In step S2410-63, the supervising CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the roulette effect. When the animation pattern of the roulette effect is cleared, the display of the effect image of the roulette effect is stopped on the image display device 31.

In step S2410-64, the supervisory CPU 141a checks whether the SP development promotion image displaying flag is set in the SP development promotion image displaying flag storage area of the administration RAM 141b. If the SP development promotion image displaying flag is set (S2410-64: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-65, and if the SP development promotion image display flag is not set (S2410- 64: No), the process advances to step S2410-68.

In step S2410-65, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the SP development promotion effect image end standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the SP development promotion image end wait timer counter is 0 (S2410-65: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-66, and if the SP development promotion image end wait timer counter is greater than 0 (S2410- 65: Yes), the process advances to step S2410-68.

In step S2410-66, the supervising CPU 141a clears the SP development promotion effect image displaying flag.

In step S2410-67, the supervising CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the SP development promotion effect. When the animation pattern of the SP development promotion performance is cleared, the display of the performance image of the SP development promotion performance is stopped on the image display device 31.

In step S2410-68, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the SP development confirmed effect image display flag is set in the SP development confirmed effect image display flag storage area of the general RAM 141b. If the SP development confirmed performance image display flag is set (S2410-68: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-69, and if the SP development confirmed performance image display flag is not set (S2410-68). 68: No), the process advances to step S2410-72.

In step S2410-69, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the SP development confirmed effect image end standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the SP development confirmed effect image end standby timer counter is 0 (S2410-69: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-70, and if the SP development confirmed effect image end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2410- 69: Yes), the process advances to step S2410-72.

In step S2410-70, the supervising CPU 141a clears the SP development confirmed effect image displaying flag.

In step S2410-71, the supervising CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the SP development confirmation effect. When the animation pattern of the SP development confirmed effect is cleared, the display of the effect image of the SP development confirmed effect is stopped on the image display device 31.

In step S2410-72, the overall CPU 141a checks whether the cut-in effect image display flag is set in the cut-in effect image display flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b. If the cut-in effect image displaying flag is set (S2410-72: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-73, and if the cut-in effect image display flag is not set (S2410-72: No), the process advances to step S2410-78.

In step S2410-73, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the cut-in effect image end standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the cut-in effect image end standby timer counter is 0 (S2410-73: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-74, and if the cut-in effect image end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2410-73: Yes), proceed to step S2410-78.

In step S2410-74, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the premium cut-in image flag is set in the premium cut-in image flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the premium cut-in image flag is set (S2410-74: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-75, and if the premium cut-in image flag is not set (S2410-74: No), the process proceeds to step S2410-75. Proceed to S2410-76.

In step S2410-75, the supervising CPU 141a clears the premium cut-in image flag.

In step S2410-76, the supervising CPU 141a clears the cut-in effect image displaying flag.

In step S2410-77, the supervising CPU 141a clears the cut-in animation pattern. When the animation pattern of the cut-in effect is cleared, the display of the effect image of the cut-in effect is stopped on the image display device 31.

In step S2410-78, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the confirmed accessory action first performance image display flag is set in the confirmed accessory action first performance image display flag storage area of the management RAM 141b. If the confirmed accessory action first effect image display flag is set (S2410-78: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-79, and sets the confirmed accessory action first effect image display flag. If not (S2410-78: No), the process advances to step S2410-82.

In step S2410-79, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the confirmed accessory action first performance image end standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the confirmed accessory action first performance image end standby timer counter is 0 (S2410-79: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-80, and sets the determined accessory action first performance image end wait timer counter to 0. If it is larger (S2410-79: Yes), the process advances to step S2410-82.

In step S2410-80, the supervising CPU 141a clears the confirmed accessory action first effect image displaying flag.

In step S2410-81, the supervising CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the confirmed accessory action first performance. When the animation pattern of the confirmed accessory action first performance is cleared, the display of the performance image of the determined accessory action first performance is stopped on the image display device 31.

In step S2410-82, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the confirmed accessory action second effect image display flag is set in the confirmed accessory action second effect image display flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b. If the confirmed accessory action second effect image displaying flag is set (S2410-82: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-83, and sets the confirmed accessory action second effect image display flag. If not (S2410-82: No), the current image control timer update process ends.

In step S2410-83, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the confirmed accessory action second performance image end standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the confirmed accessory action second performance image end standby timer counter is 0 (S2410-83: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2410-84, and sets the determined accessory action second performance image end wait timer counter to 0. If it is larger (S2410-83: Yes), the current image control timer update process ends.

In step S2410-84, the supervising CPU 141a clears the confirmed accessory action second effect image displaying flag.

In step S2410-85, the supervising CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the confirmed accessory action second performance. When the animation pattern of the confirmed accessory action second performance is cleared, the display of the performance image of the determined accessory action second performance is stopped on the image display device 31.

115 to 126 are flowcharts showing details of the sound pattern setting process (step S2040 in FIG. 74) of the overall control unit 141. In FIG. 115, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the normal variation production sound effect output flag is set in the normal variation production sound effect output flag storage area of the control RAM 141b (S2040-1). The normal variation production sound effect output flag indicates the production sound effects of the normal variation production (song (1), song (2), song (3), song (4), song (5) shown in FIG. 10(b)). ), or the production sound effect of song (6)) is being output. The normal variation sound effect outputting flag is set in step S2040-61, which will be described later, when a variation start production pattern designation command is received from the production control unit 120m. If the normal variation production sound effect output flag is set (S2040-1: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-2, and if the normal variation production sound effect output flag is not set (S2040- 1: No), the process advances to step S2040-6.

In step S2040-2, the overall CPU 141a performs normal variation production sound effect control mode determination processing. In the normal variation production sound effect control mode determination process, the general CPU 141a refers to the normal variation production sound effect control mode determination table in the control ROM 141c, and based on the type of production pattern designation command in the reception buffer, the control CPU 141a determines the production of the normal variation production. Determine the control mode for sound effects.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a normal variation production sound effect control mode determination table. The normal fluctuation performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that can be received by the general control unit 141 from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode of the production sound effect of the normal fluctuation performance (“end” or “continue”). Each set of data is stored. "End" data indicates that the output of the production sound effect of the normal variable production will be immediately stopped when the corresponding production pattern specification command is received, and "Continue" data indicates that the production pattern specification command will be stopped immediately. When received, it indicates that the output of the production sound effect of the normal variation production is to be continued.

In the next step S2040-3, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the normal variation sound effect control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "End" (S2040-3: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to Step S2040-4, and if the control mode is "Continue" (S2040-3: No), the process proceeds to Step S2040-6. move on.

In step S2040-4, the supervising CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the normal variation effect. The sound pattern for the normal variation performance is set in step S2040-62, which will be described later, when a variation start performance pattern designation command is received from the performance control unit 120m. When the sound pattern of the normal variation effect is cleared, the sound effects of the normal variation effect (song (1), song (2), song (3), shown in FIG. 10(b), The output of the music (4), the music (5), or the production sound effects of the music (6)) is stopped.

In the next step S2040-5, the general CPU 141a clears the normal variable production sound effect output flag in the general RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2040-6.

In step S2040-6, the overall CPU 141a checks whether the step-up effect sound effect outputting flag is set in the step-up effect sound effect outputting flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b (S2040-6). The step-up production sound effect output flag is a flag indicating that the production sound effect of the step-up production (the production sound effect shown in FIG. 19) is being output. The step-up sound effect output flag is set in step S2420-5 of the audio control timer update process (FIGS. 140 to 147), which will be described later, when the timing to output the production sound effect of the step-up production in the variation has arrived. be done. If the step-up production sound effect outputting flag is set (S2040-6: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-7, and if the step-up production sound effect output flag is not set (S2040- 6: No), the process advances to step S2040-11.

In step S2040-7, the central CPU 141a performs step-up production sound effect control mode determination processing. In the step-up production sound effect control mode determination process, the supervising CPU 141a refers to the step-up production sound effect control mode determination table in the supervising ROM 141c, and based on the type of production pattern designation command in the reception buffer, performs the step-up production. Determine the control mode for sound effects.

FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a step-up production sound effect control mode determination table. The step-up performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that the general control unit 141 can receive from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode of the performance sound effect of the step-up performance (“end” or “continue”). Each set of data is stored. "End" data indicates that the output of the step-up production sound effect will be immediately stopped when the corresponding production pattern specification command is received, and "Continue" data indicates that the output of the production sound effect of the step-up production will be stopped immediately when the corresponding production pattern specification command is received. When received, it indicates that the output of the step-up production sound effect is to be continued.

In the next step S2040-8, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the step-up production sound effect control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "End" (S2040-8: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to Step S2040-9, and if the control mode is "Continue" (S2040-8: No), the process proceeds to Step S2040-11. move on.

In step S2040-9, the supervising CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the step-up effect. The sound pattern for the step-up effect is set in step S2420-7 of the audio control timer update process (FIGS. 140 to 147), which will be described later, when the output timing of the effect sound for the step-up effect in the variation has arrived. Ru. When the sound pattern of the step-up effect is cleared, the output of the effect sound effect of the step-up effect (the effect sound effect shown in FIG. 19) of the step-up effect is stopped in the audio output device 32.

In the next step S2040-10, the supervising CPU 141a clears the step-up production sound effect output flag in the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2040-11.

In step S2040-11, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the normal reach effect sound effect output flag is set in the normal reach effect sound effect output flag storage area of the general RAM 141b. The normal reach performance sound effect output flag is a flag indicating that the normal reach performance sound effect (song (7) shown in FIG. 15) is being output. The normal reach sound effect outputting flag is set in step S2040-96, which will be described later, when a reach effect effect pattern designation command is received from the effect control unit 120m. If the normal reach performance sound effect outputting flag is set (S2040-11: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-12, and if the normal reach performance sound effect output flag is not set (S2040-11: No), the process advances to step S2040-16.

In step S2040-12, the supervising CPU 141a performs normal reach performance sound effect control mode determination processing. In the normal reach production sound effect control mode determination process, the supervising CPU 141a refers to the normal reach production sound effect control mode determination table in the supervising ROM 141c, and determines the production sound effect of the normal reach production based on the type of production pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Determine the control mode.

FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a normal reach effect sound effect control mode determination table. The normal reach performance control mode determination table shows the types of performance pattern designation commands that can be received by the general control unit 141 from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode (“end” or “continue”) of the production sound effect of the normal reach performance. Each set of data is stored. "End" data indicates that the output of the normal reach performance sound effect will be immediately stopped when the corresponding production pattern specification command is received, and "Continue" data indicates that the production pattern specification command is received. Indicates that the production sound effect of the normal reach production will continue to be output when the normal reach production is performed.

In the next step S2040-13, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the normal reach production sound effect control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "End" (S2040-13: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to Step S2040-14, and if the control mode is "Continue" (S2040-13: No), the process proceeds to Step S2040-16. move on.

In step S2040-14, the supervising CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the normal reach effect. The sound pattern for the normal reach effect is set in step S2040-95, which will be described later, when a reach effect effect pattern designation command is received from the effect control unit 120m. When the sound pattern of the normal reach performance is cleared, the output of the production sound effect (song (7) shown in FIG. 15) of the normal reach performance is stopped in the audio output device 32.

In the next step S2040-15, the supervising CPU 141a clears the normal reach performance sound effect output flag in the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2040-16.

In step S2040-16, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the character appearance effect sound effect outputting flag is set in the character appearance effect sound effect outputting flag storage area of the general RAM 141b (S2040-16). The character appearance effect sound effect outputting flag is a flag indicating that the effect sound effect of the character appearance effect (the effect sound effect shown in FIG. 23) is being output. The character appearance sound effect outputting flag is set in step S2420-11 of the audio control timer update process (FIGS. 140 to 147), which will be described later, when the output timing of the production sound effect of the character appearance production in the variation has arrived. be done. If the character appearance effect sound effect outputting flag is set (S2040-16: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-17, and if the character appearance effect sound effect outputting flag is not set (S2040- 16: No), the process advances to step S2040-23.

In step S2040-17, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the premium character sound effect flag is set in the premium character sound effect flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. The premium character sound effect flag is set in step S2040-68, which will be described later, when the character appearing in the character appearance effect is a premium character. If the premium character sound effect flag is set (S2040-17: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-18, and if the premium character sound effect flag is not set (S2040-17: No), the process proceeds to step S2040-18. Proceed to S2040-19.

In step S2040-18, the central CPU 141a performs premium character appearance production sound effect control mode determination processing. In the premium character appearance production sound effect control mode determination process, the central CPU 141a refers to the premium character appearance production sound effect control mode determination table in the central ROM 141c, and determines the premium character appearance based on the type of production pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Determine the control mode of the effect sound of the character appearance effect.

FIG. 130 is a diagram showing a premium character appearance production sound effect control mode determination table. The premium character appearance performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that can be received by the general control unit 141 from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode of the performance sound effect of the character appearance performance in which the premium character appears ("End"). ” or “continuation”) are stored. "End" data indicates that the output of the sound effect of the premium character's character appearance production will be immediately stopped when the corresponding production pattern specification command is received, and "Continue" data indicates that the output of the production sound effect of the character appearance production of the premium character will be immediately stopped. Indicates that when a specified command is received, the output of the production sound effect of the character appearance production of the premium character is to be continued.

In step S2040-19, the supervising CPU 141a performs character appearance production sound effect control mode determination processing. In the character appearance production sound effect control mode determination process, the central CPU 141a refers to the premium character appearance production sound effect control mode determination table in the central ROM 141c, and selects characters A and B based on the type of production pattern designation command in the reception buffer. , or determines the control mode of the production sound effect of the character appearance production of C.

FIG. 131 is a diagram showing a character appearance production sound effect control mode determination table. The character appearance production control mode determination table includes the types of production pattern designation commands that the general control unit 141 can receive from the production control unit 120m, and the control mode of production sound effects for the character appearance production (“end” or “continue”). Each set of data is stored. The data of "End" indicates that the output of the sound effect of the character appearance of character A, B, or C will be immediately stopped when the corresponding production pattern designation command is received, and the data of "Continue" , indicates that the output of the effect sound of the character appearance effect of character A, B, or C is continued when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received.

In step S2040-20, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the premium character appearance production control mode determination process or the character appearance production sound effect control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". do. If the control mode is "End" (S2040-20: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to Step S2040-21, and if the control mode is "Continue" (S2040-20: No), the process proceeds to Step S2040-22. move on.

In step S2040-21, the supervising CPU 141a clears the sound pattern for the character appearance effect. The sound pattern of the character appearance effect is set in step S2420-13 of the audio control timer update process (FIGS. 140 to 147), which will be described later, when the output timing of the effect sound of the character appearance effect in the variation has arrived. Ru. When the sound pattern of the character appearance effect is cleared, the audio output device 32 stops outputting the effect sound effect of the character appearance effect (the effect sound effect shown in FIG. 23).

In the next step S2040-22, the supervising CPU 141a clears the character appearance production sound effect output flag in the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2040-23.

In step S2040-23, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the roulette effect sound effect outputting flag is set in the roulette effect sound effect outputting flag storage area of the general RAM 141b (S2040-23). The roulette effect sound effect output flag is a flag indicating that the roulette effect sound effect (the effect sound effect shown in FIG. 22) is being output. The roulette sound effect outputting flag is set in step S2420-17 of the audio control timer update process (FIGS. 140 to 147), which will be described later, when the output timing of the production sound effect of the roulette production in the variation has arrived. . If the roulette effect sound effect output flag is set (S2040-23: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-24, and if the roulette effect sound effect output flag is not set (S2040-23: No), the process advances to step S2040-28.

In step S2040-24, the central CPU 141a performs roulette effect sound effect control mode determination processing. In the roulette performance sound effect control mode determination process, the central CPU 141a refers to the roulette performance sound effect control mode determination table in the central ROM 141c, and determines the performance sound effect of the roulette performance based on the type of performance pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Determine the control mode.

FIG. 132 is a diagram showing a roulette performance sound effect control mode determination table. The roulette performance control mode determination table shows the types of performance pattern designation commands that can be received by the general control unit 141 from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode (“end” or “continue”) of the performance sound effects of the roulette performance. Each set of data is stored. "End" data indicates that the output of the sound effect of the roulette performance will be immediately stopped when the corresponding performance pattern specification command is received, and "Continue" data indicates that the output of the performance sound effect of the roulette performance will be immediately stopped when the corresponding performance pattern specification command is received. Indicates that the output of the effect sound of the roulette effect is continued when the roulette effect occurs.

In the next step S2040-25, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the roulette production sound effect control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "End" (S2040-25: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to Step S2040-26, and if the control mode is "Continue" (S2040-25: No), the process proceeds to Step S2040-28. move on.

In step S2040-26, the supervising CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the roulette effect. The sound pattern of the roulette effect is set in step S2420-19 of the audio control timer update process (FIGS. 140 to 147), which will be described later, when the output timing of the effect sound of the roulette effect in the variation has arrived. When the sound pattern of the roulette effect is cleared, the output of the effect sound effect of the roulette effect (the effect sound effect shown in FIG. 22) of the roulette effect is stopped in the audio output device 32.

In the next step S2040-27, the supervising CPU 141a clears the roulette effect sound effect output flag in the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2040-28.

In step S2040-28, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the SP development promotion sound effect outputting flag is set in the SP development promotion sound effect output flag storage area of the control RAM 141b. The SP development promotion sound effect output flag is a flag indicating that the production sound effect of the SP development promotion production (the production sound effect shown in FIG. 25) is being output. The SP development inciting sound effect output flag is set in step S2420-23 of the audio control timer update process (FIGS. 140 to 147), which will be described later, when the output timing of the production sound effect of the SP development inciting production in the variation has arrived. , is set. If the SP development promotion sound effect output flag is set (S2040-28: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-29, and if the SP development promotion production sound effect output flag is not set ( S2040-28: No), proceed to step S2040-33.

In step S2040-29, the supervising CPU 141a performs SP development promotion production sound effect control mode determination processing. In the SP development promotion production sound effect control mode determination process, the supervising CPU 141a refers to the SP development promotion production sound effect control mode determination table in the control ROM 141c, and determines the SP development promotion production based on the type of production pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Determine the control mode of the production sound effects of the production.

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing a SP development promotion production sound effect control mode determination table. The SP development stimulation performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that the general control unit 141 can receive from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode of the performance sound effect of the SP development stimulation performance (“end” or “continue”). ”) are stored. The data of "End" indicates that the output of the production sound effect of the SP development incitement production is immediately stopped when the corresponding production pattern specification command is received, and the data of "Continue" indicates that the production pattern specification command of the corresponding production pattern is immediately stopped. If received, it indicates that the output of the production sound effect of the SP development promotion production is to be continued.

In the next step S2040-30, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the SP development promotion sound effect control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "End" (S2040-30: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to Step S2040-31, and if the control mode is "Continue" (S2040-30: No), the process proceeds to Step S2040-33. move on.

In step S2040-31, the supervising CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the SP development promotion effect. The sound pattern of the SP development stimulation performance is determined in step S2420-25 of the audio control timer update process (FIGS. 140 to 147), which will be described later, when the output timing of the performance sound effect of the SP development stimulation performance in the variation has arrived. Set. When the sound pattern of the SP development promotion effect is cleared, the output of the production sound effect of the SP development promotion effect (the effect sound effect shown in FIG. 25) of the SP development promotion effect is stopped in the audio output device 32.

In the next step S2040-32, the supervising CPU 141a clears the SP development promotion effect sound effect output flag in the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2040-33.

In step S2040-33, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the SP development confirmed performance sound effect output flag is set in the SP development confirmed performance sound effect output flag storage area of the general RAM 141b. The SP development confirmed production sound effect output flag is a flag indicating that the production sound effect of the SP development confirmed production (the production sound effect shown in FIG. 27) is being output. The SP development confirmed sound effect output flag is set in step S2420-29 of the audio control timer update process (FIGS. 140 to 147), which will be described later, when the output timing of the production sound effect of the SP development confirmed production in the relevant variation has arrived. , is set. If the SP development confirmed performance sound effect outputting flag is set (S2040-33: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-34, and if the SP development confirmed production sound effect output flag is not set ( S2040-33: No), proceed to step S2040-38.

In step S2040-34, the supervising CPU 141a performs SP development confirmed production sound effect control mode determination processing. In the SP development confirmed production sound effect control mode determination process, the central CPU 141a refers to the SP development confirmed production sound effect control mode determination table in the general ROM 141c, and determines the SP development finalization based on the type of production pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Determine the control mode of the production sound effects of the production.

FIG. 134 is a diagram showing the SP development confirmed production sound effect control mode determination table. The SP development confirmed performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that the general control unit 141 can receive from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode of the performance sound effect of the SP development confirmed performance (“end” or “continue”). ”) are stored. "End" data indicates that the output of the production sound effect of the SP development confirmed production will be immediately stopped when the corresponding production pattern specification command is received, and "Continue" data indicates that the production pattern specification command , it indicates that the production sound effect of the SP development confirmed production will continue to be output.

In the next step S2040-35, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the SP development confirmed performance sound effect control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "End" (S2040-35: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to Step S2040-36, and if the control mode is "Continue" (S2040-35: No), the process proceeds to Step S2040-38. move on.

In step S2040-36, the supervising CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the SP development confirmation effect. The sound pattern of the SP development confirmed performance is determined in step S2420-31 of the audio control timer update process (FIGS. 140 to 147), which will be described later, when the output timing of the production sound effect of the SP development confirmed performance in the change has arrived. Set. When the sound pattern of the SP development confirmed effect is cleared, the output of the effect sound effect of the SP development confirmed effect (the effect sound effect shown in FIG. 27) of the SP development confirmed effect is stopped in the audio output device 32.

In the next step S2040-37, the supervising CPU 141a clears the SP development confirmed performance sound effect output flag in the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2040-38.

In step S2040-38, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the SP ready-to-win production sound effect flag is set in the SP ready-to-win production sound effect output flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. The SP reach performance sound effect output flag is a flag indicating that the SP reach performance sound effect (song (8) shown in FIG. 17) is being output. The SP ready-to-reach sound effect outputting flag is set in step S2040-93, which will be described later, when a production pattern designation command for development to SP ready-to-win production is received from the production control unit 120m. If the SP reach effect sound effect outputting flag is set (S2040-38: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-39, and if the SP reach effect sound effect output flag is not set (S2040- 38: No), the process advances to step S2040-43.

In step S2040-39, the supervising CPU 141a performs SP reach effect sound effect control mode determination processing. In the SP reach effect sound effect control mode determination process, the supervising CPU 141a refers to the SP reach effect sound effect control mode determination table in the overall ROM 141c, and determines the SP reach effect effect based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Determine the control mode for sound effects.

FIG. 135 is a diagram showing a SP reach effect sound effect control mode determination table. The SP reach performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that can be received by the general control unit 141 from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode of the production sound effect of the SP reach performance (“end” or “continue”). Each set of data is stored. "End" data indicates that the output of the production sound effect of the SP reach performance will be immediately stopped when the corresponding production pattern specification command is received, and "Continue" data indicates that the production pattern specification command will be stopped immediately. When received, it indicates that the output of the production sound effect of the SP reach production is to be continued.

In the next step S2040-40, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the SP reach effect sound effect control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "End" (S2040-40: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to Step S2040-41, and if the control mode is "Continue" (S2040-40: No), the process proceeds to Step S2040-43. move on.

In step S2040-41, the supervising CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the SP reach effect. The sound pattern of the SP ready-to-win performance is set in step S2040-100, which will be described later, when a production pattern designation command for development to the SP ready-to-win performance is received from the performance control unit 120m. When the sound pattern of the SP reach effect is cleared, the output of the effect sound effect of the SP reach effect (the effect sound effect of the battle shown in FIG. 17) of the SP reach effect is stopped in the audio output device 32.

In the next step S2040-42, the supervising CPU 141a clears the SP reach effect sound effect output flag in the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2040-43.

In step S2040-43, the overall CPU 141a checks whether the cut-in effect sound effect output flag is set in the cut-in effect sound effect output flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b. The cut-in performance sound effect output flag is a flag indicating that the cut-in performance sound effect (the performance sound effect shown in FIG. 28) is being output. The cut-in sound effect output flag is set in step S2420-35 of the audio control timer update process (FIGS. 140 to 147), which will be described later, when the output timing of the production sound effect of the cut-in production in the relevant variation has arrived. be done. If the cut-in production sound effect outputting flag is set (S2040-43: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-44, and if the cut-in production sound effect output flag is not set (S2040- 43: No), the process advances to step S2040-50.

In step S2040-44, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the premium cut-in sound effect flag is set in the premium cut-in sound effect flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. The premium cut-in sound effect flag is set in step S2040-82, which will be described later, when the background of the cut-in effect is a rainbow background. If the premium cut-in sound effect flag is set (S2040-44: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-45, and if the premium cut-in sound effect flag is not set (S2040-44: No). , proceed to step S2040-46.

In step S2040-45, the central CPU 141a performs premium cut-in production sound effect control mode determination processing. In the premium cut-in production sound effect control mode determination process, the supervising CPU 141a refers to the premium cut-in production sound effect control mode determination table in the supervising ROM 141c, and selects a rainbow-colored background based on the type of production pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Determines the control mode for the production sound effects of the cut-in production.

FIG. 136 is a diagram showing a premium cut-in production sound effect control mode determination table. The premium cut-in production control mode determination table includes the types of production pattern designation commands that can be received by the general control unit 141 from the production control unit 120m, and the production sound effect control mode (“end”) of the rainbow-colored background cut-in production. or "continuation") are stored. The "end" data indicates that the output of the production sound effect for the rainbow-colored background cut-in production will be immediately stopped when the corresponding production pattern specification command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the output of the production sound effect for the rainbow-colored background cut-in production will be immediately stopped. Indicates that when a pattern designation command is received, output of the production sound effect of the rainbow-colored background cut-in production is continued.

In step S2040-46, the overall CPU 141a performs cut-in production sound effect control mode determination processing. In the cut-in production sound effect control mode determination process, the supervising CPU 141a refers to the premium cut-in production sound effect control mode determination table in the supervising ROM 141c, and selects green, red, or green based on the type of production pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Alternatively, the control mode of the production sound effect of the cut-in production of the zebra pattern background is determined.

FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a cut-in production sound effect control mode determination table. The cut-in performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that can be received by the general control unit 141 from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode of the production sound effect of the cut-in performance (“end” or “continue”). Each set of data is stored. The "End" data indicates that the output of the production sound effect for the green, red, or zebra pattern background cut-in production will be immediately stopped when the corresponding production pattern specification command is received, and the "Continue" data The data indicates that the production sound effect of the cut-in production with a green, red, or zebra pattern background will continue to be output when the corresponding production pattern designation command is received.

In step S2040-47, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the premium cut-in production control mode determination process or the cut-in production sound effect control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". do. If the control mode is "End" (S2040-47: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to Step S2040-48, and if the control mode is "Continue" (S2040-47: No), the process proceeds to Step S2040-49. move on.

In step S2040-48, the supervising CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the cut-in effect. The sound pattern of the cut-in effect is set in step S2420-37 of the audio control timer update process (FIGS. 140 to 147), which will be described later, when the output timing of the effect sound of the cut-in effect in the variation has arrived. Ru. When the sound pattern of the cut-in effect is cleared, the audio output device 32 stops outputting the effect sound of the cut-in effect (the effect sound effect shown in FIG. 28).

In the next step S2040-49, the supervising CPU 141a clears the cut-in production sound effect outputting flag in the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2040-50.

In step S2040-50, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the confirmed accessory action first performance sound effect outputting flag is set in the determined accessory action first performance sound effect flag storage area of the supervisory RAM 141b. . The confirmed accessory action first performance sound effect output flag is a flag indicating that the performance sound effect (the performance sound effect shown in FIG. 31) of the confirmed accessory action first performance is being output. The confirmed accessory action first production sound effect output flag is set when the output timing of the production sound effect of the confirmed accessory action first production in the fluctuation comes, and the sound control timer update process (FIGS. 140 to 147), which will be described later, is set. ) is set in step S2420-41. If the confirmed accessory action first production sound effect flag is set (S2040-50: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-51, and sets the confirmed accessory action first production sound effect output flag. If not set (S2040-50: No), the process advances to step S2040-55.

In step S2040-51, the supervising CPU 141a performs a confirmed accessory actuation first performance sound effect control mode determination process. In the confirmed accessory action first performance sound effect control mode determination process, the central CPU 141a refers to the confirmed accessory action first performance sound effect control mode determination table in the central ROM 141c, and determines the type of performance pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Based on this, the control mode of the production sound effect of the confirmed role object operation first production is determined.

FIG. 138 is a diagram showing a determined accessory object operation first performance sound effect control mode determination table. The confirmed accessory action first performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that can be received by the general control unit 141 from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode of the performance sound effect of the confirmed accessory action first performance ( Each set of data indicating "end" or "continue" is stored. "End" data indicates that the output of the production sound effect of the confirmed role object operation first production will be immediately stopped when the corresponding production pattern designation command is received, and "Continue" data indicates that the production sound effect of the confirmed role object operation first production will be immediately stopped. Indicates that when a pattern designation command is received, the production sound effect of the confirmed role object operation first production continues to be output.

In the next step S2040-52, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the confirmed accessory action first production sound effect control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "End" (S2040-52: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to Step S2040-53, and if the control mode is "Continue" (S2040-52: No), the process proceeds to Step S2040-55. move on.

In step S2040-53, the supervising CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the confirmed accessory action first performance. The sound pattern of the confirmed accessory action first production is determined by the sound control timer update process (FIGS. 140 to 147), which will be described later, when the output timing of the production sound effect of the confirmed accessory action first production in the fluctuation has arrived. Set in step S2420-43. When the sound pattern of the confirmed accessory action first performance is cleared, the output of the performance sound effect (the performance sound effect shown in FIG. 31) of the confirmed accessory action first performance is stopped in the audio output device 32.

In the next step S2040-54, the supervising CPU 141a clears the confirmed role object operation first performance sound effect output flag in the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2040-55.

In step S2040-55, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the confirmed accessory action second performance sound effect outputting flag is set in the determined accessory action second performance sound effect flag storage area of the supervisory RAM 141b. . The determined accessory object operation second performance sound effect output flag is a flag indicating that the performance sound effect of the determined accessory object operation second performance (the performance sound effect shown in FIG. 31) is being output. The confirmed accessory action second production sound effect output flag is set when the output timing of the production sound effect of the confirmed accessory action second production in the change comes, and the sound control timer update process (FIGS. 140 to 147), which will be described later, is set. ) is set in step S2420-47. If the confirmed accessory action second production sound effect outputting flag is set (S2040-55: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-56, and sets the confirmed accessory operation second production sound effect output flag. If it has not been set (S2040-55: No), the process advances to step S2040-60.

In step S2040-56, the supervising CPU 141a performs a confirmed accessory actuation second production sound effect control mode determination process. In the confirmed accessory action second performance sound effect control mode determination process, the central CPU 141a refers to the confirmed accessory action second performance sound effect control mode determination table in the general ROM 141c, and determines the type of performance pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Based on this, the control mode of the production sound effect of the confirmed role object operation second production is determined.

FIG. 139 is a diagram showing a determined accessory actuation second performance sound effect control mode determination table. The confirmed accessory operation second performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that can be received by the general control unit 141 from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode of the production sound effect of the confirmed accessory operation second performance ( Each set of data indicating "end" or "continue" is stored. "End" data indicates that the output of the production sound effect of the confirmed role object operation second production will be immediately stopped when the corresponding production pattern designation command is received, and "Continue" data indicates that the output of the production sound effect of the confirmed role object operation second production will be immediately stopped. Indicates that when a pattern designation command is received, the production sound effect of the confirmed role object operation second production continues to be output.

In the next step S2040-57, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the control mode determined in the confirmed accessory action second performance sound effect control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "End" (S2040-57: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to Step S2040-58, and if the control mode is "Continue" (S2040-57: No), the process proceeds to Step S2040-60. move on.

In step S2040-58, the supervising CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the confirmed accessory action second performance. The sound pattern of the confirmed role object action second performance is determined by the sound control timer update process (FIGS. 140 to 147), which will be described later, when the output timing of the effect sound of the confirmed role object action second performance in the variation has arrived. Set in step S2420-49. When the sound pattern of the confirmed accessory action second performance is cleared, the output of the performance sound effect (the performance sound effect shown in FIG. 31) of the confirmed accessory action second performance is stopped in the audio output device 32.

In the next step S2040-59, the supervising CPU 141a clears the confirmed role object operation second performance sound effect output flag in the supervising RAM 141b, and proceeds to step S2040-60.

In step S2040-60, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a command for specifying a variation start effect pattern. If the command in the reception buffer is a variation start production pattern designation command (S2040-60: Yes), the control CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-61, and if it is not a variation start production pattern designation command (S2040-60: No). ), the process proceeds to step S2040-91.

In step S2040-61, the supervising CPU 141a sets the normal variation production sound effect output flag in the normal variation production sound effect output flag storage area of the supervisor RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-62, the supervising CPU 141a sets a sound pattern for the normal variation effect. After this, the sound output device 32 outputs the production sound effects of the normal variation production (song (1), music (2), music (3), music (4), music (5) shown in FIG. 10(b)). , or the production sound effects of song (6)) are output.

In the next step S2040-63, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the variation start performance pattern designation command and determines whether there is a step-up performance in the series of performances executed in the variation. If there is a step-up effect (S2040-63: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-64, and if there is no step-up effect (S2040-63: No), the process proceeds to step S2040-66.

In the next step S2040-64, the overall CPU 141a sets a step-up effect sound effect standby flag in the step-up effect sound effect standby flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-65, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the output timing of the production sound effect of the step-up production, and calculates the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. Set the step-up production sound effect standby timer counter in the RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-66, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the variation start production pattern designation command and determines whether or not there is a character appearance production in the series of productions executed in the variation. If there is a character appearance effect (S2040-66: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-67, and if there is no character appearance effect (S2040-66: No), the process proceeds to step S2040-71.

In step S2040-67, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the character appearing in the character appearance effect is a premium character. If a premium character appears (S2040-67: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-68, and if a character other than the premium character appears (S2040-67: No), proceeds to step S2040-69.

In step S2040-68, the supervising CPU 141a sets a premium character sound effect flag in the premium character sound effect flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-69, the general CPU 141a sets a character appearance effect sound effect standby flag in the character appearance effect sound effect standby flag storage area of the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-70, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the output timing of the production sound effect of the character appearance production, and computes the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the character appearance production sound effect standby timer counter in the RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-71, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the performance pattern designation command for starting the variation, and determines whether or not there is a roulette performance among the series of performances executed in the variation. If there is a roulette effect (S2040-71: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-72, and if there is no roulette effect (S2040-71: No), the process proceeds to step S2040-74.

In the next step S2040-72, the overall CPU 141a sets a roulette effect sound effect standby flag in the roulette effect sound effect standby flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-73, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the output timing of the production sound effect of the roulette production, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and stores the value in the supervising RAM 141b. Set the roulette production sound effect standby timer counter.

In the next step S2040-74, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the variation start performance pattern designation command and determines whether or not there is an SP development promotion performance in the series of performances executed in the variation. If there is an SP development promotion effect (S2040-74: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-75, and if there is no SP development promotion effect (S2040-74: No), the process proceeds to step S2040-77.

In the next step S2040-75, the supervising CPU 141a sets an SP development promotion effect sound effect standby flag in the SP development promotion effect sound effect standby flag storage area of the control RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-76, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the output timing of the production sound effect of the SP development promotion production, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. Set in the SP development incitement production sound effect standby timer counter in the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-77, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the variation start production pattern designation command and determines whether or not there is an SP development confirmed production in the series of productions to be executed in the variation. If there is an SP development confirmation effect (S2040-77: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-78, and if there is no SP development confirmation effect (S2040-77: No), the process proceeds to step S2040-80.

In the next step S2040-78, the supervising CPU 141a sets an SP development confirmed performance sound effect standby flag in the SP development confirmed performance sound effect standby flag storage area of the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-79, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the output timing of the production sound effect of the SP development confirmation production, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. Set the SP development confirmed performance sound effect standby timer counter in the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-80, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the variation start production pattern designation command and determines whether or not there is a cut-in production in the series of productions to be executed in the variation. If there is a cut-in effect (S2040-80: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-81, and if there is no cut-in effect (S2040-80: No), the process proceeds to step S2040-85.

In step S2040-81, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the background of the cut-in effect is rainbow-colored. If the background is rainbow-colored (S2040-81: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-82, and if the background is not rainbow-colored (S2040-81: No), the process proceeds to step S2040-83.

In step S2040-82, the supervising CPU 141a sets a premium cut-in sound effect flag in the premium cut-in sound effect flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-83, the overall CPU 141a sets a cut-in effect sound effect standby flag in the cut-in effect sound effect standby flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-84, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the output timing of the production sound effect of the cut-in production, and calculates the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. Set the cut-in production sound effect standby timer counter in the RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-85, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the variation start production pattern designation command and determines whether or not there is a confirmed role object action first production in the series of productions to be executed in the variation. . If there is a confirmed accessory action first performance (S2040-85: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-86, and if there is no confirmed accessory action first performance (S2040-85: No), step S2040- Proceed to 88.

In the next step S2040-86, the supervisory CPU 141a sets a confirmed accessory action first performance sound effect standby flag in the determined accessory action first performance sound effect standby flag storage area of the supervisory RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-87, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the output timing of the production sound of the confirmed role object operation first production, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The obtained value is set in the confirmed role object operation first production sound effect standby timer counter of the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-88, the supervising CPU 141a analyzes the variation start production pattern designation command and determines whether or not there is a confirmed role object action second production in the series of productions to be executed in the variation. . If there is a confirmed accessory action second performance (S2040-88: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-89, and if there is no confirmed accessory action second performance (S2040-88: No), step S2040- Proceed to 91.

In the next step S2040-89, the supervisory CPU 141a sets a determined accessory action second performance sound effect standby flag in the determined accessory action second performance sound effect standby flag storage area of the supervisory RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-90, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the output timing of the effect sound of the second performance of the determined role object operation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The obtained value is set in the confirmed role object operation second production sound effect standby timer counter of the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-91, the overall CPU 141a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a design-determined performance pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is not a design-determined performance pattern designation command (S2040-91: No), the process proceeds to step S2040-92, and if the command is a design-determined performance pattern designation command (S2040-91: Yes). ), the process proceeds to step S2040-98.

In step S2040-92, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a performance pattern designation command for development to SP reach performance. If the command in the reception buffer is a performance pattern designation command for development to SP reach performance (S2040-92: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-93, and determines that the command in the reception buffer is not a performance pattern designation command for development to SP reach performance (S2040-92: Yes). If (S2040-92: No), the process advances to step S2040-95.

In step S2040-93, the supervising CPU 141a sets the SP ready-to-win effect sound outputting flag in the SP ready-to-win effect sound outputting flag storage area of the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-94, the supervising CPU 141a sets a sound pattern for the SP reach effect, and proceeds to step S2040-101. After this, the audio output device 31 outputs the production sound effect of the SP reach production (song (8) shown in FIG. 17).

In step S2040-95, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a command for specifying a reach effect effect pattern. If the command in the reception buffer is a command for specifying a reach effect pattern (S2040-95: Yes), the control CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-96, and if the command in the reception buffer is not a command for specifying a effect pattern for a reach effect (S2040-95: No). , the process advances to step S2040-105.

In step S2040-96, the supervising CPU 141a sets the normal reach effect sound outputting flag in the normal reach effect sound outputting flag storage area of the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2040-97, the supervising CPU 141a sets a sound pattern for normal reach performance, and proceeds to step S2040-103. After this, the audio output device 31 outputs the production sound effect of the normal reach production (song (7) shown in FIG. 15).

In step S2040-98, the supervising CPU 141a sets a mute sound pattern, and proceeds to step S2040-99. After this, the sound is muted in the audio output device 31.

In step S2040-99, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the SP ready-to-win effect sound output flag is set in the SP ready-to-win effect sound output flag storage area of the general RAM 141b. If the SP reach performance audio output flag is set (2040-99: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-100, and if the SP reach performance audio output flag is not set (2040-99: No), the process advances to step S2040-101.

In step S2040-100, the supervising CPU 141a clears the SP reach effect sound outputting flag, and proceeds to step S2040-101.

In step S2040-101, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the normal reach effect sound output flag is set in the normal reach effect sound output flag storage area of the general RAM 141b. If the normal reach performance audio output flag is set (S2040-101: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-102, and if the normal reach performance audio output flag is not set (S2040-101: No). , proceed to step S2040-103.

In step S2040-102, the supervising CPU 141a clears the normal reach effect sound outputting flag, and proceeds to step S2040-103.

In step S2040-103, the general CPU 141a checks whether the normal variable effect sound output flag is set in the normal variable sound output flag storage area of the general RAM 141b. If the normal variation production sound output flag is set (S2040-103: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-104, and if the normal variation production sound output flag is not set (S2040-103: No), the process advances to step S2040-105.

In step S2040-104, the supervising CPU 141a clears the normal variable effect sound outputting flag, and proceeds to step S2040-105.

In step S2040-105, the overall CPU 141a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is an opening performance pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is an opening performance pattern designation command (S2040-105: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-106, and if it is not an opening performance pattern designation command (S2040-105: No), The process advances to step S2040-107.

In step S2040-106, the supervising CPU 141a sets a sound pattern for the opening performance. After this, the sound output device 32 outputs the sound of the opening performance.

In step S2040-107, the overall CPU 141a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a round performance pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is a round performance pattern designation command (S2040-107: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-108, and if it is not a round performance pattern designation command (S2040-107: No), The process advances to step S2040-109.

In step S2040-108, the supervising CPU 141a sets a sound pattern for the round performance. After this, the sound output device 32 outputs the sound of the round performance.

In step S2040-109, the overall CPU 141a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is an ending effect pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is an ending effect pattern specification command (S2040-109: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-110, and if it is not an ending effect pattern specification command (S2040-109: No), The process advances to step S2040-111.

In step S2040-110, the supervising CPU 141a sets a sound pattern for the ending effect. After this, the audio output device 32 outputs the effect sound of the ending effect.

In step S2040-111, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is an effect pattern designation command for pending display change. If the command in the reception buffer is a production pattern specification command for pending display change (S2040-111: Yes), the control CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-112, and if the command in the reception buffer is not a production pattern specification command for pending display change (S2040-111). :No), the process advances to step S2040-113.

In step S2040-112, the supervising CPU 141a sets a sound pattern for the pending display change effect. After this, the audio output device 32 outputs the production sound effect of the pending display change production.

In step S2040-113, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a production pattern designation command for successful rank up. If the command in the reception buffer is a command for specifying a successful performance pattern for rank-up (S2040-113: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2040-114, and if the command in the reception buffer is not a command for specifying a successful performance pattern for rank-up (S2040-113). :No), the process advances to step S2040-115.

In step S2040-114, the supervising CPU 141a sets a sound pattern for a successful rank-up effect. After this, the audio output device 32 outputs a production sound effect of a successful rank-up production.

In step S2040-115, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a command for specifying a performance pattern for rank-up failure. If the command in the reception buffer is a performance pattern designation command for rank-up failure (S2040-115: Yes), the control CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-116, and if it is not a rank-up failure performance pattern designation command (S2040-115). :No), the process advances to step S2040-117.

In step S2040-116, the supervising CPU 141a sets a sound pattern for a rank-up failure effect. After this, the audio output device 32 outputs a production sound effect of a rank-up failure production.

In step S2040-117, the overall CPU 141a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a stage change performance pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is a stage change performance pattern designation command (S2040-117: Yes), the control CPU 141a proceeds to step S2040-118, and if the command in the reception buffer is not a stage change performance pattern designation command (S2040-117: No). ), the current sound pattern setting process ends.

In step S2040-118, the supervising CPU 141a sets a sound pattern for the stage change performance. From this point on, the sound output device 32 outputs the effect sound of the new stage.

140 to 147 are flowcharts showing details of the voice control timer update process (step S2420 in FIG. 77) of the overall control unit 141. In FIG. 140, if there is a timer counter in the general RAM 141b that is referenced in the sound pattern setting process that is not 0, the general CPU 141a updates it by -1.

In the next step S2420-2, the overall CPU 141a checks whether a step-up effect sound effect standby flag is set in the step-up effect sound effect standby flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b. If the step-up production sound effect standby flag is set (S2420-2: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-3, and if the step-up production sound effect standby flag is not set (S2420-2: No), the process advances to step S2420-8.

In step S2420-3, the overall CPU 141a determines whether the step-up production sound effect standby timer counter in the overall RAM 141b is greater than 0. If the step-up production sound effect standby timer counter is 0 (S2420-3: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-4, and if the step-up production sound effect standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2420-3: Yes), proceed to step S2420-8.

In step S2420-4, the supervising CPU 141a clears the step-up production sound effect standby flag.

In the next step S2420-5, the overall CPU 141a sets a step-up effect sound effect output flag in the step-up effect sound effect output flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2420-6, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the output end timing of the production sound effect of the step-up production, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the step-up production sound effect end standby timer counter in the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2420-7, the supervising CPU 141a sets a sound pattern for the step-up performance. After this, the sound effect of the step-up performance is outputted by the audio output device 32.

In the next step S2420-8, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the character appearance effect sound effect standby flag is set in the character appearance effect sound effect standby flag storage area of the control RAM 141b. If the character appearance production sound effect standby flag is set (S2420-8: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-9, and if the character appearance production sound effect standby flag is not set (S2420-8: No), the process advances to step S2420-14.

In step S2420-9, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the character appearance production sound effect standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the character appearance effect sound effect standby timer counter is 0 (S2420-9: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-10, and if the character appearance effect sound effect standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2420-9: Yes), proceed to step S2420-14.

In step S2420-10, the supervising CPU 141a clears the character appearance effect sound effect standby flag.

In the next step S2420-11, the overall CPU 141a sets a character appearance effect sound effect output flag in the character appearance effect sound effect output flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2420-12, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the output end timing of the effect sound for the character appearance, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the character appearance production sound effect end standby timer counter in the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2420-13, the supervising CPU 141a sets a sound pattern for the character appearance effect. After this, the audio output device 32 outputs the effect sound of the character appearance.

In the next step S2420-14, the overall CPU 141a checks whether the roulette effect sound effect standby flag is set in the roulette effect sound effect standby flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b. If the roulette performance sound effect standby flag is set (S2420-14: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-15, and if the roulette performance sound effect standby flag is not set (S2420-14: No). , proceed to step S2420-20.

In step S2420-15, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the roulette performance sound effect standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the roulette effect sound effect standby timer counter is 0 (S2420-15: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-16, and if the roulette effect sound effect standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2420-15: Yes). , proceed to step S2420-20.

In step S2420-16, the supervising CPU 141a clears the roulette effect sound effect standby flag.

In the next step S2420-17, the overall CPU 141a sets a roulette effect sound effect output flag in the roulette effect sound effect output flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b.

In the next step S2420-18, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the output end timing of the production sound effect of the roulette performance, and calculates the value obtained by dividing this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. Set in the roulette performance sound effect end standby timer counter in the RAM 141b.

In the next step S2420-19, the supervising CPU 141a sets a sound pattern for the roulette effect. After this, the audio output device 32 outputs the effect sound of the roulette effect.

In the next step S2420-20, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether or not the SP development promotion effect sound effect standby flag is set in the SP development promotion effect sound effect standby flag storage area of the control RAM 141b. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-21 when the SP development promotion production sound effect standby flag is set (S2420-20: Yes), and when the SP development promotion production sound effect standby flag is not set (S2420- 20: No), the process advances to step S2420-26.

In step S2420-21, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the SP development promotion sound effect standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the SP development promotion production sound effect standby timer counter is 0 (S2420-21: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-22, and if the SP development promotion production sound effect wait timer counter is greater than 0 (S2420- 21: Yes), the process advances to step S2420-26.

In step S2420-22, the supervising CPU 141a clears the SP development promotion production sound effect standby flag.

In the next step S2420-23, the supervisory CPU 141a sets an SP development promotion sound effect output flag in the SP development promotion sound effect output flag storage area of the supervisor RAM 141b.

In the next step S2420-24, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the output end timing of the production sound effect of the SP development promotion production, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. is set in the SP development promotion production sound effect end standby timer counter in the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2420-25, the supervising CPU 141a sets a sound pattern for the SP development promotion effect. After this, the audio output device 32 outputs the production sound effect of the SP development promotion production.

In the next step S2420-26, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the SP development confirmed performance sound effect standby flag is set in the SP development confirmed performance sound effect standby flag storage area of the general RAM 141b. If the SP development confirmed performance sound effect standby flag is set (S2420-26: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-27, and if the SP development confirmed performance sound effect standby flag is not set (S2420-26). 26: No), the process advances to step S2420-32.

In step S2420-27, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the SP development confirmed production sound effect standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the SP development confirmed production sound effect standby timer counter is 0 (S2420-27: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-28, and if the SP development confirmed production sound effect wait timer counter is greater than 0 (S2420-27: No) 27: Yes), the process advances to step S2420-32.

In step S2420-28, the supervising CPU 141a clears the SP development confirmed production sound effect standby flag.

In the next step S2420-29, the supervising CPU 141a sets an SP development confirmed performance sound effect output flag in the SP development confirmed performance sound effect output flag storage area of the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2420-30, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the output end timing of the production sound effect of the SP development confirmation production, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. is set in the SP development confirmed performance sound effect end standby timer counter in the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2420-31, the supervising CPU 141a sets a sound pattern for the SP development confirmation effect. After this, the audio output device 32 outputs the production sound effect of the SP development confirmed production.

In the next step S2420-32, the overall CPU 141a checks whether a cut-in effect sound effect standby flag is set in the cut-in effect sound effect standby flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b. If the cut-in production sound effect standby flag is set (S2420-32: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-33, and if the cut-in production sound effect standby flag is not set (S2420-32: No), the process advances to step S2420-38.

In step S2420-33, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the cut-in production sound effect standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the cut-in production sound effect standby timer counter is 0 (S2420-33: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-34, and if the cut-in production sound effect standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2420-33: Yes), proceed to step S2420-38.

In step S2420-34, the supervising CPU 141a clears the cut-in production sound effect standby flag.

In the next step S2420-35, the general CPU 141a sets a cut-in effect sound effect outputting flag in the cut-in effect sound effect outputting flag storage area of the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2420-36, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the output end timing of the production sound effect of the cut-in production, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the cut-in production sound effect end standby timer counter in the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2420-37, the supervising CPU 141a sets a sound pattern for the cut-in effect. After this, the audio output device 32 outputs the production sound effect of the cut-in production.

In the next step S2420-38, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the confirmed accessory action first performance sound effect standby flag is set in the determined accessory action first performance sound effect standby flag storage area of the supervisory RAM 141b. . If the confirmed accessory action first production sound effect standby flag is set (S2420-38: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-39, and sets the confirmed accessory action first production sound effect wait flag. If not (S2420-38: No), the process advances to step S2420-44.

In step S2420-39, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the determined accessory action first performance sound effect standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the confirmed role object operation first performance sound effect standby timer counter is 0 (S2420-39: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-40, and sets the confirmed role object operation first performance sound effect standby timer counter to 0. If it is larger (S2420-39: Yes), the process advances to step S2420-44.

In step S2420-40, the supervising CPU 141a clears the confirmed accessory actuation first production sound effect standby flag.

In the next step S2420-41, the supervising CPU 141a sets the confirmed accessory action first performance sound effect outputting flag in the determined accessory action first performance sound effect output flag storage area of the supervisory RAM 141b.

In the next step S2420-42, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the output end timing of the production sound effect of the confirmed role object operation first production, and divides this time into 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The divided value is set in the determined accessory action first production sound effect end standby timer counter in the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2420-43, the supervising CPU 141a sets a sound pattern for the confirmed accessory action first performance. After this, the audio output device 32 outputs the production sound effect of the confirmed role object operation first production.

In the next step S2420-44, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the confirmed accessory action second performance sound effect standby flag is set in the determined accessory action second performance sound effect standby flag storage area of the general RAM 141b. . If the confirmed accessory action second production sound effect standby flag is set (S2420-44: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-45, and sets the confirmed accessory action second production sound effect wait flag. If not (S2420-44: No), the process advances to step S2420-50.

In step S2420-45, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the determined accessory action second performance sound effect standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the confirmed role object operation second performance sound effect standby timer counter is 0 (S2420-45: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-46, and sets the confirmed role object operation second performance sound effect standby timer counter to 0. If it is larger (S2420-45: Yes), the process advances to step S2420-50.

In step S2420-46, the supervising CPU 141a clears the confirmed accessory activation second production sound effect standby flag.

In the next step S2420-47, the supervising CPU 141a sets the confirmed accessory action second performance sound effect outputting flag in the determined accessory object operation second performance sound effect output flag storage area of the supervisory RAM 141b.

In the next step S2420-48, the supervising CPU 141a calculates the remaining time until the output end timing of the production sound of the confirmed role object operation second production, and divides this time into 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The divided value is set in the confirmed accessory action second production sound effect end standby timer counter in the general RAM 141b.

In the next step S2420-49, the supervising CPU 141a sets a sound pattern for the confirmed accessory action second performance. After this, the sound output device 32 outputs the production sound effect of the confirmed role object operation second production.

In step S2420-50, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the step-up effect sound effect outputting flag is set in the step-up effect sound effect outputting flag storage area of the general RAM 141b. If the step-up production sound effect outputting flag is set (S2420-50: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-51, and if the step-up production sound effect output flag is not set (S2420-50), the process proceeds to step S2420-51. 50: No), the process advances to step S2420-54.

In step S2420-51, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the step-up production sound effect end standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the step-up effect sound effect end standby timer counter is 0 (S2420-51: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-52, and if the step-up effect sound effect end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2420-51: No), the process proceeds to step S2420-52. 51: Yes), the process advances to step S2420-54.

In step S2420-52, the supervising CPU 141a clears the step-up production sound effect output flag.

In step S2420-53, the supervising CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the step-up effect. When the sound pattern of the step-up effect is cleared, the output of the effect sound of the step-up effect is stopped in the audio output device 32.

In step S2420-54, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the character appearance effect sound effect outputting flag is set in the character appearance effect sound effect outputting flag storage area of the general RAM 141b. If the character appearance sound effect outputting flag is set (S2420-54: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-55, and if the character appearance sound effect outputting flag is not set (S2420- 54: No), the process advances to step S2420-60.

In step S2420-55, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the character appearance production sound effect end standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the character appearance effect sound effect end standby timer counter is 0 (S2420-55: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-56, and if the character appearance effect sound effect end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2420-55: No). 55: Yes), the process advances to step S2420-60.

In step S2420-56, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the premium character sound effect flag is set in the premium character sound effect flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the premium character sound effect flag is set (S2420-56: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-57; if the premium character sound effect flag is not set (S2420-56: No), the control CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-57. Proceed to S2420-58.

In step S2420-57, the supervising CPU 141a clears the premium character sound effect flag.

In step S2420-58, the supervising CPU 141a clears the character appearance effect sound effect output flag.

In step S2420-59, the supervising CPU 141a clears the sound pattern for the character appearance effect. When the sound pattern of the character appearance effect is cleared, the audio output device 32 stops outputting the effect sound of the character appearance effect.

In step S2420-60, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the roulette effect sound effect outputting flag is set in the roulette effect sound effect outputting flag storage area of the general RAM 141b. If the roulette effect sound effect outputting flag is set (S2420-60: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-61, and if the roulette effect sound effect outputting flag is not set (S2420-60: No), the process advances to step S2420-64.

In step S2420-61, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the roulette production sound effect end standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the roulette effect sound effect end standby timer counter is 0 (S2420-61: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-62, and if the roulette effect sound effect end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2420-61: Yes), proceed to step S2420-64.

In step S2420-62, the supervising CPU 141a clears the roulette effect sound effect output flag.

In step S2420-63, the supervising CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the roulette effect. When the sound pattern of the roulette performance is cleared, the audio output device 32 stops outputting the sound effects of the roulette performance.

In step S2420-64, the supervisory CPU 141a checks whether the SP development promotion sound effect outputting flag is set in the SP development promotion sound effect output flag storage area of the supervisory RAM 141b. The supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-65 if the SP development promotion sound effect outputting flag is set (S2420-64: Yes), and if the SP development promotion production sound effect output flag is not set ( S2420-64: No), proceed to step S2420-68.

In step S2420-65, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the SP development promotion effect sound effect end standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the SP development promotion sound effect end standby timer counter is 0 (S2420-65: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-66, and if the SP development promotion sound effect end wait timer counter is greater than 0 (S2420-65: No), S2420-65: Yes), proceed to step S2420-68.

In step S2420-66, the supervising CPU 141a clears the SP development promotion production sound effect outputting flag.

In step S2420-67, the supervising CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the SP development promotion effect. When the sound pattern of the SP development promotion effect is cleared, the output of the production sound effect of the SP development promotion effect is stopped in the audio output device 32.

In step S2420-68, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the SP development confirmed performance sound effect outputting flag is set in the SP development confirmed production sound effect output flag storage area of the general RAM 141b. If the SP development confirmed performance sound effect outputting flag is set (S2420-68: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-69, and if the SP development confirmed production sound effect output flag is not set ( S2420-68: No), proceed to step S2420-72.

In step S2420-69, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether the SP development confirmed production sound effect end standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the SP development confirmed performance sound effect end standby timer counter is 0 (S2420-69: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-70, and if the SP development confirmed performance sound effect end wait timer counter is greater than 0 ( S2420-69: Yes), proceed to step S2420-72.

In step S2420-70, the supervising CPU 141a clears the SP development confirmed production sound effect output flag.

In step S2420-71, the supervising CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the SP development confirmation effect. When the sound pattern of the SP development confirmed performance is cleared, the output of the production sound effect of the SP development confirmed performance is stopped in the audio output device 32.

In step S2420-72, the overall CPU 141a checks whether the cut-in effect sound effect outputting flag is set in the cut-in effect sound effect outputting flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b. If the cut-in production sound effect outputting flag is set (S2420-72: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-73, and if the cut-in production sound effect output flag is not set (S2420- 72: No), the process advances to step S2420-78.

In step S2420-73, the overall CPU 141a determines whether the cut-in production sound effect end standby timer counter in the overall RAM 141b is greater than 0. If the cut-in production sound effect end standby timer counter is 0 (S2420-73: No), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-74, and if the cut-in production sound effect end wait timer counter is greater than 0 (S2420-73: No), 73: Yes), proceed to step S2420-78.

In step S2420-74, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the premium cut-in sound effect flag is set in the premium cut-in sound effect flag storage area of the supervising RAM 141b. If the premium cut-in sound effect flag is set (S2420-74: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-75, and if the premium cut-in sound effect flag is not set (S2420-74: No). , proceed to step S2420-76.

In step S2420-75, the supervising CPU 141a clears the premium cut-in sound effect flag.

In step S2420-76, the supervising CPU 141a clears the cut-in production sound effect output flag.

In step S2420-77, the supervising CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the cut-in effect. When the sound pattern of the cut-in effect is cleared, the audio output device 32 stops outputting the effect sound of the cut-in effect.

In step S2420-78, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the determined accessory action first performance sound effect flag is set in the determined accessory action first performance sound effect output flag storage area of the management RAM 141b. . If the confirmed accessory action first production sound effect outputting flag is set (S2420-78: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-79, and sets the confirmed accessory operation first production sound effect output flag. If not set (S2420-78: No), the process advances to step S2420-82.

In step S2420-79, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the determined accessory action first production sound effect end standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the confirmed role object operation first performance sound effect end standby timer counter is 0 (S2420-79: No), the control CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-80, and sets the confirmed role object operation first performance sound effect end standby timer counter. is greater than 0 (S2420-79: Yes), the process advances to step S2420-82.

In step S2420-80, the supervising CPU 141a clears the confirmed accessory actuation first performance sound effect output flag.

In step S2420-81, the supervising CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the confirmed accessory action first performance. When the sound pattern of the confirmed accessory action first performance is cleared, the output of the performance sound effect of the determined accessory action first performance is stopped in the audio output device 32.

In step S2420-82, the supervising CPU 141a checks whether the determined accessory action second performance sound effect flag is set in the determined accessory action second performance sound effect output flag storage area of the management RAM 141b. . If the confirmed accessory action second production sound effect outputting flag is set (S2420-82: Yes), the supervising CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-83, and sets the confirmed accessory operation second production sound effect output flag. If it has not been set (S2420-82: No), the current voice control timer update process ends.

In step S2420-83, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not the determined accessory actuation second production sound effect end standby timer counter in the supervising RAM 141b is greater than zero. If the confirmed role object operation second performance sound effect end standby timer counter is 0 (S2420-83: No), the control CPU 141a proceeds to step S2420-84, and sets the confirmed role object operation second performance sound effect end standby timer counter. is greater than 0 (S2420-83: Yes), the current voice control timer update process ends.

In step S2420-84, the supervising CPU 141a clears the confirmed accessory actuation second performance sound effect output flag.

In step S2420-85, the supervising CPU 141a clears the sound pattern of the confirmed accessory action second performance. When the sound pattern of the confirmed accessory action second performance is cleared, the output of the performance sound effect of the determined accessory action second performance is stopped in the audio output device 32.

148 to 159 are flowcharts showing details of the lamp emission information setting process (step S2530 in FIG. 78) of the overall control unit 141. In FIG. 148, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether the normal variable effect lamp is being emitted light is set in the normal variable effect lamp being emitted flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b (S2530-1). The normal variable effect lamp lighting flag indicates the light emission mode of the normal variable effect (light emission pattern (1), (2), (3), (4), (5) shown in FIG. 10(b), or ( This is a flag indicating that the lamp 34d in step 6)) is emitting light. The normal variable lamp emission flag is set in step S2530-61, which will be described later, when a variation start production pattern designation command is received from the production control unit 120m. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-2 if the normal variable effect lamp is being lit (S2530-1: Yes), and if the normal variable effect lamp is not being lit (S2530-1: No), the process advances to step S2530-6.

In step S2530-2, the lamp CPU 150a performs normal variation effect lamp control mode determination processing. In the normal variation effect lamp control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the normal variation effect lamp control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and selects the normal variation effect lamp 34d based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Decide the control mode.

FIG. 160 is a diagram showing a normal variation effect lamp control mode determination table. The normal fluctuation performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that the lamp/drive control unit 150 can receive from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode (“end” or “continue”) of the lamp 34d for the normal fluctuation performance. ) are stored. The "end" data indicates that the light emission of the lamp 34d for the normal variable effect is immediately terminated when the corresponding effect pattern specification command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the emission of the lamp 34d for the normal variable effect is immediately terminated when the corresponding effect pattern specification command is received. In this case, it indicates that the lamp 34d of the normal variation effect continues to emit light.

In the next step S2530-3, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the normal variation effect lamp control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". When the control mode is "end" (S2530-3: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-4, and when the control mode is "continue" (S2530-3: No), the process proceeds to step S2530-6. move on.

In step S2530-4, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp light emission information for the normal variation effect. The lamp light emission information for the normal variation effect is set in step S2530-62, which will be described later, when a variation start effect pattern designation command is received from the effect control unit 120m. When the lamp light emission information for the normal variation effect is cleared, the light emission mode for the normal variation effect (light emission patterns (1), (2), (3), (4) shown in FIG. 10(b)) is set in the lamp 34d. , (5) or (6)) ends.

In the next step S2530-5, the lamp CPU 150a clears the normal variable effect lamp emission flag in the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2530-6.

In step S2530-6, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether or not the step-up effect lamp is being lit in the step-up effect lamp being lit flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b (S2530-6). The step-up effect lamp light emission flag is a flag indicating that the lamp 34c is emitting light in the light emission mode of the step-up effect (light emission pattern (9) shown in FIG. 19). The step-up lamp lighting flag is set in step S2810-5 of the lamp control timer update process (FIGS. 173 to 180), which will be described later, when the lighting timing of the lamp 34c for the step-up effect in the variation has arrived. . The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-7 if the step-up effect lamp is being lit (S2530-6: Yes), and if the step-up effect lamp is not being lit (S2530-6: No), the process advances to step S2530-11.

In step S2530-7, the lamp CPU 150a performs step-up effect lamp control mode determination processing. In the step-up effect lamp control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the step-up effect lamp control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer, the lamp 34c for the step-up effect. Decide the control mode.

FIG. 161 is a diagram showing a step-up effect lamp control mode determination table. The step-up performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that the lamp/drive control unit 150 can receive from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode (“end” or “continue”) of the lamp 34c of the step-up performance. ) are stored. The "end" data indicates that the light emission of the step-up effect lamp 34c is immediately terminated when the corresponding effect pattern specification command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the emission of the step-up effect lamp 34c is immediately terminated when the corresponding effect pattern specification command is received. In this case, it indicates that the step-up effect lamp 34c continues to emit light.

In the next step S2530-8, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the step-up effect lamp control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "End" (S2530-8: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to Step S2530-9, and if the control mode is "Continue" (S2530-8: No), the process proceeds to Step S2530-11. move on.

In step S2530-9, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp light emission information of the step-up effect. The lamp light emission information for the step-up effect is set in step S2810-7 of the lamp control timer update process (FIGS. 173 to 180), which will be described later, when the light emission timing of the step-up effect lamp 34c in the variation has arrived. Ru. When the lamp light emission information for the step-up effect is cleared, the lamp 34c finishes emitting light in the light emission mode (light emission pattern (9) shown in FIG. 19) for the step-up effect.

In the next step S2530-10, the lamp CPU 150a clears the step-up effect lamp lighting flag in the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2530-11.

In step S2530-11, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the normal reach effect lamp is being emitted flag is set in the normal reach effect lamp emitting flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The normal reach effect lamp light emission flag is a flag indicating that the lamp 34d is emitting light in the normal reach effect light emission mode (light emission pattern (7) shown in FIG. 15). The normal reach effect lamp lighting flag is set in step S2530-96, which will be described later, when a reach effect effect pattern designation command is received from the effect control unit 120m. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-12 if the normal reach effect lamp is being lit (S2530-11: Yes), and if the normal reach effect lamp is not being lit (S2530-11: No). , proceed to step S2530-16.

In step S2530-12, the lamp CPU 150a performs normal reach effect lamp control mode determination processing. In the normal reach effect lamp control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the normal reach effect lamp control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and determines the control mode of the normal reach effect lamp 34d based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. decide.

FIG. 162 is a diagram showing a normal reach effect lamp control mode determination table. The normal reach performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that the lamp/drive control unit 150 can receive from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode (“end” or “continue”) of the lamp 34d of the normal reach performance. Each set of data shown is stored. The "end" data indicates that the light emission of the normal reach effect lamp 34d is immediately terminated when the corresponding effect pattern specification command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the emission of the lamp 34d for the normal reach effect is immediately terminated when the corresponding effect pattern specification command is received. In this case, it indicates that the lamp 34d of the normal reach effect continues to emit light.

In the next step S2530-13, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the normal reach effect lamp control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". When the control mode is "End" (S2530-13: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to Step S2530-14, and when the control mode is "Continue" (S2530-13: No), the process proceeds to Step S2530-16. move on.

In step S2530-14, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp light emission information for the normal reach effect. The lamp light emission information for the normal reach effect is set in step S2530-95, which will be described later, when a reach effect effect pattern designation command is received from the effect control unit 120m. When the lamp light emission information of the normal reach effect is cleared, the light emission of the light emission mode (light emission pattern (7) shown in FIG. 15) of the normal reach effect is finished in the lamp 34d.

In the next step S2530-15, the lamp CPU 150a clears the normal reach effect lamp lighting flag in the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2530-16.

In step S2530-16, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the character appearance effect lamp is being lit in the character appearance effect lamp emission flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b (S2530-16). The character appearance effect lamp light emission flag is a flag indicating that the lamp 34c is emitting light in the light emission mode (light emission pattern (12) shown in FIG. 23) of the character appearance effect. The character appearance lamp lighting flag is set in step S2810-11 of the lamp control timer update process (FIGS. 173 to 180), which will be described later, when the timing for lighting the lamp 34c for the character appearance effect in the variation has arrived. . The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-17 if the character appearance effect lamp is being lit (S2530-16: Yes), and if the character appearance effect lamp is not being lit (S2530-16: No), the process advances to step S2530-23.

In step S2530-17, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the premium character lamp flag is set in the premium character lamp flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The premium character lamp flag is set in step S2530-68, which will be described later, when the character appearing in the character appearance effect is a premium character. If the premium character lamp flag is set (S2530-17: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-18; if the premium character lamp flag is not set (S2530-17: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530- Proceed to step 19.

In step S2530-18, the lamp CPU 150a performs premium character appearance effect lamp control mode determination processing. In the premium character appearance production lamp control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the premium character appearance production lamp control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and determines the appearance of the premium character based on the type of production pattern designation command in the reception buffer. The control mode of the performance lamp 34c is determined.

FIG. 163 is a diagram showing a premium character appearance effect lamp control mode determination table. The premium character appearance performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that the lamp/drive control unit 150 can receive from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode of the lamp 34c for the character appearance performance in which the premium character appears (" Each set of data indicating "end" or "continue" is stored. The "end" data indicates that when the corresponding production pattern designation command is received, the light emission of the lamp 34c for the character appearance production in which the premium character appears will be immediately terminated, and the "continue" data indicates that the emission of the lamp 34c for the character appearance production in which the premium character appears will be immediately ended. This indicates that when a pattern designation command is received, the lamp 34c for a character appearance effect in which a premium character appears continues to emit light.

In step S2530-19, the lamp CPU 150a performs character appearance effect lamp control mode determination processing. In the character appearance effect lamp control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the premium character appearance effect lamp control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and selects the character appearance effect lamp 34c based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Determine the control mode.

FIG. 164 is a diagram showing a character appearance effect lamp control mode determination table. The character appearance effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that the lamp/drive control unit 150 can receive from the effect control unit 120m, and the control mode of the lamp 34c of the character appearance effect (“end” or “continue”). ) are stored. The "end" data indicates that the lighting of the lamp 34c for the character appearance effect is immediately terminated when the corresponding effect pattern specification command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the emission of the lamp 34c for the character appearance effect is immediately terminated when the corresponding effect pattern specification command is received. In this case, it is shown that the lamp 34c for the character appearance effect continues to emit light.

In step S2530-20, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the premium character appearance effect control mode determination process or the character appearance effect lamp control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". . When the control mode is "End" (S2530-20: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to Step S2530-21, and when the control mode is "Continue" (S2530-20: No), the process proceeds to Step S2530-22. move on.

In step S2530-21, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp light emission information for the character appearance effect. The lamp light emission information for the character appearance effect is set in step S2810-13 of the lamp control timer update process (FIGS. 173 to 180), which will be described later, when the light emission timing of the lamp 34c for the character appearance effect in the variation has arrived. Ru. When the lamp light emission information for the character appearance effect is cleared, the lamp 34c finishes emitting light in the light emission mode (light emission patterns (10) and (11) shown in FIG. 21) for the character appearance effect.

In the next step S2530-22, the lamp CPU 150a clears the character appearance effect lamp lighting flag in the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2530-23.

In step S2530-23, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the roulette effect lamp is being lit in the roulette effect lamp is being lit flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b (S2530-23). The roulette effect lamp light emission flag is a flag indicating that the lamp 34c is emitting light in the light emission mode of the roulette effect (light emission pattern (12) shown in FIG. 23). The roulette lamp lighting flag is set in step S2810-17 of the lamp control timer update process (FIGS. 173 to 180), which will be described later, when the lighting timing of the lamp 34c for the roulette effect in the variation has arrived. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-24 if the roulette effect lamp is being lit (S2530-23: Yes), and if the roulette effect lamp is not being lit (S2530-23: No). , proceed to step S2530-28.

In step S2530-24, the lamp CPU 150a performs roulette effect lamp control mode determination processing. In the roulette effect lamp control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the roulette effect lamp control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and determines the control mode of the roulette effect lamp 34c based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. decide.

FIG. 165 is a diagram showing a roulette effect lamp control mode determination table. The roulette performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that the lamp/drive control unit 150 can receive from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode (“end” or “continue”) of the lamp 34c of the roulette performance. Each set of data shown is stored. The "end" data indicates that the light emission of the lamp 34c of the roulette effect is immediately terminated when the corresponding effect pattern specification command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the emission of the lamp 34c of the roulette effect is immediately terminated when the corresponding effect pattern specification command is received. In this case, it indicates that the lamp 34c for the roulette effect continues to emit light.

In the next step S2530-25, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the roulette effect lamp control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". When the control mode is "End" (S2530-25: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to Step S2530-26, and when the control mode is "Continue" (S2530-25: No), the process proceeds to Step S2530-28. move on.

In step S2530-26, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp light emission information for the roulette effect. The lamp light emission information for the roulette effect is set in step S2810-19 of the lamp control timer update process (FIGS. 173 to 180), which will be described later, when the light emission timing of the lamp 34c for the roulette effect in the variation has arrived. When the lamp light emission information for the roulette effect is cleared, the lamp 34c finishes emitting light in the light emission mode (light emission pattern (12) shown in FIG. 23) for the roulette effect.

In the next step S2530-27, the lamp CPU 150a clears the roulette effect lamp lighting flag in the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2530-28.

In step S2530-28, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the SP development promotion lamp emission flag is set in the SP development promotion lamp emission flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The SP development promotion effect lamp lighting flag is a flag indicating that the lamp 34c is emitting light in the light emission mode (light emission pattern (13) shown in FIG. 25) of the SP development promotion effect. The SP development promotion lamp light emission flag is set in step S2810-23 of the lamp control timer update process (FIGS. 173 to 180), which will be described later, when the lighting timing of the lamp 34c for the SP development promotion effect in the variation has arrived. be done. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-29 if the SP development promotion lamp is being lit (S2530-28: Yes), and if the SP development promotion lamp is not being lit (S2530-28). 28: No), the process advances to step S2530-33.

In step S2530-29, the lamp CPU 150a performs SP development promotion effect lamp control mode determination processing. In the SP development promotion effect lamp control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the SP development promotion effect lamp control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and determines the SP development promotion effect based on the type of production pattern designation command in the reception buffer. The control mode of the lamp 34c is determined.

FIG. 166 is a diagram showing a SP development promotion effect lamp control mode determination table. The SP development stimulation performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that the lamp/drive control unit 150 can receive from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode of the lamp 34c of the SP development stimulation performance (“end” or “ Each set of data indicating "continuation") is stored. The "end" data indicates that the light emission of the lamp 34c for the SP development promotion effect is immediately terminated when the corresponding production pattern specification command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding production pattern specification command is immediately terminated. When received, it indicates that the lamp 34c for promoting SP development continues to emit light.

In the next step S2530-30, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the SP development promotion effect lamp control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "End" (S2530-30: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to Step S2530-31, and if the control mode is "Continue" (S2530-30: No), the process proceeds to Step S2530-33. move on.

In step S2530-31, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp light emission information for the SP development promotion effect. The lamp light emission information for the SP development promotion effect is determined in step S2810-25 of the lamp control timer update process (FIGS. 173 to 180), which will be described later, when the timing for emitting the lamp 34c for the SP development promotion effect in the variation has arrived. Set. When the lamp light emission information for the SP development promotion effect is cleared, the lamp 34c finishes emitting light in the light emission mode (light emission pattern (13) shown in FIG. 25) for the SP development promotion effect.

In the next step S2530-32, the lamp CPU 150a clears the SP development promotion effect lamp emission flag in the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2530-33.

In step S2530-33, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the SP development confirmed effect lamp emission flag is set in the SP development confirmed effect lamp emission flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The SP development confirmed effect lamp lighting flag is a flag indicating that the lamp 34c is emitting light in the light emission mode (light emission pattern (14) shown in FIG. 27) of the SP development confirmed effect. The SP development confirmation lamp lighting flag is set in step S2810-29 of the lamp control timer update process (FIGS. 173 to 180), which will be described later, when the lighting timing of the lamp 34c for the SP development confirmation effect in the variation has arrived. be done. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-34 when the SP development confirmed effect lamp is being emitted flag is set (S2530-33: Yes), and when the SP development confirmed effect lamp is not emitted flag is set (S2530- 33: No), the process proceeds to step S2530-38.

In step S2530-34, the lamp CPU 150a performs SP development confirmed effect lamp control mode determination processing. In the SP development confirmed performance lamp control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the SP development confirmed performance lamp control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and determines the SP development confirmed performance based on the type of performance pattern designation command in the reception buffer. The control mode of the lamp 34c is determined.

FIG. 167 is a diagram showing the SP development confirmed effect lamp control mode determination table. The SP development confirmed performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that the lamp/drive control unit 150 can receive from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode of the lamp 34c of the SP development confirmed performance (“end” or “ Each set of data indicating "continuation") is stored. The "end" data indicates that the light emission of the lamp 34c for the SP development confirmation effect is immediately terminated when the corresponding effect pattern specification command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the emission of the lamp 34c for the SP development confirmed effect is immediately terminated when the corresponding effect pattern specification command is received. When received, it indicates that the lamp 34c of the SP development confirmation effect continues to emit light.

In the next step S2530-35, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the SP development confirmed effect lamp control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "End" (S2530-35: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to Step S2530-36, and if the control mode is "Continue" (S2530-35: No), the process proceeds to Step S2530-38. move on.

In step S2530-36, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp light emission information of the SP development confirmation effect. The lamp light emission information for the SP development confirmed effect is determined in step S2810-31 of the lamp control timer update process (FIGS. 173 to 180), which will be described later, when the light emission timing of the lamp 34c for the SP development confirmed effect in the variation has arrived. Set. When the lamp light emission information for the SP development confirmed effect is cleared, the lamp 34c finishes emitting light in the light emission mode (light emission pattern (14) shown in FIG. 27) for the SP development confirmed effect.

In the next step S2530-37, the lamp CPU 150a clears the SP development confirmation effect lamp lighting flag in the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2530-38.

In step S2530-38, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the SP ready-to-reach effect lamp is being emitted flag is set in the SP ready-to-reach effect lamp being emitted flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The SP ready-to-reach effect lamp light emission flag is a flag indicating that the lamp 34d is emitting light in the light emission mode of the SP ready-to-reach effect (light emission pattern (8) shown in FIG. 17). The SP reach lamp light emission flag is set in step S2530-93, which will be described later, when a production pattern designation command for development to SP reach production is received from the production control unit 120m. The lamp CPU 150a advances to step S2530-39 if the SP reach effect lamp is being lit (S2530-38: Yes), and if the SP reach effect lamp is not being lit (S2530-38: No), the process advances to step S2530-43.

In step S2530-39, the lamp CPU 150a performs SP reach effect lamp control mode determination processing. In the SP reach effect lamp control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the SP reach effect lamp control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and sets the SP reach effect lamp 34d based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Decide the control mode.

FIG. 168 is a diagram showing the SP reach effect lamp control mode determination table. The SP reach performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that the lamp/drive control unit 150 can receive from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode of the lamp 34d of the SP reach performance (“end” or “continue”). ) are stored. The "end" data indicates that the light emission of the SP reach effect lamp 34d is immediately terminated when the corresponding production pattern specification command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the emission of the SP reach effect lamp 34d is immediately terminated when the corresponding production pattern specification command is received. In this case, it indicates that the lamp 34d for the SP reach effect continues to emit light.

In the next step S2530-40, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the SP reach effect lamp control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". When the control mode is "End" (S2530-40: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to Step S2530-41, and when the control mode is "Continue" (S2530-40: No), the process proceeds to Step S2530-43. move on.

In step S2530-41, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp light emission information of the SP reach effect. The lamp light emission information for the SP ready-to-win performance is set in step S2530-100, which will be described later, when a command for specifying a performance pattern for development to the SP ready-to-reach performance is received from the performance control unit 120m. When the lamp light emission information of the SP ready-to-reach effect is cleared, the light emission of the light emission mode (light emission pattern (8) shown in FIG. 17) of the SP ready-to-reach effect ends in the lamp 34d.

In the next step S2530-42, the lamp CPU 150a clears the SP reach effect lamp lighting flag in the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2530-43.

In step S2530-43, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the cut-in effect lamp is being emitted while the cut-in effect lamp is being emitted flag is set in the cut-in effect lamp being emitted flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The cut-in effect lamp light emission flag is a flag indicating that the lamp 34c is emitting light in the cut-in effect light emission mode (light emission patterns (15) and (16) shown in FIG. 29). The cut-in lamp light emission flag is set in step S2810-35 of the lamp control timer update process (FIGS. 173 to 180), which will be described later, when the light emission timing of the cut-in effect lamp 34c in the variation has arrived. . The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-44 if the cut-in effect lamp is being lit (S2530-43: Yes), and if the cut-in effect lamp is not being lit (S2530-43: No), proceed to step S2530-50.

In step S2530-44, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the premium cut-in lamp flag is set in the premium cut-in lamp flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The premium cut-in lamp flag is set in step S2530-82, which will be described later, when the background of the cut-in effect is a rainbow background. If the premium cut-in lamp flag is set (S2530-44: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-45, and if the premium cut-in lamp flag is not set (S2530-44: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-45. Proceed to S2530-46.

In step S2530-45, the lamp CPU 150a performs premium cut-in effect lamp control mode determination processing. In the premium cut-in effect lamp control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the premium cut-in effect lamp control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and performs a rainbow-colored background cut based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. The control mode of the lamp 34c for the in effect is determined.

FIG. 169 is a diagram showing a premium cut-in effect lamp control mode determination table. The premium cut-in effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that the lamp/drive control unit 150 can receive from the effect control unit 120m, and the control mode of the lamp 34c for the rainbow-colored background cut-in effect (“End”). ” or “continuation”) are stored. The "end" data indicates that the light emission of the lamp 34c for the rainbow-colored background cut-in effect is immediately terminated when the corresponding effect pattern designation command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the light emission of the lamp 34c for the rainbow-colored background cut-in effect is immediately terminated. This indicates that when a designated command is received, the light emission of the lamp 34c with a rainbow-colored background cut-in effect is continued.

In step S2530-46, the lamp CPU 150a performs cut-in effect lamp control mode determination processing. In the cut-in effect lamp control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the premium cut-in effect lamp control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and selects the cut-in effect lamp 34c based on the type of effect pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Determine the control mode.

FIG. 170 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect lamp control mode determination table. The cut-in effect control mode determination table includes the types of effect pattern designation commands that the lamp/drive control unit 150 can receive from the effect control unit 120m, and the control mode of the cut-in effect lamp 34c (“end” or “continue”). ) are stored. The "end" data indicates that the light emission of the cut-in effect lamp 34c is immediately terminated when the corresponding effect pattern specification command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the emission of the cut-in effect lamp 34c is immediately terminated when the corresponding effect pattern specification command is received. In this case, it is shown that the cut-in effect lamp 34c continues to emit light.

In step S2530-47, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the premium cut-in effect control mode determination process or the cut-in effect lamp control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". . When the control mode is "End" (S2530-47: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to Step S2530-48, and when the control mode is "Continue" (S2530-47: No), the process proceeds to Step S2530-49. move on.

In step S2530-48, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp light emission information for the cut-in effect. The lamp light emission information for the cut-in effect is set in step S2810-37 of the lamp control timer update process (FIGS. 173 to 180), which will be described later, when the light emission timing of the lamp 34c for the cut-in effect in the variation has arrived. Ru. When the lamp light emission information for the cut-in effect is cleared, the lamp 34c finishes emitting light in the light emission mode (light emission patterns (15) and (16) shown in FIG. 29) for the cut-in effect.

In the next step S2530-49, the lamp CPU 150a clears the cut-in effect lamp emission flag in the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2530-50.

In step S2530-50, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the confirmed accessory operation first effect lamp is being emitted flag is set in the confirmed accessory operation first effect lamp emission flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The confirmed accessory action first effect lamp lighting flag is a flag indicating that the lamps 34a and 34b are emitting light in the light emission mode (light emission pattern (17) shown in FIG. 31) of the confirmed accessory action first effect. It is. When the lighting timing of the lamps 34a and 34b of the confirmed accessory action first effect in the fluctuation comes, the confirmed accessory operation first performance lamp light-emitting flag is set in the lamp control timer update process (FIGS. 173 to 180), which will be described later. ) is set in step S2810-41. If the confirmed accessory operation first effect lamp is being emitted light is set (S2530-50: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-51, and the confirmed accessory operation first effect lamp is being emitted flag is set. If not (S2530-50: No), the process advances to step S2530-55.

In step S2530-51, the lamp CPU 150a performs a confirmed accessory operation first performance lamp control mode determination process. In the confirmed accessory operation first performance lamp control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the determined accessory operation first performance lamp control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and determines the performance pattern designation command based on the type of performance pattern designation command in the reception buffer. , determines the control mode of the lamps 34a, 34b for the first performance of the confirmed role object operation.

FIG. 171 is a diagram showing a determined accessory actuation first effect lamp control mode determination table. The confirmed accessory operation first performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that the lamp/drive control unit 150 can receive from the performance control unit 120m, and the lamps 34a and 34b of the confirmed accessory operation first performance. Each set of data indicating a control mode (“end” or “continue”) is stored. The data of "End" indicates that the light emission of the lamps 34a and 34b of the confirmed role object operation first performance is immediately terminated when the corresponding performance pattern designation command is received, and the data of "Continue" indicates that the light emission of the lamps 34a and 34b of the first performance of confirmed role object operation is immediately terminated. Indicates that the lamps 34a and 34b of the confirmed role object operation first effect will continue to emit light when the effect pattern designation command is received.

In the next step S2530-52, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the confirmed accessory operation first effect lamp control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". When the control mode is "End" (S2530-52: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to Step S2530-53, and when the control mode is "Continue" (S2530-52: No), the process proceeds to Step S2530-55. move on.

In step S2530-53, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp light emission information of the confirmed accessory actuation first effect. The lamp light emission information of the confirmed accessory action first performance is determined by the lamp control timer update process (see FIGS. 173 to 180 ) is set in step S2810-43. When the lamp light emission information of the confirmed role object operation first effect is cleared, the light emission of the light emission mode (light emission pattern (17) shown in FIG. 31) of the confirmed role object operation first effect is finished in the lamps 34a and 34b. .

In the next step S2530-54, the lamp CPU 150a clears the confirmed accessory activation first effect lamp lighting flag in the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2530-55.

In step S2530-55, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the confirmed accessory operation second effect lamp is being emitted flag is set in the confirmed accessory operation second effect lamp emission flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The confirmed accessory activation second effect lamp lighting flag is a flag indicating that the lamps 34a and 34b are emitting light in the light emission mode (light emission pattern (18) shown in FIG. 31) of the confirmed accessory activation second effect. It is. When the lighting timing of the lamps 34a and 34b of the confirmed accessory action second performance in the fluctuation comes, the confirmed accessory action second performance lamp light-emitting flag is set in the lamp control timer update process (FIGS. 173 to 180), which will be described later. ) is set in step S2810-47. If the confirmed accessory operation second effect lamp is being emitted light is set (S2530-55: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-56, and the confirmed accessory operation second effect lamp is being emitted flag is set. If not (S2530-55: No), the process advances to step S2530-60.

In step S2530-56, the lamp CPU 150a performs a confirmed accessory operation second performance lamp control mode determination process. In the confirmed accessory operation second performance lamp control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the determined accessory operation second performance lamp control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and determines the performance pattern designation command based on the type of performance pattern designation command in the reception buffer. , determines the control mode of the lamps 34a and 34b for the second performance of the confirmed role object operation.

FIG. 172 is a diagram showing a confirmed accessory actuation second effect lamp control mode determination table. The confirmed accessory operation second performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that the lamp/drive control unit 150 can receive from the performance control unit 120m, and the lamps 34a and 34b of the confirmed accessory operation second performance. Each set of data indicating a control mode (“end” or “continue”) is stored. The "end" data indicates that the light emission of the lamps 34a and 34b of the confirmed role object operation second performance is immediately terminated when the corresponding performance pattern designation command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding Indicates that the lamps 34a and 34b of the confirmed accessory activation second performance will continue to emit light when the performance pattern designation command is received.

In the next step S2530-57, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the confirmed accessory operation second effect lamp control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". When the control mode is "End" (S2530-57: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to Step S2530-58, and when the control mode is "Continue" (S2530-57: No), the process proceeds to Step S2530-60. move on.

In step S2530-58, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp light emission information of the confirmed role object operation second performance. The lamp light emission information of the confirmed accessory action second performance is determined by the lamp control timer update process (FIGS. 173 to 180 ) is set in step S2810-49. When the lamp light emission information of the confirmed role object operation second effect is cleared, the light emission of the light emission mode (light emission pattern (18) shown in FIG. 31) of the confirmed role object operation second effect is finished in the lamps 34a and 34b. .

In the next step S2530-59, the lamp CPU 150a clears the confirmed accessory activation second effect lamp lighting flag in the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2530-60.

In step S2530-60, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a variation start effect pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is a variation start production pattern designation command (S2530-60: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-61, and if it is not a variation start production pattern designation command (S2530-60: No). ), the process proceeds to step S2530-91.

In step S2530-61, the lamp CPU 150a sets the normal variation effect lamp emission flag in the normal variation effect lamp emission flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2530-62, the lamp CPU 150a sets lamp light emission information for the normal variation effect. From now on, in the lamp 34d, the light emission mode of the normal variable effect (light emission pattern (1), (2), (3), (4), (5), or (6) shown in FIG. 10(b)) starts emitting light.

In the next step S2530-63, the lamp CPU 150a analyzes the variation start performance pattern designation command and determines whether there is a step-up performance in the series of performances executed in the variation. If there is a step-up effect (S2530-63: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-64, and if there is no step-up effect (S2530-63: No), the process proceeds to step S2530-66.

In the next step S2530-64, the lamp CPU 150a sets a step-up effect lamp standby flag in the step-up effect lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2530-65, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the light emission timing of the lamp 34c for the step-up effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and calculates the value that is stored in the lamp RAM 150b. Set the step-up effect lamp standby timer counter.

In the next step S2530-66, the lamp CPU 150a analyzes the variation start production pattern designation command and determines whether or not there is a character appearance production in the series of productions executed in the variation. If there is a character appearance effect (S2530-66: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-67, and if there is no character appearance effect (S2530-66: No), the process proceeds to step S2530-71.

In step S2530-67, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the character appearing in the character appearance effect is a premium character. If a premium character appears (S2530-67: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-68, and if a character other than the premium character appears (S2530-67: No), the process proceeds to step S2530-69.

In step S2530-68, the lamp CPU 150a sets a premium character lamp flag in the premium character lamp flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2530-69, the lamp CPU 150a sets a character appearance effect lamp standby flag in the character appearance effect lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2530-70, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the lighting timing of the lamp 34c for the character appearance effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and calculates the value that is stored in the lamp RAM 150b. Set the character appearance lamp standby timer counter.

In the next step S2530-71, the lamp CPU 150a analyzes the effect pattern designation command for starting the variation, and determines whether or not there is a roulette effect among the series of effects to be executed in the variation. If there is a roulette effect (S2530-71: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-72, and if there is no roulette effect (S2530-71: No), the process proceeds to step S2530-74.

In the next step S2530-72, the lamp CPU 150a sets a roulette effect lamp standby flag in the roulette effect lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2530-73, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the light emission timing of the lamp 34c for the roulette effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and stores the value in the lamp RAM 150b. Set on the roulette production lamp standby timer counter.

In the next step S2530-74, the lamp CPU 150a analyzes the variation start performance pattern designation command and determines whether or not there is an SP development promotion performance in the series of performances executed in the variation. If there is an SP development promotion effect (S2530-74: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-75, and if there is no SP development promotion effect (S2530-74: No), the process proceeds to step S2530-77.

In the next step S2530-75, the lamp CPU 150a sets an SP development promotion effect lamp standby flag in the SP development promotion effect lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2530-76, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the light emission timing of the lamp 34c for the SP development promotion effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and calculates the remaining time for the lamp 34c. Set in the SP development promotion lamp standby timer counter in RAM 150b.

In the next step S2530-77, the lamp CPU 150a analyzes the variation start performance pattern designation command and determines whether or not there is an SP development confirmed performance in the series of performances executed in the variation. If there is an SP development confirmation effect (S2530-77: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-78, and if there is no SP development confirmation effect (S2530-77: No), the process proceeds to step S2530-80.

In the next step S2530-78, the lamp CPU 150a sets an SP development confirmed effect lamp standby flag in the SP development confirmed effect lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2530-79, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the lighting timing of the lamp 34c for the SP development confirmation effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and calculates the remaining time for the lamp 34c. Set the SP development confirmation effect lamp standby timer counter in the RAM 150b.

In the next step S2530-80, the lamp CPU 150a analyzes the variation start production pattern designation command and determines whether or not there is a cut-in production in the series of productions to be executed in the variation. If there is a cut-in effect (S2530-80: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-81, and if there is no cut-in effect (S2530-80: No), the process proceeds to step S2530-85.

In step S2530-81, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the background of the cut-in effect is rainbow colored. If the background is rainbow colored (S2530-81: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-82; if the background is not rainbow colored (S2530-81: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-83.

In step S2530-82, the lamp CPU 150a sets a premium cut-in lamp flag in the premium cut-in lamp flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2530-83, the lamp CPU 150a sets a cut-in effect lamp standby flag in the cut-in effect lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2530-84, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the light emission timing of the lamp 34c for the cut-in effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and calculates the value obtained by storing the value in the lamp RAM 150b. Set the cut-in production lamp standby timer counter.

In the next step S2530-85, the lamp CPU 150a analyzes the variation start production pattern designation command and determines whether or not there is a confirmed role object action first production in the series of productions to be executed in the variation. . If there is a confirmed accessory action first performance (S2530-85: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-86, and if there is no confirmed accessory action first performance (S2530-85: No), step S2530- Proceed to 88.

In the next step S2530-86, the lamp CPU 150a sets a confirmed accessory operation first performance lamp standby flag in the determined accessory operation first performance lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2530-87, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the light emission timing of the lamps 34a and 34b for the first performance of the confirmed role object operation, and divides this time into 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The divided value is set in the confirmed accessory operation first performance lamp standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2530-88, the lamp CPU 150a analyzes the variation start production pattern designation command and determines whether or not there is a confirmed role object action second production in the series of productions to be executed in the variation. . If there is a confirmed accessory action second performance (S2530-88: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-89, and if there is no confirmed accessory action second performance (S2530-88: No), step S2530- Proceed to 91.

In the next step S2530-89, the lamp CPU 150a sets a determined accessory operation second performance lamp standby flag in the determined accessory operation second performance lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2530-90, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the light emission timing of the lamps 34a and 34b for the second performance of the confirmed role object operation, and calculates this time in 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The divided value is set in the confirmed accessory operation second effect lamp standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2530-91, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a design-determined performance pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is not a design-determined performance pattern designation command (S2530-91: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-92, and if the command is a design-determined performance pattern designation command (S2530-91: Yes). ), the process proceeds to step S2530-98.

In step S2530-92, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a performance pattern designation command for development to SP reach performance. If the command in the reception buffer is a performance pattern designation command for development to SP reach performance (S2530-92: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-93, and the command is not a performance pattern designation command for development to SP reach performance (S2530-92: Yes). If (S2530-92: No), the process advances to step S2530-95.

In step S2530-93, the lamp CPU 150a sets the SP reach effect lamp emission flag in the SP reach effect lamp emission flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2530-94, the lamp CPU 150a sets the lamp light emission information for the SP reach effect, and proceeds to step S2530-101. After this, the lamp 34d starts emitting light in the light emitting mode of the SP reach effect (light emitting pattern (8) shown in FIG. 17). .

In step S2530-95, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a command for specifying a reach effect effect pattern. If the command in the reception buffer is a command for specifying a reach effect pattern (S2530-95: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-96, and if the command in the reception buffer is not a command for specifying a reach effect pattern (S2530-95: No). , the process advances to step S2530-105.

In step S2530-96, the lamp CPU 150a sets a normal reach effect lamp emission flag in the normal reach effect lamp emission flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2530-97, the lamp CPU 150a sets the lamp light emission information for the normal reach effect, and proceeds to step S2530-103. After this, the lamp 34d starts emitting light in the normal reach performance light emitting mode (light emitting pattern (7) shown in FIG. 15).

In step S2530-98, the lamp CPU 150a sets lamp light emission information for the symbol confirmation effect, and proceeds to step S2530-99. After this, the lamp 34d starts to emit light in the pattern confirmation effect.

In step S2530-99, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the SP ready-to-reach effect lamp is being emitted flag is set in the SP ready-to-reach effect lamp being emitted flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-100 if the SP reach effect lamp is being lit (2530-99: Yes), and if the SP reach effect lamp is not being lit (2530-99: Yes). No), the process advances to step S2530-101.

In step S2530-100, the lamp CPU 150a clears the SP reach effect lamp lighting flag, and proceeds to step S2530-101.

In step S2530-101, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the normal reach effect lamp emission flag is set in the normal reach effect lamp emission flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-102 if the normal reach effect lamp is being lit (S2530-101: Yes), and if the normal reach effect lamp is not being lit (S2530-101: No). , the process advances to step S2530-103.

In step S2530-102, the lamp CPU 150a clears the normal reach effect lamp lighting flag, and proceeds to step S2530-103.

In step S2530-103, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the normal variable effect lamp emission flag is set in the normal variable lamp emission flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-104 if the normal variable effect lamp is being lit (S2530-103: Yes), and if the normal variable effect lamp is not being lit (S2530-103: No), the process advances to step S2530-105.

In step S2530-104, the lamp CPU 150a clears the normal variable effect lamp emission flag, and proceeds to step S2530-105.

In step S2530-105, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is an opening performance pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is an opening performance pattern designation command (S2530-105: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-106, and if it is not an opening performance pattern designation command (S2530-105: No), The process advances to step S2530-107.

In step S2530-106, the lamp CPU 150a sets lamp light emission information for the opening performance. After this, the lamp 34d starts emitting light in the light emitting mode of the opening effect.

In step S2530-107, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a round production pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is a round performance pattern designation command (S2530-107: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-108, and if it is not a round performance pattern designation command (S2530-107: No), The process advances to step S2530-109.

In step S2530-108, the lamp CPU 150a sets lamp light emission information for the round effect. After this, the lamp 34d starts emitting light in the light emission mode of the round effect.

In step S2530-109, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is an ending effect pattern designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is an ending effect pattern specification command (S2530-109: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-110, and if it is not an ending effect pattern specification command (S2530-109: No), The process advances to step S2530-111.

In step S2530-110, the lamp CPU 150a sets lamp light emission information for the ending effect. After this, the lamp 34d starts emitting light in the light emitting mode of the ending effect.

In step S2530-111, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is an effect pattern designation command for pending display change. If the command in the reception buffer is a production pattern specification command for pending display change (S2530-111: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-112, and if the command in the reception buffer is not a production pattern specification command for pending display change (S2530-111). :No), the process advances to step S2530-113.

In step S2530-112, the lamp CPU 150a sets lamp light emission information for the pending display change effect. After this, the lamp 34d starts emitting light in the light emitting mode of the hold display change effect.

In step S2530-113, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a command for specifying a performance pattern for successful rank up. If the command in the reception buffer is a command for specifying a successful performance pattern for rank up (S2530-113: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-114, and if the command in the reception buffer is not a command for specifying a successful performance pattern for rank up (S2530-113). :No), the process advances to step S2530-115.

In step S2530-114, the lamp CPU 150a sets lamp light emission information for a successful rank-up effect. After this, the lamp 34d starts emitting light in a light emitting mode for a successful rank-up effect.

In step S2530-115, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a command for specifying a performance pattern for rank-up failure. If the command in the reception buffer is a performance pattern designation command for rank-up failure (S2530-115: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-116, and if it is not a rank-up failure performance pattern designation command (S2530-115). :No), the process advances to step S2530-117.

In step S2530-116, the lamp CPU 150a sets lamp light emission information for a rank-up failure effect. After this, the lamp 34d starts emitting light in the light emitting mode of the rank-up failure effect.

In step S2530-117, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a stage change performance pattern designation command. When the command in the reception buffer is a stage change performance pattern designation command (S2530-117: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2530-118, and when it is not a stage change performance pattern designation command (S2530-117: No). ), the current lamp emission information setting process ends.

In step S2530-118, the lamp CPU 150a sets lamp light emission information for the stage change performance. After this, the lamp 34d starts emitting light in the light emitting mode of the stage change effect.

In the above lamp light emission information setting process, the normal variation effect lamp control mode determination table shown in FIG. 160 is referred to when a command is received during the execution of the normal variation effect, and the step-up effect lamp control shown in FIG. The mode determination table is referred to when a command is received during execution of a step-up effect, and the normal reach effect lamp control mode determination table shown in FIG. 162 is referenced when a command is received during execution of a normal reach effect, The premium character appearance effect lamp control mode determination table shown in FIG. 163 is referred to when a command is received during the execution of the character appearance effect of a premium character, and the character appearance effect lamp control mode determination table shown in FIG. The roulette effect lamp control mode determination table shown in FIG. 165, which is referred to when a command is received during execution of a character appearance effect for characters A, B, or C, is used when a command is received during execution of a roulette effect. The SP development promotion effect lamp control mode determination table that is referred to and shown in FIG. 166 is referred to when a command is received during the execution of the SP development promotion effect, and the SP development confirmation effect lamp control mode determination table shown in FIG. is referred to when a command is received during the execution of the SP development confirmation effect, and the SP reach effect lamp control mode determination table shown in FIG. 168 is referred to when the command is received during the execution of the SP reach effect, The premium cut-in effect lamp control mode determination table shown in FIG. 169 is referred to when a command is received during the execution of a rainbow-colored background cut-in effect, and the cut-in effect lamp control mode determination table shown in FIG. , the confirmed accessory action first effect lamp control mode determination table shown in FIG. The confirmed accessory action second effect lamp control mode determination table shown in FIG. 172 is referred to when a command is received during execution of the confirmed accessory action second effect.

Here, when comparing the step-up effect lamp control mode determination table of FIG. 161 and the confirmed role object operation second effect lamp control mode determination table of FIG. The data associated with the command is "End", and in the confirmed role object operation second production lamp control mode determination table, the data associated with the commands for starting fluctuation and confirming the symbol is "Continue". It is data.

Further, if the command is for starting fluctuation, in the lamp light emission information setting process, the process advances from step S2530-60: Yes to step S2530-62, and lamp light emission information for the normal variation effect is set. If the command is a symbol-confirmed command, in the lamp-emission information setting process, the process advances from step S2530-91: Yes to step S2530-98, and lamp-emission information for the symbol-confirmation performance is set. Therefore, simultaneously with the end of the light emitting pattern of the step-up performance, the light emitting pattern of starting variation and finalizing the symbol starts in response to the execution of the command for starting variation and finalizing the symbol.

Therefore, if the timing at which the production control unit 120m receives the predetermined command, such as the variation start command or the symbol confirmation command, is during the execution of the step-up production, the lamp 34c ends the light emitting mode of the step-up production, and The lamp 34d emits light in a light emitting manner according to the execution of the variation start command or the symbol confirmation command, and the timing when the production control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the symbol confirmation command is during the execution of the confirmed role object operation second production. If so, the lamps 34a and 34b continue the light emitting mode of the confirmed accessory actuation second effect.

Comparing the SP development promotion effect lamp control mode determination table in FIG. 166 and the confirmed role object operation second effect lamp control mode determination table in FIG. The data that is associated with this is "end" data, and in the confirmed role object operation second production lamp control mode determination table, the data that is associated with the fluctuation start and symbol confirmation commands is "continue" data. It is.

In addition, as described above, when a command to start fluctuation or confirm a symbol is received, lamp illumination information for start of fluctuation or symbol confirmation is set in the lamp emission information setting process (step S2530-62 or step S2530-62). 98), Simultaneously with the end of the light emitting pattern for the SP development promotion effect, the light emitting pattern for starting variation and confirming the symbol starts in response to the execution of the command for starting variation and confirming the symbol.

Therefore, if the timing at which the performance control unit 120m receives the predetermined command, such as the fluctuation start command or the symbol confirmation command, is when the SP development stimulation performance is being executed, the lamp 34c ends the light emitting mode of the SP development stimulation performance. Then, the lamp 34d emits light in a light emitting manner according to the execution of the fluctuation start command or the symbol confirmation command, and the timing when the production control unit 120m receives the fluctuation start command or the symbol confirmation command is the timing of the confirmation role object operation second production. If it is being executed, the lamps 34a, 34b continue the light emitting mode of the confirmed accessory actuation second effect.

Comparing the SP development confirmed effect lamp control mode determination table in FIG. 167 and the confirmed role object operation second effect lamp control mode determination table in FIG. The data that is associated with this is "end" data, and in the confirmed role object operation second production lamp control mode determination table, the data that is associated with the fluctuation start and symbol confirmation commands is "continue" data. It is.

In addition, as described above, when a command to start fluctuation or confirm a symbol is received, lamp illumination information for start of fluctuation or symbol confirmation is set in the lamp emission information setting process (step S2530-62 or step S2530-62). 98), Simultaneously with the end of the light emitting pattern of the SP development confirmed performance performance, the light emitting pattern of variation start and symbol confirmation starts in response to the execution of the variation start and symbol confirmation command.

Therefore, if the timing at which the production control unit 120m receives the predetermined commands, such as the fluctuation start command or the symbol confirmation command, is when the SP development confirmation production is being executed, the lamp 34c ends the light emitting mode of the SP development confirmation production. Then, the lamp 34d emits light in a light emitting manner according to the execution of the fluctuation start command or the symbol confirmation command, and the timing when the production control unit 120m receives the fluctuation start command or the symbol confirmation command is the timing of the confirmation role object operation second production. If it is being executed, the lamps 34a, 34b continue the light emitting mode of the confirmed accessory actuation second performance.

Comparing the cut-in effect lamp control mode determination table in FIG. 170 and the confirmed role object operation second effect lamp control mode determination table in FIG. The data that is attached is "End" data, and in the confirmed role object operation second production lamp control mode determination table, the data that is associated with the commands for starting fluctuation and confirming the symbol is "Continue" data. .

In addition, as described above, when a command to start fluctuation or confirm a symbol is received, lamp illumination information for start of fluctuation or symbol confirmation is set in the lamp emission information setting process (step S2530-62 or step S2530-62). 98), Simultaneously with the end of the light emitting pattern of the cut-in effect, the light emitting pattern of starting variation and finalizing the symbol starts in response to the execution of the command for starting variation and finalizing the symbol.

Therefore, if the timing when the production control unit 120m receives the predetermined command, ie, the variation start command or the symbol confirmation command, is when the cut-in production is being executed, the lamp 34c ends the light emitting mode of the cut-in production, and The lamp 34d emits light in a light emitting manner according to the execution of the variation start command or the symbol confirmation command, and the timing when the production control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the symbol confirmation command is during the execution of the confirmed role object operation second production. If so, the lamps 34a and 34b continue the light emitting mode of the confirmed accessory actuation second effect.

Comparing the premium character appearance effect lamp control mode determination table in FIG. 163 and the confirmed role object operation second effect lamp control mode determination table in FIG. The data that is associated with this is "end" data, and in the confirmed role object operation second production lamp control mode determination table, the data that is associated with the fluctuation start and symbol confirmation commands is "continue" data. It is.

In addition, as described above, when a command to start fluctuation or confirm a symbol is received, lamp illumination information for start of fluctuation or symbol confirmation is set in the lamp emission information setting process (step S2530-62 or step S2530-62). 98), Simultaneously with the end of the light emitting pattern of the character appearance performance of the premium character, the light emitting pattern of the start of variation and confirmation of the symbol starts in response to the execution of the command for start of variation and confirmation of the symbol.

Therefore, if the timing at which the production control unit 120m receives the predetermined command, such as the variation start command or the symbol confirmation command, is during the execution of the character appearance production of the premium character, the lamp 34c will emit light for the character appearance production of the premium character. After completing the mode, the lamp 34d emits light in a light emission mode according to the execution of the variation start command or the symbol confirmation command, and the timing when the production control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the symbol confirmation command is the confirmation accessory operation. When the second effect is being executed, the lamps 34a and 34b continue the light emission mode of the confirmed role object operation second effect.

Comparing the premium cut-in effect lamp control mode determination table in FIG. 169 and the confirmed role object operation second effect lamp control mode determination table in FIG. The data that is associated with this is "end" data, and in the confirmed role object operation second production lamp control mode determination table, the data that is associated with the fluctuation start and symbol confirmation commands is "continue" data. It is.

In addition, as described above, when a command to start fluctuation or confirm a symbol is received, lamp illumination information for start of fluctuation or symbol confirmation is set in the lamp emission information setting process (step S2530-62 or step S2530-62). 98), Simultaneously with the end of the light emitting pattern for the rainbow background cut-in effect, the light emitting pattern for starting variation and finalizing the symbol starts in response to the execution of the command for starting variation and finalizing the symbol.

Therefore, if the timing at which the production control unit 120m receives the predetermined command, ie, the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command, is during the execution of the rainbow-colored background cut-in production, the lamp 34c will cause the rainbow-colored background cut-in production to start. The timing at which the lamp 34d emits light in a light emitting manner according to the execution of the variation start command or the symbol confirmation command after the light emission mode is completed, and the production control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the symbol confirmation command is the confirmed role. When the object action second effect is being executed, the lamps 34a, 34b continue the light emission mode of the confirmed role object action second effect.

173 to 180 are flowcharts showing details of the lamp control timer update process (step S2810 in FIG. 81) of the lamp/drive control section 150. In FIG. 173, the lamp CPU 150a updates the timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b, which is referenced in the lamp light emission information setting process, by adding 1 to the timer counter if it is not 0.

In the next step S2810-2, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the step-up effect lamp standby flag is set in the step-up effect lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the step-up effect lamp standby flag is set (S2810-2: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-3, and if the step-up effect lamp standby flag is not set (S2810-2: No). , the process advances to step S2810-8.

In step S2810-3, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the step-up effect lamp standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the step-up effect lamp standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-3: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-4, and if the step-up effect lamp standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2810-3: Yes) , the process advances to step S2810-8.

In step S2810-4, the lamp CPU 150a clears the step-up effect lamp standby flag.

In the next step S2810-5, the lamp CPU 150a sets a step-up effect lamp emission flag in the step-up effect lamp emission flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2810-6, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the light emission end timing of the light emission mode of the step-up effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and calculates the remaining time for the lamp. Set the step-up effect lamp end standby timer counter in the RAM 150b.

In the next step S2810-7, the lamp CPU 150a sets lamp light emission information for the step-up effect. After this, the lamp 34c starts emitting light in the step-up effect light emission mode.

In the next step S2810-8, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the character appearance effect lamp standby flag is set in the character appearance effect lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the character appearance effect lamp standby flag is set (S2810-8: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-9, and if the character appearance effect lamp standby flag is not set (S2810-8: No). , the process advances to step S2810-14.

In step S2810-9, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the character appearance effect lamp standby timer counter in the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the character appearance effect lamp standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-9: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-10, and if the character appearance effect lamp standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2810-9: Yes) , the process advances to step S2810-14.

In step S2810-10, the lamp CPU 150a clears the character appearance effect lamp standby flag.

In the next step S2810-11, the lamp CPU 150a sets a character appearance lamp lighting flag in the character appearance lamp lighting flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2810-12, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the light emission end timing of the light emission mode of the character appearance effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and calculates the remaining time for the lamp. Set the character appearance effect lamp end standby timer counter in the RAM 150b.

In the next step S2810-13, the lamp CPU 150a sets lamp light emission information for the character appearance effect. After this, the lamp 34c starts emitting light in the light emitting mode of the character appearance effect.

In the next step S2810-14, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the roulette effect lamp standby flag is set in the roulette effect lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the roulette effect lamp standby flag is set (S2810-14: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-15, and if the roulette effect lamp standby flag is not set (S2810-14: No), the process proceeds to step S2810-15. Proceed to S2810-20.

In step S2810-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the roulette effect lamp standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the roulette effect lamp standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-15: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-16, and if the roulette effect lamp standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2810-15: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2810-16. Proceed to S2810-20.

In step S2810-16, the lamp CPU 150a clears the roulette effect lamp standby flag.

In the next step S2810-17, the lamp CPU 150a sets a roulette effect lamp light emission flag in the roulette effect lamp light emission flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2810-18, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the light emission end timing of the light emission mode of the roulette effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and stores the value in the lamp RAM 150b. Set the roulette production lamp end wait timer counter.

In the next step S2810-19, the lamp CPU 150a sets lamp light emission information for the roulette effect. After this, the lamp 34c starts emitting light in the light emitting mode of the roulette effect.

In the next step S2810-20, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the SP development promotion effect lamp standby flag is set in the SP development promotion effect lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the SP development promotion production ramp standby flag is set (S2810-20: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-21, and if the SP development promotion production ramp standby flag is not set (S2810-20: No), the process advances to step S2810-26.

In step S2810-21, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the SP development promotion effect lamp standby timer counter in the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the SP development promotion effect lamp standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-21: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-22, and if the SP development promotion effect lamp standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2810-21: Yes), proceed to step S2810-26.

In step S2810-22, the lamp CPU 150a clears the SP development promotion effect lamp standby flag.

In the next step S2810-23, the lamp CPU 150a sets the SP development promotion lamp emission flag in the SP development promotion lamp emission flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2810-24, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the light emission end timing of the light emission mode of the SP development promotion effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. Set in the SP development incitement effect lamp end standby timer counter in the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2810-25, the lamp CPU 150a sets lamp light emission information for the SP development promotion effect. After this, the lamp 34c starts emitting light in the light emitting mode of the SP development promotion effect.

In the next step S2810-26, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the SP development confirmed effect lamp standby flag is set in the SP development confirmed effect lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the SP development confirmed effect lamp standby flag is set (S2810-26: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-27, and if the SP development confirmed effect lamp standby flag is not set (S2810-26: No), the process advances to step S2810-32.

In step S2810-27, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the SP development confirmed effect lamp standby timer counter in the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the SP development confirmed effect lamp standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-27: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-28, and if the SP development confirmed effect lamp standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2810-27: Yes), proceed to step S2810-32.

In step S2810-28, the lamp CPU 150a clears the SP development confirmed effect lamp standby flag.

In the next step S2810-29, the lamp CPU 150a sets the SP development confirmed effect lamp emission flag in the SP development confirmed effect lamp emission flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2810-30, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the light emission end timing of the light emission mode of the SP development confirmation effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. Set in the SP development confirmed production lamp end standby timer counter in the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2810-31, the lamp CPU 150a sets lamp light emission information for the SP development confirmation effect. After this, the lamp 34c starts emitting light in the light emitting mode of the SP development confirmation effect.

In the next step S2810-32, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the cut-in effect lamp standby flag is set in the cut-in effect lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the cut-in effect lamp standby flag is set (S2810-32: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-33, and if the cut-in effect lamp standby flag is not set (S2810-32: No). , proceed to step S2810-38.

In step S2810-33, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the cut-in effect lamp standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the cut-in effect lamp standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-33: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-34, and if the cut-in effect lamp standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2810-33: Yes) , proceed to step S2810-38.

In step S2810-34, the lamp CPU 150a clears the cut-in effect lamp standby flag.

In the next step S2810-35, the lamp CPU 150a sets a cut-in effect lamp emission flag in the cut-in effect lamp emission flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2810-36, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the light emission end timing of the light emission mode of the cut-in effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and calculates the remaining time for the lamp. Set the cut-in effect lamp end standby timer counter in the RAM 150b.

In the next step S2810-37, the lamp CPU 150a sets lamp light emission information for the cut-in effect. After this, the lamp 34c starts emitting light in the cut-in effect mode.

In the next step S2810-38, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the confirmed accessory operation first effect lamp standby flag is set in the confirmed accessory operation first effect lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. When the confirmed accessory operation first production lamp standby flag is set (S2810-38: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-39, and determines that the confirmed accessory operation first production lamp standby flag is not set. If (S2810-38: No), the process advances to step S2810-44.

In step S2810-39, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the confirmed accessory operation first performance lamp standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. When the confirmed accessory operation first performance lamp standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-39: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-40, and determines that the determined accessory operation first performance lamp standby timer counter is greater than 0. If so (S2810-39: Yes), the process advances to step S2810-44.

In step S2810-40, the lamp CPU 150a clears the confirmed accessory activation first effect lamp standby flag.

In the next step S2810-41, the lamp CPU 150a sets a confirmed accessory operation first effect lamp emission flag in the confirmed accessory operation first effect lamp emission flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2810-42, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the light emission end timing of the light emission mode of the confirmed role object operation first performance, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The obtained value is set in the confirmed accessory activation first performance lamp end standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2810-43, the lamp CPU 150a sets the lamp light emission information of the confirmed accessory actuation first performance. After this, the lamps 34a and 34b start emitting light in the light emission mode of the confirmed role object operation first effect.

In the next step S2810-44, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the confirmed accessory operation second effect lamp standby flag is set in the confirmed accessory operation second effect lamp standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. When the confirmed accessory operation second performance lamp standby flag is set (S2810-44: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-45, and determines that the confirmed accessory operation second performance lamp standby flag is not set. If (S2810-44: No), the process advances to step S2810-50.

In step S2810-45, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the confirmed accessory operation second effect lamp standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. When the confirmed accessory operation second performance lamp standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-45: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-46, and determines that the determined accessory operation second performance lamp standby timer counter is greater than 0. If so (S2810-45: Yes), the process advances to step S2810-50.

In step S2810-46, the lamp CPU 150a clears the confirmed accessory activation second effect lamp standby flag.

In the next step S2810-47, the lamp CPU 150a sets a confirmed accessory operation second effect lamp emission flag in the confirmed accessory operation second effect lamp emission flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2810-48, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the light emission end timing of the light emission mode of the confirmed role object activation second performance, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The obtained value is set in the confirmed accessory activation second performance lamp end standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2810-49, the lamp CPU 150a sets lamp light emission information for the confirmed accessory actuation second performance. After this, the lamps 34a and 34b start emitting light in the light emission mode of the confirmed role object operation second effect.

In step S2810-50, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether or not the step-up effect lamp is being lit in the step-up effect lamp being lit flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-51 if the step-up effect lamp is being emitted (S2810-50: Yes), and if the step-up effect lamp is not being emitted (S2810-50: No), the process advances to step S2810-54.

In step S2810-51, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the step-up effect lamp end standby timer counter in the lamp RAM 150b is greater than 0. If the step-up effect lamp end standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-51: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-52, and if the step-up effect lamp end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2810-51: Yes), proceed to step S2810-54.

In step S2810-52, the lamp CPU 150a clears the step-up effect lamp lighting flag.

In step S2810-53, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp light emission information of the step-up effect. When the lamp light emission information of the step-up effect is cleared, the light emission of the light emission mode of the step-up effect is finished in the lamp 33c.

In step S2810-54, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the character appearance effect lamp is being lit in the character appearance lamp emission flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-55 if the character appearance effect lamp is being lit (S2810-54: Yes), and if the character appearance effect lamp is not being lit (S2810-54: No), proceed to step S2810-60.

In step S2810-55, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the character appearance effect lamp end standby timer counter in the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the character appearance effect lamp end standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-55: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-56, and if the character appearance effect lamp end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2810-55: Yes), proceed to step S2810-60.

In step S2810-56, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the premium character lamp flag is set in the premium character lamp flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the premium character lamp flag is set (S2810-56: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-57; if the premium character lamp flag is not set (S2810-56: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-57. Proceed to step 58.

In step S2810-57, the lamp CPU 150a clears the premium character lamp flag.

In step S2810-58, the lamp CPU 150a clears the character appearance effect lamp lighting flag.

In step S2810-59, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp light emission information for the character appearance effect. When the lamp light emission information for the character appearance effect is cleared, the lamp 33c finishes emitting light in the light emission mode for the character appearance effect.

In step S2810-60, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether or not the roulette effect lamp is being illuminated flag is set in the roulette effect lamp emission flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the roulette effect lamp lighting flag is set (S2810-60: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-61, and if the roulette effect lamp emission flag is not set (S2810-60: No). , proceed to step S2810-64.

In step S2810-61, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the roulette effect lamp end standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than 0. If the roulette effect lamp end standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-61: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-62, and if the roulette effect lamp end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2810-61: Yes) , proceed to step S2810-64.

In step S2810-62, the lamp CPU 150a clears the roulette effect lamp lighting flag.

In step S2810-63, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp light emission information for the roulette performance. When the lamp light emission information of the roulette effect is cleared, the light emission of the light emission mode of the roulette effect is finished in the lamp 33c.

In step S2810-64, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the SP development promotion lamp emission flag is set in the SP development promotion lamp emission flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-65 if the SP development promotion lamp is being lit (S2810-64: Yes), and if the SP development promotion lamp is not being lit (S2810-64). 64: No), the process advances to step S2810-68.

In step S2810-65, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the SP development promotion effect lamp end standby timer counter in the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the SP development promotion ramp end standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-65: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-66, and if the SP development promotion ramp end wait timer counter is greater than 0 (S2810- 65: Yes), proceed to step S2810-68.

In step S2810-66, the lamp CPU 150a clears the SP development promotion lamp lighting flag.

In step S2810-67, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp light emission information for the SP development promotion effect. When the lamp light emission information of the SP development promotion effect is cleared, the light emission of the light emission mode of the SP development promotion effect is finished in the lamp 33c.

In step S2810-68, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the SP development confirmed effect lamp is being emitted flag is set in the SP development confirmed effect lamp being emitted flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-69 when the SP development confirmed effect lamp is being emitted flag is set (S2810-68: Yes), and when the SP development confirmed effect lamp is not emitted flag is set (S2810- 68: No), the process advances to step S2810-72.

In step S2810-69, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the SP development confirmed effect lamp end standby timer counter in the lamp RAM 150b is greater than 0. If the SP development confirmed effect lamp end standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-69: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-70, and if the SP development confirmed effect lamp end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2810- 69: Yes), proceed to step S2810-72.

In step S2810-70, the lamp CPU 150a clears the SP development confirmed effect lamp lighting flag.

In step S2810-71, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp light emission information of the SP development confirmed effect. When the lamp light emission information of the SP development confirmed effect is cleared, the light emission of the light emission mode of the SP development confirmed effect is finished in the lamp 33c.

In step S2810-72, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the cut-in effect lamp is being emitted while the cut-in effect lamp is being emitted flag is set in the cut-in effect lamp being emitted flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-73 if the cut-in effect lamp is being lit (S2810-72: Yes), and if the cut-in effect lamp is not being lit (S2810-72: No), proceed to step S2810-78.

In step S2810-73, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the cut-in effect lamp end standby timer counter in the lamp RAM 150b is greater than 0. If the cut-in effect lamp end standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-73: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-74, and if the cut-in effect lamp end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2810-73: Yes), proceed to step S2810-78.

In step S2810-74, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the premium cut-in lamp flag is set in the premium cut-in lamp flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the premium cut-in lamp flag is set (S2810-74: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-75, and if the premium cut-in lamp flag is not set (S2810-74: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-75. Proceed to S2810-76.

In step S2810-75, the lamp CPU 150a clears the premium cut-in lamp flag.

In step S2810-76, the lamp CPU 150a clears the cut-in effect lamp lighting flag.

In step S2810-77, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp light emission information for the cut-in effect. When the lamp light emission information for the cut-in effect is cleared, the lamp 33c finishes emitting light in the light emission mode for the cut-in effect.

In step S2810-78, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the confirmed accessory operation first effect lamp is being emitted flag is set in the confirmed accessory operation first effect lamp emission flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the confirmed accessory operation first effect lamp is being emitted light is set (S2810-78: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-79, and the confirmed accessory operation first effect lamp is being emitted flag is set. If not (S2810-78: No), the process advances to step S2810-82.

In step S2810-79, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the determined accessory actuation first performance lamp end standby timer counter in the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. When the confirmed accessory operation first performance lamp end standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-79: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-80, and sets the determined accessory operation first performance lamp end standby timer counter to 0. If it is larger (S2810-79: Yes), the process advances to step S2810-82.

In step S2810-80, the lamp CPU 150a clears the confirmed accessory activation first effect lamp lighting flag.

In step S2810-81, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp light emission information of the confirmed accessory actuation first performance. When the lamp light emission information of the confirmed accessory action first performance is cleared, the light emission of the light emission mode of the determined accessory action first performance is finished in the lamps 33a and 33b.

In step S2810-82, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the confirmed accessory operation second effect lamp is being emitted flag is set in the confirmed accessory operation second effect lamp emission flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. When the confirmed accessory operation second effect lamp is being emitted light flag is set (S2810-82: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-83, and sets the confirmed accessory operation second effect lamp emission flag. If not (S2810-82: No), the current lamp control timer update process ends.

In step S2810-83, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the determined accessory actuation second performance lamp end standby timer counter in the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. When the confirmed accessory operation second performance lamp end standby timer counter is 0 (S2810-83: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2810-84, and sets the determined accessory operation second performance lamp end standby timer counter to 0. If it is larger (S2810-83: Yes), the current lamp control timer update process ends.

In step S2810-84, the lamp CPU 150a clears the confirmed accessory activation second effect lamp lighting flag.

In step S2810-85, the lamp CPU 150a clears the lamp light emission information of the confirmed accessory actuation second effect. When the lamp light emission information of the confirmed accessory action second performance is cleared, the light emission of the light emission mode of the determined accessory action second performance is completed in the lamps 33a and 33b.

181 to 188 are flowcharts showing details of the accessory drive information setting process (step S2540 in FIG. 78) of the lamp/drive control section 150. In FIG. 181, the lamp CPU 150a confirms whether or not the step-up performance accessory operation flag is set in the step-up performance accessory operation flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b (S2540-6). The step-up effect accessory operating flag is a flag indicating that the movable accessory 33c is operating in the step-up effect operation mode (the first operation mode shown in FIGS. 19 and 4). The step-up accessory operating flag is set in step S2820-5 of the accessory control timer update process (FIGS. 199 to 206), which will be described later, when the operation timing of the movable accessory 33c of the step-up performance in the variation has arrived. , is set. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-7 when the step-up performance accessory is in operation flag is set (S2540-6: Yes), and when the step-up performance accessory is in operation flag is not set (S2540- 6: No), the process proceeds to step S2540-16.

In step S2540-7, the lamp CPU 150a performs step-up performance accessory control mode determination processing. In the step-up performance accessory control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the step-up performance accessory control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and moves the step-up performance based on the type of performance pattern designation command in the reception buffer. The control mode of the accessory 33c is determined.

FIG. 189 is a diagram showing a step-up performance accessory control mode determination table. The step-up performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that the lamp/drive control unit 150 can receive from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode (“end” or “end”) of the movable accessory 33c of the step-up performance. Each set of data indicating "continuation") is stored. The "end" data indicates that the action of the movable accessory 33c of the step-up performance is immediately terminated when the corresponding production pattern specification command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding production pattern specification command is immediately terminated. , it indicates that the movement of the movable accessory 33c of the step-up performance is to be continued.

In the next step S2540-8, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the step-up performance accessory control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". When the control mode is "end" (S2540-8: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-9, and when the control mode is "continue" (S2540-8: No), the process proceeds to step S2540-16. move on.

In step S2540-9, the lamp CPU 150a clears the accessory drive information for the step-up performance. The accessory drive information for the step-up performance is stored in step S2820-7 of the accessory control timer update process (FIGS. 199 to 206), which will be described later, when the operation timing of the movable accessory 33c for the step-up performance in the variation has arrived. It is set in . When the accessory drive information for the step-up performance is cleared, the operation of the step-up performance operation mode (the first operation mode shown in FIGS. 19 and 4) ends in the movable accessory 33c.

In the next step S2540-10, the lamp CPU 150a clears the step-up effect accessory operation flag in the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2540-16.

In step S2540-16, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the character appearance performance accessory operation flag is set in the character appearance performance accessory operation flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b (S2540-16). The character appearance effect accessory in operation flag is a flag indicating that the movable accessory 33c is in operation in the operation mode of the character appearance effect (the first operation mode shown in FIGS. 23 and 4). The character appearing accessory operating flag is set in step S2820-11 of accessory control timer update processing (FIGS. 199 to 206), which will be described later, when the operation timing of the movable accessory 33c for the character appearance effect in the variation has arrived. , is set. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-17 if the character appearance performance accessory is in operation flag is set (S2540-16: Yes), and if the character appearance performance accessory is in operation flag is not set (S2540- 16: No), the process advances to step S2540-23.

In step S2540-17, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the premium character accessory flag is set in the premium character accessory flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The premium character accessory flag is set in step S2540-68, which will be described later, when the character appearing in the character appearance effect is a premium character. If the premium character accessory flag is set (S2540-17: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-18; if the premium character accessory flag is not set (S2540-17: No), the lamp CPU 150a advances to step S2540-18. Proceed to S2540-19.

In step S2540-18, the lamp CPU 150a performs premium character appearance performance accessory control mode determination processing. In the premium character appearance performance accessory control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the premium character appearance performance accessory control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and determines the premium character appearance based on the type of performance pattern designation command in the reception buffer. The control mode of the movable accessory 33c for character appearance production is determined.

FIG. 190 is a diagram showing a premium character appearance performance accessory control mode determination table. The premium character appearance performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that the lamp/drive control unit 150 can receive from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode of the movable accessory 33c for the character appearance performance in which the premium character appears. Each set of data indicating (“end” or “continue”) is stored. The data of "End" indicates that the action of the movable accessory 33c of the character appearance production in which the premium character appears will be immediately ended when the corresponding production pattern designation command is received, and the data of "Continue" indicates that the operation of the movable accessory 33c of the character appearance production in which the premium character appears will be immediately terminated. This indicates that when receiving the production pattern designation command, the movement of the movable accessory 33c of the character appearance production in which the premium character appears is continued.

In step S2540-19, the lamp CPU 150a performs character appearance performance accessory control mode determination processing. In the character appearance performance accessory control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the premium character appearance performance accessory control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and selects characters A and B based on the type of performance pattern designation command in the reception buffer. , or determines the control mode of the movable accessory 33c in the character appearance production of C.

FIG. 191 is a diagram showing a character appearance performance accessory control mode determination table. The character appearance performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that the lamp/drive control unit 150 can receive from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode of the movable accessory 33c of the character appearance performance (“end” or “ Each set of data indicating "continuation") is stored. The "end" data indicates that the action of the movable accessory 33c of the character appearance production is immediately terminated when the corresponding production pattern specification command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding production pattern specification command is immediately terminated. , it indicates that the movement of the movable accessory 33c of the character appearance effect is to be continued.

In step S2540-20, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the premium character appearance effect control mode determination process or the character appearance effect accessory control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". do. If the control mode is "End" (S2540-20: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to Step S2540-21, and if the control mode is "Continue" (S2540-20: No), the process proceeds to Step S2540-22. move on.

In step S2540-21, the lamp CPU 150a clears the accessory drive information for the character appearance effect. The accessory drive information for the character appearance effect is stored in step S2820-13 of the accessory control timer update process (FIGS. 199 to 206), which will be described later, when the timing of the movement of the movable accessory 33c for the character appearance effect in the variation has arrived. It is set in . When the accessory drive information for the character appearance performance is cleared, the operation of the character appearance performance operation mode (the first operation mode shown in FIGS. 21 and 4) ends in the movable accessory 33c.

In the next step S2540-22, the lamp CPU 150a clears the character appearance effect accessory operation flag in the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2540-23.

In step S2540-23, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the roulette performance accessory is in operation flag is set in the roulette performance accessory in operation flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b (S2540-23). The roulette performance accessory operating flag is a flag indicating that the movable accessory 33c is operating in the roulette performance operation mode (first operation mode shown in FIGS. 23 and 4). The roulette accessory operating flag is set in step S2820-17 of the accessory control timer update process (FIGS. 199 to 206), which will be described later, when the operation timing of the movable accessory 33c for the roulette performance in the variation has arrived. be done. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-24 when the roulette performance accessory operation flag is set (S2540-23: Yes), and when the roulette performance accessory operation flag is not set (S2540-23: No), the process advances to step S2540-28.

In step S2540-24, the lamp CPU 150a performs roulette performance accessory control mode determination processing. In the roulette performance accessory control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the roulette performance accessory control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and selects the roulette performance movable accessory 33c based on the type of performance pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Determine the control mode.

FIG. 192 is a diagram showing a roulette performance accessory control mode determination table. The roulette performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that the lamp/drive control unit 150 can receive from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode (“end” or “continue”) of the movable accessory 33c of the roulette performance. ) are stored. The "end" data indicates that the operation of the movable accessory 33c of the roulette performance is immediately terminated when the corresponding performance pattern specification command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the operation of the movable accessory 33c of the roulette performance is immediately terminated when the corresponding performance pattern specification command is received. When received, it indicates that the movement of the movable accessory 33c of the roulette performance is to be continued.

In the next step S2540-25, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the roulette performance accessory control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". When the control mode is "End" (S2540-25: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to Step S2540-26, and when the control mode is "Continue" (S2540-25: No), the process proceeds to Step S2540-28. move on.

In step S2540-26, the lamp CPU 150a clears the accessory drive information for the roulette effect. The accessory drive information for the roulette performance is determined in step S2820-19 of the accessory control timer update process (FIGS. 199 to 206), which will be described later, when the operation timing of the movable accessory 33c for the roulette performance in the variation has arrived. Set. When the accessory drive information for the roulette performance is cleared, the operation of the roulette performance operation mode (the first operation mode shown in FIGS. 23 and 4) ends in the movable accessory 33c.

In the next step S2540-27, the lamp CPU 150a clears the roulette effect accessory operation flag in the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2540-28.

In step S2540-28, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the SP development promotion accessory in operation flag is set in the SP development promotion performance accessory in operation flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The flag indicating that the movable accessories 33c and 33d are in operation in the operation mode of the SP development promotion performance (the second operation mode shown in FIGS. 25 and 5) is the SP development promotion performance accessory operation flag. . The SP development promotion accessory operation flag is set in the step of the accessory control timer update process (FIGS. 199 to 206), which will be described later, when the movement timing of the movable accessories 33c and 33d of the SP development promotion performance in the fluctuation comes. Set in S2820-23. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-29 when the SP development promotion performance accessory is in operation flag is set (S2540-28: Yes), and when the SP development stimulation performance accessory is in operation flag is not set ( S2540-28: No), proceed to step S2540-33.

In step S2540-29, the lamp CPU 150a performs SP development promotion performance accessory control mode determination processing. In the SP development stimulation performance accessory control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the SP development stimulation performance accessory control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and determines the SP development stimulation performance based on the type of performance pattern designation command in the reception buffer. The control mode of the movable accessories 33c and 33d for the performance is determined.

FIG. 193 is a diagram showing a SP development promotion performance accessory control mode determination table. The SP development stimulation performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that the lamp/drive control unit 150 can receive from the performance control unit 120m, and the control modes of the movable accessories 33c and 33d of the SP development stimulation performance (“ Each set of data indicating "end" or "continue" is stored. The "end" data indicates that the movement of the movable accessories 33c and 33d of the SP development inciting performance is immediately terminated when the corresponding performance pattern designation command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the movement of the movable accessories 33c and 33d of the SP development inciting performance is immediately terminated. This indicates that when a pattern designation command is received, the movement of the movable accessories 33c and 33d of the SP development promotion effect is continued.

In the next step S2540-30, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the SP development promotion performance accessory control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". If the control mode is "End" (S2540-30: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to Step S2540-31, and if the control mode is "Continue" (S2540-30: No), the process proceeds to Step S2540-33. move on.

In step S2540-31, the lamp CPU 150a clears the accessory drive information for the SP development promotion performance. The accessory drive information for the SP development stimulation performance is used in the accessory control timer update process (FIGS. 199 to 206), which will be described later, when the movement timing of the movable accessories 33c and 33d for the SP development stimulation performance in the fluctuation has arrived. Set in step S2820-25. When the accessory drive information for the SP development promotion effect is cleared, the operation of the SP development promotion effect (the second operation mode shown in FIGS. 25 and 5) ends in the movable accessories 33c and 33d.

In the next step S2540-32, the lamp CPU 150a clears the SP development promotion effect accessory operation flag in the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2540-33.

In step S2540-33, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the SP development confirmed performance accessory is in operation flag is set in the SP development confirmed performance accessory in operation flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The SP development confirmed production accessories in operation flag is a flag indicating that the movable accessories 33c and 33d are operating in the operation mode of the SP development confirmed production (the second operation mode shown in FIGS. 27 and 5). . When the movement timing of the movable accessories 33c and 33d of the SP development confirmed performance in the change comes, the SP development confirmed accessory operating flag is set in the step of the accessory control timer update process (FIGS. 199 to 206) described later. Set in S2820-29. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-34 when the SP development confirmed performance accessory is in operation flag is set (S2540-33: Yes), and when the SP development confirmed performance accessory is in operation flag is not set ( S2540-33: No), proceed to step S2540-43.

In step S2540-34, the lamp CPU 150a performs SP development confirmed performance accessory control mode determination processing. In the SP development confirmed performance accessory control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the SP development confirmed performance accessory control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and determines the SP development confirmed based on the type of performance pattern designation command in the reception buffer. The control mode of the movable accessories 33c and 33d for the performance is determined.

FIG. 194 is a diagram showing the SP development confirmed performance accessory control mode determination table. The SP development confirmed performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that the lamp/drive control unit 150 can receive from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode of the movable accessories 33c and 33d of the SP development confirmed performance (" Each set of data indicating "end" or "continue" is stored. The "end" data indicates that the movement of the movable accessories 33c and 33d of the SP development confirmed production is immediately terminated when the corresponding production pattern designation command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the movement of the movable accessories 33c and 33d of the SP development confirmed production is immediately terminated. Indicates that when a pattern designation command is received, the movement of the movable accessories 33c and 33d of the SP development confirmation effect is continued.

In the next step S2540-35, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the SP development confirmed performance accessory control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". When the control mode is "End" (S2540-35: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to Step S2540-36, and when the control mode is "Continue" (S2540-35: No), the process proceeds to Step S2540-43. move on.

In step S2540-36, the lamp CPU 150a clears the accessory drive information for the SP development confirmation performance. The accessory drive information for the SP development confirmed performance is used in the accessory control timer update process (FIGS. 199 to 206), which will be described later, when the movement timing of the movable accessories 33c and 33d for the SP development confirmed performance in the change comes. Set in step S2820-31. When the accessory drive information for the SP development confirmed performance is cleared, the operation of the SP development confirmed performance (second operation mode shown in FIGS. 27 and 5) ends in the movable accessories 33c and 33d.

In the next step S2540-37, the lamp CPU 150a clears the SP development confirmed effect accessory operation flag in the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2540-43.

In step S2540-43, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether or not the cut-in performance accessory operation flag is set in the cut-in performance accessory operation flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The cut-in performance accessories in operation flag is a flag indicating that the movable accessories 33c and 33d are operating in the cut-in performance operation mode (the second operation mode shown in FIGS. 29 and 5). The cut-in accessory operation flag is set at step S2820 of the accessory control timer update process (FIGS. 199 to 206), which will be described later, when the timing for the movement of the movable accessories 33c and 33d for the cut-in performance in the variation has arrived. Set at 35. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-44 if the cut-in performance accessory is in operation flag is set (S2540-43: Yes), and if the cut-in performance accessory is not in operation flag is set (S2540-43: Yes). 43: No), the process advances to step S2540-50.

In step S2540-44, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the premium cut-in accessory flag is set in the premium cut-in accessory flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The premium cut-in accessory flag is set in step S2540-82, which will be described later, when the background of the cut-in performance is a rainbow background. If the premium cut-in accessory flag is set (S2540-44: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-45, and if the premium cut-in accessory flag is not set (S2540-44: No). , proceed to step S2540-46.

In step S2540-45, the lamp CPU 150a performs premium cut-in performance accessory control mode determination processing. In the premium cut-in performance accessory control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the premium cut-in performance accessory control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and selects a rainbow-colored background based on the type of performance pattern designation command in the reception buffer. The control mode of the movable accessories 33c and 33d for the cut-in performance is determined.

FIG. 195 is a diagram showing a premium cut-in performance accessory control mode determination table. The premium cut-in performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that the lamp/drive control unit 150 can receive from the performance control unit 120m, and the control of the movable accessories 33c and 33d for the rainbow-colored background cut-in performance. Each set of data indicating a mode (“end” or “continue”) is stored. The "end" data indicates that the action of the movable accessories 33c and 33d in the rainbow-colored background cut-in production is immediately ended when the corresponding production pattern designation command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that This indicates that when the corresponding performance pattern designation command is received, the operation of the movable accessories 33c and 33d of the rainbow-colored background cut-in performance is continued.

In step S2540-46, the lamp CPU 150a performs cut-in performance accessory control mode determination processing. In the cut-in performance accessory control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the premium cut-in performance accessory control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and determines the cut-in performance based on the type of performance pattern designation command in the reception buffer. The control mode of the movable accessories 33c and 33d is determined.

FIG. 196 is a diagram showing a cut-in performance accessory control mode determination table. The cut-in performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that the lamp/drive control unit 150 can receive from the performance control unit 120m, and the control mode of the movable accessories 33c and 33d of the cut-in performance (“end”). or "continuation") are stored. The "end" data indicates that the movement of the movable accessories 33c and 33d of the cut-in production will be immediately terminated when the corresponding production pattern designation command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the corresponding production pattern will be immediately terminated. This indicates that when a specified command is received, the motion of the movable accessories 33c and 33d of the cut-in effect is continued.

In step S2540-47, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the premium cut-in performance control mode determination process or the cut-in performance accessory control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". do. When the control mode is "End" (S2540-47: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to Step S2540-48, and when the control mode is "Continue" (S2540-47: No), the process proceeds to Step S2540-49. move on.

In step S2540-48, the lamp CPU 150a clears the accessory drive information for the cut-in effect. The accessory drive information for the cut-in performance is stored in step S2820 of the accessory control timer update process (FIGS. 199 to 206), which will be described later, when the operation timing of the movable accessories 33c and 33d for the cut-in performance in the change comes. Set at -37. When the accessory drive information for the cut-in effect is cleared, the operation of the cut-in effect (the second operation mode shown in FIGS. 29 and 5) ends in the movable accessories 33c and 33d.

In the next step S2540-49, the lamp CPU 150a clears the cut-in performance accessory operation flag in the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2540-50.

In step S2540-50, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the confirmed accessory operation first performance accessory operation flag is set in the determined accessory operation first performance accessory operation flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. . The confirmed accessory operation first performance accessory in operation flag indicates that the movable accessories 33a, 33c, and 33d are operating in the operation mode of the confirmed accessory operation first performance (the third operation mode shown in FIGS. 31 and 6). This is a flag indicating that The determined accessory object operation first performance accessory object operation flag is set when the operation timing of the movable accessory objects 33a, 33c, and 33d of the determined accessory object operation first performance in the fluctuation comes, the accessory control timer update process described later It is set in step S2820-41 (FIGS. 199 to 206). When the confirmed accessory operation first performance accessory operation flag is set (S2540-50: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-51, and sets the determined accessory operation first performance accessory operation flag. If it has not been set (S2540-50: No), the process advances to step S2540-55.

In step S2540-51, the lamp CPU 150a performs a confirmed accessory operation first performance accessory control mode determination process. In the confirmed accessory operation first performance accessory control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the determined accessory operation first performance accessory control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and determines the type of performance pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Based on this, the control mode of the movable accessory objects 33a, 33c, and 33d of the confirmed accessory object operation first performance is determined.

FIG. 197 is a diagram showing the confirmed accessory operation first performance accessory control mode determination table. The confirmed accessory operation first performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that the lamp/drive control unit 150 can receive from the performance control unit 120m, the movable accessory 33a of the confirmed accessory operation first performance, Each set of data indicating the control mode (“end” or “continue”) of 33c and 33d is stored. The "end" data indicates that the operation of the movable accessories 33a, 33c, and 33d of the confirmed accessory operation first performance is immediately ended when the corresponding performance pattern designation command is received, and the "continue" data indicates that the operation of the movable accessories 33a, 33c, and 33d of the confirmed accessory operation first performance is continued when the corresponding performance pattern designation command is received.

In the next step S2540-52, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the confirmed accessory operation first performance accessory control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". When the control mode is "End" (S2540-52: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to Step S2540-53, and when the control mode is "Continue" (S2540-52: No), the process proceeds to Step S2540-55. move on.

In step S2540-53, the lamp CPU 150a clears the accessory drive information of the confirmed accessory actuation first performance. The accessory drive information of the confirmed accessory action first performance is determined by the accessory control timer update process, which will be described later, when the movement timing of the movable accessories 33a, 33c, and 33d of the determined accessory action first performance in the fluctuation comes. It is set in step S2820-43 (FIGS. 199 to 206). When the accessory drive information of the confirmed accessory action first performance is cleared, the operation mode of the determined accessory action first performance (the third action shown in FIGS. 31 and 6 The operation of mode) ends.

In the next step S2540-54, the lamp CPU 150a clears the confirmed accessory operation first effect accessory operation flag in the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2540-55.

In step S2540-55, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the confirmed accessory operation second performance accessory operation flag is set in the determined accessory operation second performance accessory operation flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. . The flag indicates that the movable accessories 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d are in the operation mode of the confirmed accessory operation second performance (the fourth operation mode shown in FIGS. 31 and 7). This is a flag indicating that it is in operation. The confirmed accessory action second performance accessory object operation flag is set when the movement timing of the movable accessory objects 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d of the determined accessory action second performance in the fluctuation comes, and the accessory object control timer described later is set. It is set in step S2820-47 of the update process (FIGS. 199 to 206). When the confirmed accessory operation second performance accessory operation flag is set (S2540-55: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-56, and sets the determined accessory operation second performance accessory operation flag. If not set (S2540-55: No), the process advances to step S2540-60.

In step S2540-56, the lamp CPU 150a performs a confirmed accessory operation second performance accessory control mode determination process. In the confirmed accessory operation second performance accessory control mode determination process, the lamp CPU 150a refers to the determined accessory operation second performance accessory control mode determination table in the lamp ROM 150c, and determines the type of performance pattern designation command in the reception buffer. Based on this, the control mode of the movable accessory objects 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d of the confirmed accessory object operation second performance is determined.

FIG. 198 is a diagram showing the confirmed accessory operation second performance accessory control mode determination table. The confirmed accessory operation second performance control mode determination table includes the types of performance pattern designation commands that the lamp/drive control unit 150 can receive from the performance control unit 120m, the movable accessory 33a of the confirmed accessory operation second performance, Each set of data indicating the control mode (“end” or “continue”) of 33b, 33c, and 33d is stored. The "end" data indicates that the operation of the movable accessories 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d of the confirmed accessory operation second performance is immediately ended when the corresponding performance pattern designation command is received, and "continue" The data indicates that the operation of the movable accessories 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d of the confirmed accessory operation second performance is continued when the corresponding performance pattern designation command is received.

In the next step S2540-57, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the control mode determined in the confirmed accessory operation second performance accessory control mode determination process is "end" or "continue". When the control mode is "End" (S2540-57: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to Step S2540-58, and when the control mode is "Continue" (S2540-57: No), the process proceeds to Step S2540-60. move on.

In step S2540-58, the lamp CPU 150a clears the accessory drive information of the confirmed accessory actuation second performance. The accessory drive information of the confirmed accessory action second performance is determined by the accessory control timer described later when the movement timing of the movable accessories 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d of the determined accessory action second performance in the fluctuation comes. It is set in step S2820-49 of the update process (FIGS. 199 to 206). When the accessory drive information of the confirmed accessory operation second performance is cleared, the operation mode of the determined accessory operation second performance (the first one shown in FIGS. 31 and 6 4 operation mode) is completed.

In the next step S2540-59, the lamp CPU 150a clears the determined accessory object operation second performance accessory operation flag in the lamp RAM 150b, and proceeds to step S2540-60.

In step S2540-60, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a command for specifying a variation start effect pattern. If the command in the reception buffer is a variation start production pattern specification command (S2540-60: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-63, and if it is not a variation start production pattern specification command (S2540-60: No). ), the process proceeds to step S2540-91.

In the next step S2540-63, the lamp CPU 150a analyzes the variation start effect pattern designation command and determines whether there is a step-up effect in the series of effects to be executed in the variation. If there is a step-up effect (S2540-63: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-64, and if there is no step-up effect (S2540-63: No), the lamp CPU 150a ends the current accessory drive information setting process. .

In the next step S2540-64, the lamp CPU 150a sets a step-up performance accessory standby flag in the step-up performance accessory standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-65, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the operation timing of the movable accessory 33c for the step-up performance, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. Set in the step-up performance accessory standby timer counter in the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-66, the lamp CPU 150a analyzes the variation start production pattern designation command and determines whether or not there is a character appearance production in the series of productions executed in the variation. If there is a character appearance effect (S2540-66: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-67, and if there is no character appearance effect (S2540-66: No), the process proceeds to step S2540-71.

In step S2540-67, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the character appearing in the character appearance effect is a premium character. If a premium character appears (S2540-67: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-68, and if a character other than the premium character appears (S2540-67: No), the process proceeds to step S2540-69.

In step S2540-68, the lamp CPU 150a sets a premium character accessory flag in the premium character accessory flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-69, the lamp CPU 150a sets a character appearance performance accessory standby flag in the character appearance performance accessory standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-70, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the operation timing of the movable accessory 33c in the character appearance effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the character appearance performance accessory standby timer counter in the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-71, the lamp CPU 150a analyzes the effect pattern designation command for starting the variation, and determines whether or not there is a roulette effect among the series of effects to be executed in the variation. If there is a roulette effect (S2540-71: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-72, and if there is no roulette effect (S2540-71: No), the process proceeds to step S2540-74.

In the next step S2540-72, the lamp CPU 150a sets a roulette effect accessory standby flag in the roulette effect accessory standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-73, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the operation timing of the movable accessory 33c for the roulette performance, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and calculates the remaining time for the lamp. Set in the roulette performance accessory standby timer counter in the RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-74, the lamp CPU 150a analyzes the variation start performance pattern designation command and determines whether or not there is an SP development stimulation performance in the series of performances executed in the variation. If there is an SP development promotion effect (S2540-74: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-75, and if there is no SP development promotion effect (S2540-74: No), the process proceeds to step S2540-77.

In the next step S2540-75, the lamp CPU 150a sets an SP development promotion accessory standby flag in the SP development promotion accessory standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-76, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the operation timing of the movable accessories 33c and 33d for the SP development promotion performance, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The obtained value is set in the SP development inciting performance accessory standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-77, the lamp CPU 150a analyzes the variation start performance pattern designation command and determines whether or not there is an SP development confirmed performance in the series of performances executed in the variation. If there is an SP development confirmation effect (S2540-77: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-78, and if there is no SP development confirmation effect (S2540-77: No), the process proceeds to step S2540-80.

In the next step S2540-78, the lamp CPU 150a sets an SP development confirmed performance accessory standby flag in the SP development confirmed performance accessory standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-79, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the operation timing of the movable accessories 33c and 33d for the SP development confirmation performance, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The obtained value is set in the SP development confirmed performance accessory standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-80, the lamp CPU 150a analyzes the variation start production pattern designation command and determines whether or not there is a cut-in production in the series of productions executed in the variation. If there is a cut-in effect (S2540-80: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-81, and if there is no cut-in effect (S2540-80: No), the process proceeds to step S2540-85.

In step S2540-81, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the background of the cut-in effect is rainbow-colored. If the background is rainbow colored (S2540-81: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-82, and if the background is not rainbow colored (S2540-81: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-83.

In step S2540-82, the lamp CPU 150a sets a premium cut-in accessory flag in the premium cut-in accessory flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-83, the lamp CPU 150a sets a cut-in performance accessory standby flag in the cut-in performance accessory standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-84, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the operation timing of the movable accessories 33c and 33d in the cut-in performance, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The value is set in the cut-in performance accessory standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-85, the lamp CPU 150a analyzes the variation start production pattern designation command and determines whether or not there is a confirmed role object action first production in the series of productions to be executed in the variation. . If there is a confirmed accessory action first performance (S2540-85: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-86, and if there is no confirmed accessory action first performance (S2540-85: No), step S2540- Proceed to 88.

In the next step S2540-86, the lamp CPU 150a sets a confirmed accessory operation first performance accessory standby flag in the determined accessory operation first performance accessory standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-87, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the operation timing of the movable accessories 33a, 33c, and 33d of the first performance of confirmed accessory object operation, and determines this time as the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The value divided by 2 milliseconds is set in the confirmed accessory actuation first performance accessory standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-88, the lamp CPU 150a analyzes the variation start production pattern designation command and determines whether or not there is a confirmed role object action second production in the series of productions to be executed in the variation. . If there is a confirmed accessory action second performance (S2540-88: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2540-89, and if there is no confirmed accessory action second performance (S2540-88: No), step S2540- Proceed to 91.

In the next step S2540-89, the lamp CPU 150a sets a confirmed accessory activation second performance accessory standby flag in the determined accessory activation second performance accessory standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2540-90, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the operation timing of the movable accessories 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d of the confirmed accessory operation second performance, and calculates the remaining time until the operation timing of the reset clock pulse. The value divided by 2 milliseconds is set in the confirmed accessory actuation second performance accessory standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the above accessory drive information setting process, the step-up effect accessory control mode determination table shown in FIG. 189 is referred to when a command is received during execution of the step-up effect, and the premium character appearance shown in FIG. The performance accessory control mode determination table is referred to when a command is received during the execution of a character appearance performance of a premium character, and the character appearance performance accessory control mode determination table shown in FIG. The roulette effect accessory control mode determination table shown in FIG. 192, which is referred to when a command is received during the execution of the character appearance effect of C, is referred to when the command is received during the execution of the roulette effect, and is shown in FIG. The SP development promotion performance accessories control mode determination table shown in FIG. The premium cut-in effect accessory control mode determination table shown in FIG. 195, which is referred to when a command is received during the execution of the development confirmed effect, is used when the command is received during the execution of the rainbow-colored background cut-in effect. The cut-in effect control mode determination table shown in FIG. 196 is referred to when a command is received during the execution of a cut-in effect with a green, red, or zebra pattern background, and is shown in FIG. 197. The confirmed accessory action first performance accessory control mode determination table is referred to when a command is received during the execution of the determined accessory action first performance, and is used to determine the determined accessory action second performance accessory control shown in FIG. 198. The mode determination table is referred to when a command is received during execution of the confirmed role object operation second performance.

Here, when comparing the step-up performance accessory control mode determination table of FIG. 189 and the SP development confirmed performance accessory control mode determination table of FIG. What is associated with the command is "end" data, and in the SP development confirmed performance accessory control mode determination table, what is associated with the fluctuation start and symbol confirmed commands is "continue" data. be.

Therefore, if the timing at which the production control unit 120m receives the predetermined command, such as the fluctuation start command or the symbol confirmation command, is during the execution of the step-up production, the movable accessory 33c terminates the operation mode of the step-up production. If the timing when the performance control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the symbol confirmation command is when the SP development confirmation performance is being executed, the movable accessories 33c and 33d continue the operation mode of the SP development confirmation performance.

Also, when comparing the SP development promotion performance accessory control mode determination table in FIG. 193 and the SP development confirmed performance accessory control mode determination table in FIG. The data that is associated with the command is "end" data, and in the SP development confirmation performance accessory control mode determination table, the data that is associated with the commands for starting fluctuation and symbol confirmation is "continue" data. It is.

Therefore, if the timing when the performance control unit 120m receives the predetermined command, such as the variation start command or the symbol confirmation command, is when the SP development stimulation performance is being executed, the movable accessories 33c and 33d perform the operation of the SP development stimulation performance. If the timing when the production control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the symbol confirmation command after completing the mode is when the SP development confirmation production is being executed, the movable accessories 33c and 33d will operate in the operation mode of the SP development confirmation production. continue.

Furthermore, when comparing the SP development confirmed performance accessory control mode determination table in FIG. 194 and the cut-in performance accessory control mode determination table in FIG. The data that is associated with the command is "Continue" data, and in the cut-in performance accessory control mode determination table, the data that is associated with the commands for starting fluctuation and confirming the symbol is "End" data. .

Therefore, if the timing at which the performance control unit 120m receives the predetermined command, such as the fluctuation start command or the symbol confirmation command, is during the execution of the SP development confirmation production, the movable accessories 33c and 33d perform the operation of the SP development confirmation production. If the mode is continued and the timing when the production control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the symbol confirmation command is when the cut-in production is being executed, the movable accessories 33c and 33d end the operation mode of the cut-in production. let

Furthermore, when comparing the SP development confirmed performance accessory control mode determination table in FIG. 194 with the premium character appearance performance accessory control mode determination table in FIG. The data that is associated with the command is "Continue" data, and in the premium character appearance performance accessory control mode determination table, the data that is associated with the commands for starting fluctuation and confirming the symbol is "End" data. It is.

Therefore, if the timing at which the performance control unit 120m receives the predetermined command, such as the fluctuation start command or the symbol confirmation command, is during the execution of the SP development confirmation production, the movable accessories 33c and 33d perform the operation of the SP development confirmation production. If the mode is continued and the timing at which the production control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the symbol confirmation command is during the execution of the character appearance production of the premium character, the movable accessory 33c controls the character appearance production of the premium character. End the operation mode.

Furthermore, when comparing the SP development confirmed performance accessory control mode determination table in FIG. 194 and the premium cut-in performance accessory control mode determination table in FIG. The data associated with the command is "Continue" data, and in the premium cut-in performance accessory control mode determination table, the data associated with the commands for starting fluctuation and confirming the symbol is "End" data. It is.

Therefore, if the timing at which the performance control unit 120m receives the predetermined command, such as the fluctuation start command or the symbol confirmation command, is during the execution of the SP development confirmation production, the movable accessories 33c and 33d perform the operation of the SP development confirmation production. If the mode is continued and the timing when the production control unit 120m receives the fluctuation start command or the pattern confirmation command is during the execution of the rainbow-colored background cut-in production, the movable accessories 33c and 33d will be moved to the rainbow-colored background. The operation mode of the cut-in effect is ended.

Also, when comparing the step-up performance accessory control mode determination table of FIG. 189 and the confirmed accessory operation second performance accessory control mode determination table of FIG. The data associated with the confirmation command is "end" data, and in the confirmed accessory operation second performance accessory control mode determination table, the data associated with the fluctuation start and symbol confirmation commands is "end" data. Continuation” data.

Therefore, if the timing at which the production control unit 120m receives the predetermined command, such as the fluctuation start command or the symbol confirmation command, is during the execution of the step-up production, the movable accessory 33c terminates the operation mode of the step-up production. , If the timing at which the production control unit 120m receives the fluctuation start command or the symbol confirmation command is during the execution of the confirmed accessory operation second production, the movable accessories 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d are not activated. The operation mode of the second performance is continued.

Also, when comparing the SP development promotion performance accessory control mode determination table of FIG. 193 and the confirmed accessory operation second performance accessory control mode determination table of FIG. And the data that is associated with the command for confirming the symbol is the "end" data, and in the confirmed accessory operation second performance accessory control mode determination table, the data that is associated with the command for starting variation and confirming the symbol is the data "end". is "continuation" data.

Therefore, if the timing when the performance control unit 120m receives the predetermined command, such as the variation start command or the symbol confirmation command, is when the SP development stimulation performance is being executed, the movable accessories 33c and 33d perform the operation of the SP development stimulation performance. If the timing when the production control unit 120m receives the variation start command or the symbol confirmation command after finishing the mode is when the confirmed accessory operation second production is being executed, the movable accessories 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d are The operation mode of the confirmed role object operation second performance is continued.

Also, when comparing the cut-in performance accessory control mode determination table of FIG. 196 with the confirmed accessory operation second performance accessory control mode determination table of FIG. The data associated with the confirmation command is "end" data, and in the confirmed accessory operation second performance accessory control mode determination table, the data associated with the fluctuation start and symbol confirmation commands is "end" data. Continuation” data.

Therefore, if the timing at which the production control unit 120m receives the predetermined commands, such as the fluctuation start command or the pattern confirmation command, is during the execution of the cut-in production of the green, red, or zebra pattern background, the movable accessory 33c, 33d ends the operation mode of the cut-in performance of the background of green, red, or zebra pattern, and the timing when the performance control unit 120m receives the fluctuation start command or the pattern confirmation command is the execution of the second performance of the confirmed role object operation. If it is inside, the movable accessories 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d continue the operation mode of the confirmed accessory operation second performance.

Furthermore, when comparing the premium character appearance performance accessory control mode determination table of FIG. 190 and the confirmed accessory operation second performance accessory control mode determination table of FIG. 198, it is found that in the premium character appearance performance accessory control mode determination table And the data that is associated with the command for confirming the symbol is the "end" data, and in the confirmed accessory operation second performance accessory control mode determination table, the data that is associated with the command for starting variation and confirming the symbol is the data "end". is "continuation" data.

Therefore, if the timing at which the production control unit 120m receives the predetermined command, such as the fluctuation start command or the pattern confirmation command, is during the execution of the character appearance production of the premium character, the movable accessory 33c is activated to perform the character appearance production of the premium character. If the timing when the performance control unit 120m receives the fluctuation start command or the symbol confirmation command after completing the operation mode is during the execution of the confirmed accessory operation second performance, the movable accessories 33a, 33b, 33c, 33d , the operation mode of the confirmed role object operation second performance is continued.

Furthermore, when comparing the premium cut-in performance accessory control mode determination table of FIG. 195 and the confirmed accessory operation second performance accessory control mode determination table of FIG. And the data that is associated with the command for confirming the symbol is the "end" data, and in the confirmed accessory operation second performance accessory control mode determination table, the data that is associated with the command for starting variation and confirming the symbol is the data "end". is "continuation" data.

Therefore, if the timing at which the production control unit 120m receives the predetermined command, ie, the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command, is during the execution of the rainbow-colored background cut-in production, the movable accessories 33c and 33d will be moved to the rainbow-colored background. If the operation mode of the cut-in performance is finished and the timing when the performance control unit 120m receives the fluctuation start command or the symbol confirmation command is during the execution of the confirmed accessory operation second performance, the movable accessories 33a, 33b , 33c, and 33d continue the operation mode of the confirmed role object operation second performance.

Here, when a command is received from the performance control section 120m during execution of the step-up performance, the step-up performance accessory control mode determination table of FIG. 189 is referred to in the accessory drive information setting process, and the animation pattern setting process is performed. In the step-up effect image control mode determination table of FIG. 95 is referred to, in the lamp emission information setting process the step-up effect lamp control mode determination table of FIG. 161 is referred to, and in the sound pattern setting process, the step-up effect image control mode determination table of FIG. The production sound effect control mode determination table is referred to. Comparing the four tables, in the step-up performance accessory control mode determination table, the step-up performance image control mode determination table, and the step-up performance lamp control mode determination table, the commands for starting fluctuation and confirming the symbol are associated with each other. In contrast, in the step-up production sound effect control mode determination table, what is associated with the fluctuation start and symbol confirmation commands is "continue" data.

Further, if the command is for starting a variation, in the animation pattern setting process, the process advances from step S2030-60: Yes to step S2030-62, where the animation pattern of the normal variation effect is set. If the command is for a fixed symbol, in the animation pattern setting process, the process advances from step S2030-91: Yes to step S2030-98, and an animation pattern for the fixed symbol effect is set. Therefore, at the same time as the display of the effect image of the SP development confirmed effect ends, the effect image of the start of variation and finalized symbol is displayed in response to the execution of the command for start of variation and finalized symbol. In addition, as described above, in this case, in the lamp emission information setting process, the lamp emission information of the start of fluctuation and the finalization of the symbol is set (step S2530-62 and step S2530-98), so the emission pattern of the step-up effect is set. Simultaneously with the end, a light emitting pattern for starting variation and confirming a symbol starts in accordance with the execution of a command for starting variation and confirming a symbol. On the other hand, the accessory drive information setting process does not include the step of setting the accessory drive information corresponding to the start of fluctuation or finalization of the symbol, so even if the command is for the start of fluctuation or finalization of the symbol, it is normally Variable effects and symbol-confirmed accessory drive information are not set.

Therefore, the movable accessory 33c is operating in the step-up performance mode, the image display device 31 is displaying the step-up performance image, and the lamp 34c is emitting light in the step-up performance mode. When the production control unit 120m receives a predetermined command, such as a fluctuation start command or a symbol confirmation command, while the audio output device 32 is outputting the production sound effect of a step-up production, the movable accessory 33c performs a step-up production. The image display device 31 stops displaying the effect image of the step-up effect, and displays the effect image according to the execution of the fluctuation start command or the symbol confirmation command, and the lamp 34c stops displaying the effect image of the step-up effect. After finishing the light emission mode, the light emission mode is emitted in a light emission mode according to the execution of the variation start command or the symbol confirmation command, and the audio output device 32 continues to output the production sound effect of the step-up production.

In addition, when a command is received from the performance control unit 120m during the execution of the character appearance performance of the premium character, in the accessory drive information setting process, the premium character appearance performance accessory control mode determination table of FIG. 190 is referred to, and the animation In the pattern setting process, the premium character appearance effect image control mode determination table of FIG. 97 is referred to, in the lamp light emission information setting process, the premium character appearance effect lamp control mode determination table of FIG. 163 is referred to, and in the sound pattern setting process, The premium character appearance production sound effect control mode determination table in FIG. 130 is referred to. Comparing the four tables, the premium character appearance performance accessory control mode determination table, the premium character appearance performance image control mode determination table, and the premium character appearance performance lamp control mode determination table are associated with commands for starting fluctuation and confirming symbols. In contrast, in the premium character appearance production sound effect control mode determination table, the data associated with the start of fluctuation and symbol confirmation commands is the data of "continue". .

Furthermore, as described above, when a command to start fluctuation or finalize a symbol is received, the animation pattern for start fluctuation or final symbol is set in the animation pattern setting process (step S2030-62 or step S2030-98), and the lamp In the light emission information setting process, the lamp light emission information for the start of fluctuation and symbol confirmation is set (step S2530-62 and step S2530-98), and in the accessory drive information setting process, the accessory drive information for normal fluctuation effects and symbol determination is set. Not set.

Therefore, the movable accessory 33c is operating in the mode of character appearance performance of the premium character, the image display device 31 is displaying the performance image of the character appearance performance of the premium character, and the lamp 34c is operating in the mode of performance of the character appearance performance of the premium character. When the sound output device 32 is outputting the effect sound of the character appearance effect of the premium character, the effect control unit 120m issues a variation start command or pattern which is a predetermined command. When the confirmation command is received, the movable accessory 33c ends the operation mode of the character appearance performance of the premium character, the image display device 31 stops displaying the performance image of the character appearance performance of the premium character, and starts the variation. A production image is displayed according to the execution of the command or the pattern confirmation command, and the lamp 34c finishes the light emission mode of the character appearance production of the premium character and starts the light emission mode according to the execution of the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command. The sound output device 32 continues to output sound effects of the character appearance of the premium character.

In addition, when a command is received from the performance control unit 120m during the execution of the SP development stimulation performance, the SP development stimulation performance performance accessory control mode determination table of FIG. 193 is referred to in the accessory drive information setting process, and the animation pattern setting is In the process, the SP development promotion effect image control mode determination table in FIG. 100 is referred to, in the lamp emission information setting process, the SP development promotion effect lamp control mode determination table in FIG. The SP development promotion effect sound effect control mode determination table is referred to. Comparing the four tables, we can see that in the SP development incitement effect accessory control mode determination table, the SP development incitement effect image control mode determination table, and the SP development incitement effect lamp control mode determination table, the commands for starting fluctuation and confirming the symbols are associated with each other. What is displayed is "end" data, whereas in the SP development promotion production sound effect control mode determination table, "continue" data is associated with the fluctuation start and symbol confirmation commands. .

Furthermore, as described above, when a command to start fluctuation or finalize a symbol is received, the animation pattern for start fluctuation or final symbol is set in the animation pattern setting process (step S2030-62 or step S2030-98), and the lamp In the light emission information setting process, the lamp light emission information for the start of fluctuation and symbol confirmation is set (step S2530-62 and step S2530-98), and in the accessory drive information setting process, the accessory drive information for normal fluctuation effects and symbol determination is set. Not set.

Therefore, the movable accessories 33c and 33d are operating in the operation mode of the SP development promotion performance, the image display device 31 is displaying the production image of the SP development promotion performance, and the lamp 34c is in the light emission mode of the SP development promotion performance. When the production control unit 120m receives a predetermined command, such as a fluctuation start command or a symbol confirmation command, while the audio output device 32 is outputting the production sound effect of the SP development promotion production, the movable role The objects 33c and 33d end the operation mode of the SP development stimulation performance, and the image display device 31 stops displaying the performance image of the SP development stimulation performance, and displays the performance image according to the execution of the variation start command or the symbol confirmation command. The lamp 34c finishes the light emission mode of the SP development promotion effect and emits light in a light emission mode according to the execution of the fluctuation start command or the symbol confirmation command, and the audio output device 32 outputs the production sound effect of the SP development promotion effect. Continue outputting.

Further, when a command is received from the performance control unit 120m during the execution of the SP development confirmed performance, the SP development confirmed performance image control mode determination table of FIG. 101 is referred to in the animation pattern setting process, and the lamp light emission information setting process In the sound pattern setting process, the SP development confirmed effect sound effect control mode determination table in FIG. 134 is referred to, and in the accessory drive information setting process, the table in FIG. 194 is referred to. The SP development confirmed performance accessory control mode determination table is referred to. Comparing the four tables, in the SP development confirmed effect image control mode determination table and the SP development confirmed effect lamp control mode determination table, the "end" data is associated with the fluctuation start and symbol confirmation commands. On the other hand, in the SP development confirmed performance sound effect control mode determination table and the SP development confirmed performance accessory control mode determination table, it is "continue" data that is associated with the fluctuation start and symbol confirmation commands. .

Furthermore, as described above, when a command to start fluctuation or finalize a symbol is received, the animation pattern for start fluctuation or final symbol is set in the animation pattern setting process (step S2030-62 or step S2030-98), and the lamp In the light emission information setting process, lamp light emission information for starting variation and finalizing the symbol is set (step S2530-62 and step S2530-98).

Therefore, the image display device 31 is displaying the effect image of the SP development confirmed effect, the lamp 34c is emitting light in the light emission mode of the SP development confirmed effect, and the audio output device 32 is displaying the effect sound of the SP development confirmed effect. If the production control unit 120m receives a predetermined command, such as a fluctuation start command or a pattern confirmation command, while the movable accessories 33c and 33d are operating in the SP development confirmation production mode, the image display The device 31 stops displaying the effect image of the SP development confirmed effect and displays the effect image according to the execution of the variation start command or the symbol confirmation command, and the lamp 34c ends the light emission mode of the SP development confirmed effect. , the sound output device 32 continues to output the production sound effect of the SP development confirmed production, and the movable accessories 33c and 33d emit light in a luminous manner according to the execution of the fluctuation start command or the symbol confirmation command. Continue the operation mode.

In addition, when a command is received from the production control unit 120m during the execution of a cut-in production with a rainbow-colored background, in the accessory drive information setting process, the premium cut-in performance accessory control mode determination table of FIG. 195 is referred to, In the animation pattern setting process, the premium cut-in effect image control mode determination table in FIG. 103 is referred to, in the lamp light emission information setting process, the premium cut-in effect lamp control mode determination table in FIG. , refer to the premium cut-in production sound effect control mode determination table in FIG. Comparing the four tables, the premium cut-in performance accessory control mode determination table, the premium cut-in performance image control mode determination table, and the premium cut-in performance lamp control mode determination table are associated with commands for starting fluctuation and determining symbols. In contrast, in the premium cut-in performance sound effect control mode determination table, the data associated with the start of fluctuation and symbol confirmation commands is the data of "continue". .

Furthermore, as described above, when a command to start fluctuation or finalize a symbol is received, the animation pattern for start fluctuation or final symbol is set in the animation pattern setting process (step S2030-62 or step S2030-98), and the lamp In the light emission information setting process, the lamp light emission information for the start of fluctuation and symbol confirmation is set (step S2530-62 and step S2530-98), and in the accessory drive information setting process, the accessory drive information for normal fluctuation effects and symbol determination is set. Not set.

Therefore, the movable accessories 33c and 33d are operating in a cut-in effect with a rainbow-colored background, the image display device 31 is displaying a cut-in effect with a rainbow-colored background, and the lamp 34c is in a rainbow-colored background. When the light is emitted in the light emission mode of a cut-in effect with a colored background, and the audio output device 32 is outputting the effect sound of a cut-in effect with a rainbow-colored background, the effect control unit 120m starts a variation according to a predetermined command. When the command or the pattern confirmation command is received, the movable accessories 33c and 33d end the operation mode of the rainbow-colored background cut-in effect, and the image display device 31 stops displaying the effect image of the rainbow-colored background cut-in effect. Then, the effect image is displayed according to the execution of the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command, and the lamp 34c finishes the light emitting mode of the cut-in effect of the rainbow background, and then starts the display of the effect image according to the execution of the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command. The light is emitted in the corresponding light emission mode, and the audio output device 32 continues to output the production sound effect of the cut-in production with the rainbow-colored background.

In addition, when a command is received from the production control unit 120m during the execution of a cut-in performance with a green, red, or zebra pattern background, in the accessory drive information setting process, the cut-in performance accessory control mode of FIG. 196 is determined. In the animation pattern setting process, refer to the cut-in effect image control mode determination table in FIG. 104. In the lamp emission information setting process, refer to the cut-in effect lamp control mode determination table in FIG. In the setting process, the cut-in production sound effect control mode determination table shown in FIG. 137 is referred to. Comparing the four tables, the cut-in effect accessory control mode determination table, the cut-in effect image control mode determination table, and the cut-in effect lamp control mode determination table are associated with commands for starting fluctuation and determining symbols. is data for "end", whereas in the cut-in production sound effect control mode determination table, data for "continue" is associated with commands for starting variation and determining symbols.

Furthermore, as described above, when a command to start fluctuation or finalize a symbol is received, the animation pattern for start fluctuation or final symbol is set in the animation pattern setting process (step S2030-62 or step S2030-98), and the lamp In the light emission information setting process, the lamp light emission information for the start of fluctuation and symbol confirmation is set (step S2530-62 and step S2530-98), and in the accessory drive information setting process, the accessory drive information for normal fluctuation effects and symbol determination is set. Not set.

Therefore, the movable accessories 33c and 33d are operating in a cut-in mode with a green, red, or zebra pattern background, and the image display device 31 is operating in a cut-in mode with a green, red, or zebra pattern background. A production image is displayed, the lamp 34c is emitting light in a cut-in production mode with a green, red, or zebra pattern background, and the audio output device 32 is displaying a green, red, or zebra pattern background. When the production control unit 120m receives a predetermined command, such as a fluctuation start command or a pattern confirmation command, while outputting the production sound effect of the background cut-in production, the movable accessories 33c and 33d change to green, red, Alternatively, the operation mode of the cut-in effect of the zebra pattern background is ended, and the image display device 31 stops displaying the effect image of the cut-in effect of the green, red, or zebra pattern background, and then issues a variation start command or pattern. The effect image is displayed according to the execution of the confirmation command, and the lamp 34c finishes the light emitting mode of the cut-in effect of the green, red, or zebra pattern background, and then displays the effect image according to the execution of the variation start command or the pattern confirmation command. The sound output device 32 continues to output the effect sound of the cut-in effect of the green, red, or zebra pattern background.

Further, when a command is received from the performance control unit 120m during the execution of the confirmed accessory action second performance, the confirmed accessory action second performance image control mode determination table of FIG. 106 is referred to in the animation pattern setting process, In the lamp light emission information setting process, the determined accessory operation second effect lamp control mode determination table of FIG. 172 is referred to, and in the accessory drive information setting process, the determined accessory operation second effect control mode determination table of FIG. is referred to, and in the sound pattern setting process, the determined accessory actuation second performance sound effect control mode determination table of FIG. 139 is referred to. Comparing the four tables, in the confirmed accessory operation second performance image control mode determination table, data of "end" is associated with the fluctuation start and symbol confirmation commands, whereas the confirmed accessory In the operation second performance lamp control mode determination table, confirmed role object operation second performance role object control mode determination table, and confirmed role object operation second performance sound effect control mode determination table, correspondence is made with the fluctuation start and symbol confirmation commands. What is shown is "continuation" data.

Furthermore, as described above, when a command to start fluctuation or finalize a symbol is received, the animation pattern for start fluctuation or final symbol is set in the animation pattern setting process (step S2030-62 or step S2030-98). Simultaneously with the end of the display of the performance image of the confirmed role object action second performance, the performance image of the start of variation and finalization of the symbol is displayed in response to the execution of the command for start of fluctuation and finalization of the symbol.

Therefore, the image display device 31 is displaying the performance image of the confirmed accessory action second performance, the lamps 34a and 34b are emitting light in the light emission mode of the confirmed accessory action second performance, and the movable accessory 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d are operating in the operation mode of the confirmed role object operation second effect, and when the audio output device 32 is outputting the effect sound of the confirmed role object operation second effect, the effect control unit 120m When receiving a variation start command or a symbol confirmation command, which is a predetermined command, the image display device 31 stops displaying the performance image of the confirmation accessory action second production, and responds to the execution of the variation start command or symbol confirmation command. The performance image is displayed, the lamps 34a and 34b continue the light emitting mode of the confirmed role object operation second effect, and the movable role objects 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d continue the operation mode of the confirmed role object operation second effect. , the audio output device 32 continues to output the production sound effect of the confirmed role object operation second production.

199 to 206 are flowcharts showing details of the accessory control timer update process (step S2820 in FIG. 81) of the lamp/drive control section 150. In FIG. 199, the lamp CPU 150a updates the timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b, which is referenced in the accessory drive information setting process, by adding 1 to the timer counter if it is not 0.

In the next step S2820-2, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the step-up performance accessory standby flag is set in the step-up performance accessory standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the step-up performance accessory standby flag is set (S2820-2: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-3, and if the step-up performance accessory standby flag is not set (S2820-2: No), proceed to step S2820-8.

In step S2820-3, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the step-up effect accessory standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than 0. If the step-up performance accessory standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-3: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-4, and if the step-up performance accessory standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2820-3: Yes), proceed to step S2820-8.

In step S2820-4, the lamp CPU 150a clears the step-up performance accessory standby flag.

In the next step S2820-5, the lamp CPU 150a sets a step-up effect accessory in operation flag in the step-up effect accessory in operation flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2820-6, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the operation end timing of the operation mode of the step-up effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and calculates the remaining time for the lamp. It is set in the step-up performance accessory end standby timer counter in the RAM 150b.

In the next step S2820-7, the lamp CPU 150a sets accessory drive information for the step-up performance. From this point on, the movable accessory 33c starts operating in the step-up performance mode.

In the next step S2820-8, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the character appearance performance accessory standby flag is set in the character appearance performance accessory standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the character appearance performance accessory standby flag is set (S2820-8: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-9, and if the character appearance performance accessory standby flag is not set (S2820-8: No), the process advances to step S2820-14.

In step S2820-9, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the character appearance performance accessory standby timer counter in the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the character appearance performance accessory standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-9: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-10, and if the character appearance performance accessory standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2820-9: Yes), proceed to step S2820-14.

In step S2820-10, the lamp CPU 150a clears the character appearance effect standby flag.

In the next step S2820-11, the lamp CPU 150a sets a character appearance performance accessory operation flag in the character appearance performance accessory operation flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2820-12, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the operation end timing of the operation mode of the character appearance effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and calculates the remaining time for the lamp. It is set in the character appearance performance accessory end standby timer counter in the RAM 150b.

In the next step S2820-13, the lamp CPU 150a sets accessory drive information for the character appearance effect. From this point on, the movable accessory 33c starts to operate in the character appearance production mode.

In the next step S2820-14, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the roulette effect accessory standby flag is set in the roulette effect accessory standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the roulette performance accessory standby flag is set (S2820-14: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-15, and if the roulette performance accessory standby flag is not set (S2820-14: No). , proceed to step S2820-20.

In step S2820-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the roulette effect accessory standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the roulette performance accessory standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-15: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-16, and if the roulette performance accessory standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2820-15: Yes). , proceed to step S2820-20.

In step S2820-16, the lamp CPU 150a clears the roulette effect accessory standby flag.

In the next step S2820-17, the lamp CPU 150a sets a roulette performance accessory operation flag in the roulette performance accessory operation flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2820-18, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the operation end timing of the operation mode of the roulette performance, divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and calculates the value obtained by dividing the time by the lamp RAM 150b. Set the roulette performance accessory end standby timer counter.

In the next step S2820-19, the lamp CPU 150a sets accessory drive information for the roulette performance. After this, the movable accessory 33c starts operating in the roulette performance mode.

In the next step S2820-20, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the SP development promotion accessory standby flag is set in the SP development promotion accessory standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. When the SP development promotion accessory standby flag is set (S2820-20: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-21, and when the SP development promotion performance accessory standby flag is not set (S2820- 20: No), the process advances to step S2820-26.

In step S2820-21, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the SP development promotion performance accessory standby timer counter in the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the SP development promotion accessory standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-21: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-22, and if the SP development promotion performance accessory wait timer counter is greater than 0 (S2820- 21: Yes), proceed to step S2820-26.

In step S2820-22, the lamp CPU 150a clears the SP development promotion performance accessory standby flag.

In the next step S2820-23, the lamp CPU 150a sets the SP development promotion accessory in operation flag in the SP development promotion accessory in operation flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2820-24, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the operation end timing of the operation mode of the SP development promotion effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. It is set in the SP development inciting performance accessory end standby timer counter in the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2820-25, the lamp CPU 150a sets accessory drive information for the SP development promotion effect. After this, the movement of the SP development promotion performance is started in the movable accessories 33c and 33d.

In the next step S2820-26, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the SP development confirmed performance accessory standby flag is set in the SP development confirmed performance accessory standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the SP development confirmed performance accessory standby flag is set (S2820-26: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-27, and if the SP development confirmed performance accessory standby flag is not set (S2820- 26: No), the process advances to step S2820-32.

In step S2820-27, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the SP development confirmed performance accessory standby timer counter in the lamp RAM 150b is greater than 0. When the SP development confirmed performance accessory standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-27: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-28, and when the SP development confirmed performance accessory standby timer counter is larger than 0 (S2820- 27: Yes), proceed to step S2820-32.

In step S2820-28, the lamp CPU 150a clears the SP development confirmed performance accessory standby flag.

In the next step S2820-29, the lamp CPU 150a sets the SP development confirmed effect accessory in operation flag in the SP development confirmed effect accessory in operation flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2820-30, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the operation end timing of the operation mode of the SP development confirmation effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. Set the SP development confirmed performance accessory end standby timer counter in the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2820-31, the lamp CPU 150a sets accessory drive information for the SP development confirmation effect. After this, the movement of the SP development confirmation performance is started in the movable accessories 33c and 33d.

In the next step S2820-32, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the cut-in performance accessory standby flag is set in the cut-in performance accessory standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the cut-in performance accessory standby flag is set (S2820-32: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-33, and if the cut-in performance accessory standby flag is not set (S2820-32: No), proceed to step S2820-38.

In step S2820-33, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the cut-in performance accessory standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than 0. If the cut-in performance accessory standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-33: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-34, and if the cut-in performance accessory standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2820-33: Yes), proceed to step S2820-38.

In step S2820-34, the lamp CPU 150a clears the cut-in performance accessory standby flag.

In the next step S2820-35, the lamp CPU 150a sets a cut-in performance accessory operation flag in the cut-in performance accessory operation flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2820-36, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the operation end timing of the operation mode of the cut-in effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, and calculates the remaining time for the lamp. It is set in the cut-in performance accessories end standby timer counter in the RAM 150b.

In the next step S2820-37, the lamp CPU 150a sets accessory drive information for the cut-in effect. After this, the movable accessories 33c and 33d begin to operate in the cut-in performance mode.

In the next step S2820-38, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the confirmed accessory operation first performance accessory standby flag is set in the determined accessory operation first performance accessory standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. . When the confirmed accessory operation first performance accessory standby flag is set (S2820-38: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-39, and sets the determined accessory operation first performance accessory standby flag. If not (S2820-38: No), the process advances to step S2820-44.

In step S2820-39, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the confirmed accessory activation first performance accessory standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. When the confirmed accessory operation first performance accessory standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-39: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-40, and sets the determined accessory operation first performance accessory wait timer counter to 0. If it is larger (S2820-39: Yes), the process advances to step S2820-44.

In step S2820-40, the lamp CPU 150a clears the confirmed accessory activation first performance accessory standby flag.

In the next step S2820-41, the lamp CPU 150a sets the confirmed accessory operation first performance accessory operation flag in the determined accessory operation first performance accessory operation flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2820-42, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the operation end timing of the operation mode of the confirmed accessory operation first performance, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The obtained value is set in the confirmed accessory actuation first performance accessory end standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2820-43, the lamp CPU 150a sets the accessory drive information of the confirmed accessory actuation first performance. After this, in the movable accessories 33a, 33c, and 33d, the operation of the operation mode of the confirmed accessory operation first performance is started.

In the next step S2820-44, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the confirmed accessory activation second performance accessory standby flag is set in the determined accessory activation second performance accessory standby flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. . When the confirmed accessory operation second performance accessory standby flag is set (S2820-44: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-45, and sets the determined accessory operation second performance accessory standby flag. If not (S2820-44: No), the process advances to step S2820-50.

In step S2820-45, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the confirmed accessory activation second performance accessory standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. When the confirmed accessory operation second performance accessory standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-45: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-46, and sets the determined accessory operation second performance accessory standby timer counter to 0. If it is larger (S2820-45: Yes), the process advances to step S2820-50.

In step S2820-46, the lamp CPU 150a clears the confirmed accessory activation second performance accessory standby flag.

In the next step S2820-47, the lamp CPU 150a sets a determined accessory object operation second performance accessory operation flag in the determined accessory object operation second performance accessory operation flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2820-48, the lamp CPU 150a calculates the remaining time until the operation end timing of the operation mode of the confirmed accessory operation second performance, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse. The obtained value is set in the confirmed accessory actuation second performance accessory end standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b.

In the next step S2820-49, the lamp CPU 150a sets accessory drive information for the confirmed accessory activation second performance. After this, in the movable accessories 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d, the operation of the operation mode of the confirmed accessory operation second performance is started.

In step S2820-50, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the step-up performance accessory is in operation flag is set in the step-up performance accessory in operation flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the step-up performance accessory operation flag is set (S2820-50: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-51, and if the step-up performance accessory operation flag is not set (S2820-50). 50: No), the process advances to step S2820-54.

In step S2820-51, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the step-up effect accessory end standby timer counter in the lamp RAM 150b is greater than 0. If the step-up performance accessory end standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-51: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-52, and if the step-up performance accessory end standby timer counter is greater than 0 (S2820-51: 51: Yes), proceed to step S2820-54.

In step S2820-52, the lamp CPU 150a clears the step-up effect accessory operation flag.

In step S2820-53, the lamp CPU 150a clears the accessory drive information for the step-up performance. When the accessory drive information of the step-up performance is cleared, the operation of the operation mode of the step-up performance ends in the movable accessory 33c.

In step S2820-54, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the character appearance performance accessory operation flag is set in the character appearance performance accessory operation flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-55 when the character appearance performance accessory is in operation flag is set (S2820-54: Yes), and when the character appearance performance accessory is in operation flag is not set (S2820- 54: No), the process advances to step S2820-60.

In step S2820-55, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the character appearance performance accessory end standby timer counter in the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the character appearance performance accessory end standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-55: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-56, and if the character appearance performance accessory end wait timer counter is greater than 0 (S2820-55: No), the process proceeds to step S2820-56. 55: Yes), the process advances to step S2820-60.

In step S2820-56, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the premium character accessory flag is set in the premium character accessory flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the premium character accessory flag is set (S2820-56: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-57, and if the premium character accessory flag is not set (S2820-56: No), the lamp CPU 150a advances to step S2820-57. Proceed to S2820-58.

In step S2820-57, the lamp CPU 150a clears the premium character accessory flag.

In step S2820-58, the lamp CPU 150a clears the character appearance effect accessory operation flag.

In step S2820-59, the lamp CPU 150a clears the accessory drive information for the character appearance effect. When the accessory drive information of the character appearance effect is cleared, the operation of the operation mode of the character appearance effect is completed in the movable accessory 33c.

In step S2820-60, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether or not the roulette performance accessory operation flag is set in the roulette performance accessory operation flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-61 when the roulette performance accessory operation flag is set (S2820-60: Yes), and when the roulette performance accessory operation flag is not set (S2820-60: No), proceed to step S2820-64.

In step S2820-61, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the roulette effect accessory end standby timer counter in the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. If the roulette performance accessory end standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-61: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-62, and if the roulette performance accessory end wait timer counter is greater than 0 (S2820-61: Yes), proceed to step S2820-64.

In step S2820-62, the lamp CPU 150a clears the roulette effect accessory operation flag.

In step S2820-63, the lamp CPU 150a clears the accessory drive information for the roulette effect. When the accessory driving information for the roulette performance is cleared, the operation of the operation mode of the roulette performance ends in the movable accessory 33c.

In step S2820-64, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the SP development promotion accessory in operation flag is set in the SP development promotion performance accessory in operation flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-65 when the SP development promotion performance accessory is in operation flag is set (S2820-64: Yes), and when the SP development stimulation performance accessory is in operation flag is not set ( S2820-64: No), proceed to step S2820-68.

In step S2820-65, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the SP development promotion performance accessory end standby timer counter in the lamp RAM 150b is greater than 0. If the SP development promotion accessory end standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-65: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-66, and if the SP development stimulation performance accessory end wait timer counter is larger than 0 (S2820-65: No), S2820-65: Yes), proceed to step S2820-68.

In step S2820-66, the lamp CPU 150a clears the SP development promotion accessory in operation flag.

In step S2820-67, the lamp CPU 150a clears the accessory drive information for the SP development promotion performance. When the accessory drive information for the SP development promotion effect is cleared, the operation of the operation mode for the SP development promotion effect ends in the movable accessories 33c and 33d.

In step S2820-68, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the SP development confirmed effect accessory in operation flag is set in the SP development confirmed effect accessory in operation flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-69 when the SP development confirmed performance accessory is in operation flag is set (S2820-68: Yes), and when the SP development confirmed performance accessory is in operation flag is not set ( S2820-68: No), proceed to step S2820-72.

In step S2820-69, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the SP development confirmed performance accessory end standby timer counter in the lamp RAM 150b is greater than 0. If the SP development confirmed performance accessory end standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-69: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-70, and if the SP development confirmed performance accessory end wait timer counter is greater than 0 ( S2820-69: Yes), proceed to step S2820-72.

In step S2820-70, the lamp CPU 150a clears the SP development confirmed effect accessory operation flag.

In step S2820-71, the lamp CPU 150a clears the accessory drive information of the SP development confirmed effect. When the accessory drive information of the SP development confirmed performance is cleared, the operation of the operation mode of the SP development confirmed performance is completed in the movable accessories 33c and 33d.

In step S2820-72, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the cut-in performance accessory is in operation flag is set in the cut-in performance accessory operation flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. The lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-73 if the cut-in performance accessory is in operation flag is set (S2820-72: Yes), and if the cut-in performance accessory is not in operation flag is set (S2820-72: Yes). 72: No), the process advances to step S2820-78.

In step S2820-73, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the cut-in performance accessory end standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than 0. If the cut-in performance accessory end standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-73: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-74, and if the cut-in performance accessory end wait timer counter is greater than 0 (S2820- 73: Yes), proceed to step S2820-78.

In step S2820-74, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the premium cut-in accessory flag is set in the premium cut-in accessory flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. If the premium cut-in accessory flag is set (S2820-74: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-75, and if the premium cut-in accessory flag is not set (S2820-74: No). , proceed to step S2820-76.

In step S2820-75, the lamp CPU 150a clears the premium cut-in accessory flag.

In step S2820-76, the lamp CPU 150a clears the cut-in performance accessory operation flag.

In step S2820-77, the lamp CPU 150a clears the accessory drive information for the cut-in effect. When the accessory drive information of the cut-in performance is cleared, the operation of the cut-in performance mode ends in the movable accessories 33c and 33d.

In step S2820-78, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the confirmed accessory operation first performance accessory operation flag is set in the determined accessory operation first performance accessory operation flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. . When the confirmed accessory operation first performance accessory operation flag is set (S2820-78: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-79, and sets the determined accessory operation first performance accessory operation flag. If it has not been set (S2820-78: No), the process advances to step S2820-82.

In step S2820-79, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the confirmed accessory operation first performance accessory end standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. When the confirmed accessory operation first performance accessory end standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-79: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-80, and sets the determined accessory operation first performance accessory end wait timer counter is greater than 0 (S2820-79: Yes), the process advances to step S2820-82.

In step S2820-80, the lamp CPU 150a clears the confirmed accessory object operation first performance accessory operation flag.

In step S2820-81, the lamp CPU 150a clears the accessory drive information of the confirmed accessory actuation first performance. When the accessory drive information of the confirmed accessory action first performance is cleared, the operation of the operation mode of the determined accessory action first performance is completed in the movable accessory objects 33a, 33c, and 33d.

In step S2820-82, the lamp CPU 150a checks whether the confirmed accessory operation second performance accessory operation flag is set in the determined accessory operation second performance accessory operation flag storage area of the lamp RAM 150b. . When the confirmed accessory operation second performance accessory operation flag is set (S2820-82: Yes), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-83, and sets the determined accessory operation second performance accessory operation flag. If it has not been set (S2820-82: No), the current accessory control timer update process ends.

In step S2820-83, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the confirmed accessory operation second performance accessory end standby timer counter of the lamp RAM 150b is greater than zero. When the confirmed accessory operation second performance accessory end standby timer counter is 0 (S2820-83: No), the lamp CPU 150a proceeds to step S2820-84, and sets the determined accessory operation second performance accessory end wait timer counter is larger than 0 (S2820-83: Yes), the current accessory control timer update process ends.

In step S2820-84, the lamp CPU 150a clears the confirmed accessory object operation second performance accessory operation flag.

In step S2820-85, the lamp CPU 150a clears the accessory drive information of the confirmed accessory actuation second performance. When the accessory drive information of the confirmed accessory action second performance is cleared, the operation of the operation mode of the determined accessory action second performance is completed in the movable accessory objects 33a, 33b, 33c, and 33d.

The above are the details of this embodiment. According to this embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the interest during the variation of the special symbols in the gaming machine 1. In this embodiment, in the confirmed accessory action second performance accessory which is a specific determined accessory action performance, the fall of the first movable accessory 33a→the rise of the second movable accessory 33b→the rise of the second movable accessory 33b A continuous operation is performed by the plurality of movable accessories, such as separation to the left and right and then swinging of the separated second movable accessory 33b. If the production control unit 120m receives a command to start fluctuation or confirm a pattern during execution of a production involving complex movements of such movable accessories, it immediately stops the movement of the movable accessories and returns to the initial position. If this is started, there is a risk that the moving objects may be evacuated in the wrong order, or that multiple movable objects may interfere and break. In this embodiment, when the production control unit 120m receives a command to start variation or confirm a symbol during a specific production within the symbol variation display, the movement of the movable accessory is continued, so the movable accessory may be broken. Things disappear.

1...Game machine 1, 2...Game board, 14...First starting opening, 14a...First starting opening detection switch, 15...Second starting opening, 15a...Second starting opening detection switch, 16...First big prize opening , 16a...First big winning hole detection switch, 17...Second big winning hole, 17a...Second big winning hole detection switch, 20...First special symbol display device, 21...Second special symbol display device, 31...Image Display device, 110...Main control board, 110a...Main CPU, 110b...Main ROM, 110c...Main RAM, 141a...General control unit, 120a...Sub CPU, 120b...Sub ROM, 120c...Sub RAM, 150...Image control board

Claims (1)

A presentation means including an image display means, a movable accessory, a lamp, and an audio output means;
A pattern display means;
Special game execution means,
Each lottery including a jackpot lottery is executed, and based on the lottery results, the symbol display means executes a symbol variation display, and the special game execution means executes a special game, and includes a command according to the progress of the game. a main control means capable of generating multiple types of commands;
an effect control means that receives a command generated by the main control means and performs an effect by the effect means in accordance with a symbol variation display and a special game based on the received command;
As a specific performance within the performance in accordance with the symbol variation display, the movable accessory is operating in a predetermined cut-in performance mode, and the audio output means outputs a performance sound effect of the cut-in performance. When the production control means receives a predetermined symbol confirmation command, the movable accessory ends the operation mode of the cut-in production, and the audio output means outputs a production sound effect of the cut-in production. continue ,
As a specific performance within the performance in accordance with the symbol variation display, the movable accessory is operating in a predetermined cut-in performance mode, and the audio output means outputs a performance sound effect of the cut-in performance. When the performance control means receives a predetermined opening designation command, the movable accessory ends the operation mode of the cut-in performance, and the audio output means outputs the production sound effect of the cut-in performance. Stop
A gaming machine characterized by: